Home

Pervasive.SQL V8 User's Guide

1. SELECT Person ID AS ID Number Person First Name AS First Name Person Last_Name AS Last Name FROM Person WHERE Person First _Name James 10 In the Or cell beside James type Lisa and press the Tab key SQL DM should show something similar to the following Column Alias Table Result Order by Criteria To sa Lora Person ID ID Number Person amp Person a First Name Person amp James Lisa Person Last_Name Last Name Person amp E SELECT Person ID AS ID Number Person First_Name AS First Name Person Last_Name AS Last Name FROM Person WHERE Person First_Name James OR Berson First _Name Lisa 11 SQL Data Manager Tasks At this point run the SQL statement to see what results are returned Click Tools Query gt Run Current SQL Statement in Grid or click p The statement returns 24 records where first name equals James or Lisa But your goal also requires the records where the last name begins with an N 0 P Q R S or T You obtain the last name information by using a logical AND ID Number Last name b 104101361 James Ogelvie 109894752 James Dort 100285859 Lisa Tumbleson 107606655 James Nupp 930516519 James Sinadinos
2. Note that when you perform an INSERT you must provide a value for all columns that cannot be null For the Course table Course Name and Course Dept_Name must contain values For practice however this task has you provide values for all four columns DC 12 Click Tools Query gt Run Current SQL Statement in Text or click B The Text Results tab contains the following result SQL statement script has executed successfully 1 row s were affected Now look at the data in the Course table again to verify that you inserted the record 13 Set Query Builder to build a SELECT statement change the query type to Select 14 Click the column All columns then run the SQL statement for output to the Grid Results tab 15 Scroll the results grid until you find the record you inserted PHI 201 The philosophy class you inserted is now part of the table Name Description Credit_Hours Dept_Name SPA 408 Study of Spanish Literature 3 Spanish THE 101 Theatre Performance 3 Theatre THE 102 Theatre Laboratory 1 Theatre THE 203 Makeup for Theatre 3 Theatre THE 204 Introduction to Technical Theatre 3 Theatre THE 305 Costume for Theatre 3 Theatre 406 Advanced Prod ion fo hea Ethics of Accounting Practices Philosophy gt To build a DELETE statement with Query Builder This task assumes the following 6 82 SQL Data M
3. Caution Backup all your data definition files DDFs and data files before you perform functions through Table Designer This tool gives you the ability to modify your database table definitions and data If you inadvertently set the options incorrectly or enter incorrect data you could change your files in an irreversible manner Full recovery is possible if you have performed a backup Table Designer includes a graphical user interface GUI that runs only on Windows 32 bit platforms You may start the GUI as a stand alone application or from within Pervasive Control Center PCC See Table Designer GUI Visual Reference on page 5 8 for an explanation of the objects on the GUI When running stand alone the tool can access databases and tables only on the machine from which you started Table Designer The File Tabbed Dialogs Table Designer Concepts menu commands differ somewhat depending on whether you start Table Designer stand alone or from PCC Table 5 1 Comparison of File Menu Commands Table Designer Started Stand alone Table Designer Started from PCC File Edit View Too Eie Edt yi D Save is Reset Open Table Open Database Create Table Create Database Delete Table Delete Database Exit The commands that allow you to work with databases and tables are absent when you start Table Designer from PCC PCC already provides this functionality through its ow
4. 1 13 Introducing Pervasive SQL DataExchange Crystal Reports for Pervasive SQL 1 14 Pervasive DataExchange is a separate product that allows you to synchronize two or more databases that have the same structure and are always or occasionally connected by a network This type of product is often used to keep the data of traveling employees synchronized with the home database or to allow regional offices to maintain fully synchronized copies of the corporate database The synchronized copies do not require having to download the entire database to each location Pervasive DataExchange offers solutions for data continuity data synchronization and data portals For more information about DataExchange contact your sales representative or visit the Pervasive Web site at http www pervasive com Another optional product Crystal Reports provides rich capabilities for creating and formatting reports based on Pervasive SQL databases Reports can be customized in thousands of ways and published as HTML Microsoft Word document Microsoft Excel document or other formats For more information about Crystal Reports contact your sales representative or visit the Pervasive web site at http www pervasive com Helpful Utilities Helpful Utilities Pervasive SQL comes with a variety of utilities designed to help you control and manage your databases Most of the utilities run only on 32 bit Windows and allow remote fun
5. Caution Under certain conditions related to relational database structures access to data through the Btrieve interface is restricted If you plan to use both SQL ODBC and Btrieve to access your data and your database is bound or uses triggers stored procedures security or referential integrity please refer to Interactions Between Btrieve and Relational Constraints on page 6 9 in Advanced Operations Guide 2 55 Using Pervasive SQL Using the Fast User Switching Feature of Windows XP Fast user switching is a feature of Windows XP Home Edition and Windows XP Professional that allows you to switch between users without logging off from the computer Multiple users can share a computer switching back and forth among users without closing the programs each user is running The users are all local to the computer not logged in via a network Only one user at a time can use the computer interactively The Pervasive SQL Server engine is not supported on Windows XP Professional or Home Edition This support will be available when Windows XP Server is released As of this release of Pervasive SQL the following Microsoft restrictions apply when fast user switching is turned on These are restrictions of the operating system The computer cannot be logged on to a network domain a The Microsoft Client for Netware cannot be installed a The Novell Client for Netware cannot be installed m The Serial Keys accessibili
6. Grid Results Text Results 7 OVE Rows Fetched 24 Also notice that the Aliases you specified appear as the column headings on the Grid Results tab I Optional If you want to view the results as text click Tools gt Query gt Run Current SQL Statement in Text or click B Click the Grid Result tab after you finish viewing the text results DEC 12 In the Criteria column for Person Last_Name type gt N greater than or equal to N and press the Tab key Column Alias Table Person ID ID Number Person Person First_Name First Name Person Lisa Person Last_Name Last name Person OO wee gt SELECT Person ID AS ID Number Person First_Name AS Pirst Name Person Last_Name AS Last name FROM Person WHERE Person First _Name James OR Person First_Name Lisa AND Person Last_Name gt N Notice that the grid does not contain an AND column You create a logical AND by adding the same database column to the grid and specifying the additional criteria 6 67 SQL Data Manager 6 68 13 Position the mouse pointer in the empty cell below DC Person Last_Name then press and hold down the left mouse button A list of available database columns appears Alias Table Result Order b
7. Volt on Aus eng Z x Click OK to add the location Jognanar If you want all directories below your location to be searched as well select the Include subfolders checkbox as shown in Figure 7 2 on page 7 21 M Include subfolders PSA Tasks 6 Return to Step 4 of the To select options for the View Components module task on page 7 21 gt To understand the results of your components view 1 A grid resembling Figure 7 3 displays showing the components found as a result of the task To select options for the View Components module on page 7 21 Figure 7 3 View Modules Results Module Usage Version Size Date Location 0 2195 2871 21kb 2001 5 8 c winnt system32 pscl dll loaded 8 0 55 0 413kb 2002 5 8 c program files common rl pscore dil loaded 8 0 55 0 102 kb 2002 5 8 c program files common ji pssax dll not loaded 1 0 0 1 864kb 2002 5 8 c program files common w3dbav80 dll not loaded 9 0 55 0 36kb 2002 5 8 c program files common ji bregnt exe not loaded 87 kb 2002 5 9 ss c pysw bin il bregtcp exe not loaded 116kb 2002 5 9 c pysw bin ia brequest exe not loaded 64kb 2002 5 9 c pvsw bin T mke dll not loaded 8 0 55 0 94kb 2002 5 9 c pysw bin 2 The grid contains the following information C iil la Table 7 1 Components Grid Items Item Description Module Name of the Pervasive or othe
8. To delete a table on page 5 36 GUI Object Table Designer GUI Visual Reference Description Related Information Delete Database Deletes a database from physical storage This command appears only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application To start Table Designer as a stand alone application on page 5 30 To delete a database on page 5 35 Exit Terminates the execution of Table Designer Prompts the user to save any changed information that has not been saved Edit menu Provides the following commands Insert Column Delete Column Move Up Move Down Insert Index Delete Index Insert Segment Delete Segment Reset Copy Paste 5 11 Table Designer 5 12 GUI Object Description Related Information Insert Column command or a icon Inserts a column above the cursor location This command and icon appear only on the Columns tab and Btrieve tab This command and icon are disabled on the Columns tab when Table Designer is in unlinked mode Modes on page 5 5 To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 To insert a column at end of column definitions on page 5 39 To insert a column between columns on page 5 39 Delete Column command or Ae icon Deletes the column currently selected This command and icon appear only on the Col
9. 1 Note The value of PVSW_ROOT is typically usr local psql Server data source the one to which remote calls will be redirected DSN name Driver usr local psql lib libsrde so Description Test Pervasive database DBQ DBName In addition each data source should be mentioned in the section ODBC Data Sources as in the following example ODBC Data Sources dsnNamel Pervasive SQL database dsnName2 Pervasive SQL database For example if you have in odbc ini MyDSN Driver usr local psql lib libsrde so Description test DBQ MyDB then your odbc ini should have ODBC Data Sources MyDSN Pervasive SQL database 2 38 Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server Note Because Linux is case sensitive the DSN name must be input exactly as listed under ODBC Data Sources The engine DSN can also be created using the dsnadd utility by typing the following at the command line dsnadd dsn DSNname db DBName An easy way to verify DBName and DSN configuration settings is to run the supplied odbctest program using the psq1 user account usr local psql bin odbctest DSN DEMODATA 3 Proceed to setting up client DSNs as explained in Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 2 39 Using Pervasive SQL Setting Up Client Access gt To make a Pervasive Client able to access a remote Pervasive SQL database This procedure explains how to create a Client DSN with the PCC Cl
10. A red x appears in the gray leftmost grid cell X The x indicates that the column is marked for deletion The column is not deleted until you save the table information Click File Save or click J The save action deletes the column from the definition files gt To set a Btrieve column name Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified 1 Click View gt Btrieve Data or click the Btrieve tab gt Table Designer Tasks Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell E b A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click in the Column Name grid cell Delete the existing column name use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete Type the name you want The name can be alpha numeric 20 characters or less To set a Btrieve column type Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click View gt Btrieve Data or click the Btrieve tab Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell s
11. Columns Indexes Statistics Btrieve QLUNLINKED MODE oe Linked Mode When Table Designer is in linked mode the changes you make are reflected in both the table definitions and the corresponding data files That is the changes are linked between the table definitions and the data The changes affect files ddf field ddf and index ddf and data files such as mkd files Linked mode is the default mode In this mode only the Columns tab Indexes tab and Statistics tab appear Use this mode to design your table characteristics in terms of SQL access Unlinked Mode When Table Designer is in unlinked mode the changes you make are reflected only in the table definitions The data files are not modified in any way The changes are not linked between the table definitions and the data The changes affect only data definition files such as file ddf field ddf and index ddf In this mode all four of the tabbed dialogs appear but the Columns tab is read only Use this mode to modify table definitions to match existing data files This mode also allows you to view the mappings 5 5 Table Designer Data Types Null Values 5 6 between Btrieve data types and SQL data types See Data Types on page 5 6 Refer to Pervasive SQL Supported Data Types on page A 2 in SQL Engine Reference for a list of the data types supported by the database engine That section lists the Pervasive SQL data types for the transactio
12. Introductory Network Information PSA Concepts What is the difference between a local machine and a remote NetWare volume A local machine is the machine on which you are working on A mapped drive to remote NetWare volume is a drive mapped on your local machine to a remote NetWare volume If select to remove Pervasive components from my remote NetWare volume what happens to the files on my local machine Nothing PSA does not remove components on your local machine when you select Mapped drive to NetWare volume Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Workgroup edition contains an appendix with basic how to information on maintaining a successful network If you are new to networking you are encouraged to read this section Please see Introduction to Networking on page A 1 in Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Workgroup edition Pervasive System Analyzer PSA PSA GUI Visual Reference The following dialog in PSA provides access to all its functionality Click on an area of the screen to learn more about the subfunction Figure 7 1 PSA Main Dialog Action Analyze system or Archive components Restore archives C Delete components or archives View loaded Pervasive modules Test active installation IV Test network communication IV Test transactional engine IV Test relational engine Log File C Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software PSALog txt ie GUI Object Description Related Infor
13. Se E All colu _ Student_ID _ Transaction 6 31 SQL Data Manager Query Builder Grid for SELECT Statements 6 32 The following image shows Query Builder Grid for SELECT statements The table below the image describes the GUI objects Figure 6 10 Query Builder Grid for SELECT Statements Column Alias Table Resutt Order by Group by Criteria or GUI Object Description Related Information Column Shows the name of the Query Builder Grid on database column being used page 6 14 in the SQL statement Column names are fully qualified with To build a SELECT the table name statement with Query table_name column_name Builder on page 6 63 Alias Shows the alternate name for Query Builder Grid on a column The alias name page 6 14 appears in an AS clause The alias also appears as the To build a SELECT column title in the results on statement with Query the Grid Results tab and the Builder on page 6 63 Text Results tab Table Shows the name of the table Query Builder Grid on with which the column is page 6 14 associated To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 Result Specifies whether to include Query Builder Grid on the column in Query Pane An page 6 14 X in the option square includes the co
14. The Pervasive SQL DBMS consists of a variety of components designed to help you achieve your data management goals For more detailed information about these components and how they interact please see Pervasive Products and Services MicroKernel Database Engine The MicroKernel Database Engine MKDE is the high performance heart of Pervasive SQL The MKDE works directly with the data files on your computer s hard disk When requested it directly inserts new data deletes unnecessary data and ensures the safety and integrity of the data files at all times even when people and applications are working with the data 1 3 Introducing Pervasive SQL 1 4 SQL Relational Database Engine The SQL Relational Database Engine SRDE interacts with the MKDE and the client described below It provides many powerful features including support for Microsoft ODBC sophisticated search and analysis capability and security Client also called Requester In client server systems the client resides on the computer workstation The client interacts with the client application and across the network with both the MKDE and the SRDE on the server Pervasive Control Center The Pervasive Control Center PCC is an easy to use graphical tool designed to help you create and manipulate databases and control your DBMS It allows you to access nearly all the functions of the product from one place For a brief tour of PCC see Chapter 3 U
15. To work with indexes on page 5 32 Statistics Tab on page 5 21 To display table statistics on page 5 32 GUI Object Table Designer GUI Visual Reference Description Related Information Btrieve Data Displays the Btrieve tab This command is enabled only if Table Designer is in unlinked mode Btrieve Tab on page 5 25 To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 To work with Btrieve data on page 5 32 Reset command Restores the information from the last saved state All To discard all changes Reset on page 5 37 or changes that have not been cal fear saved are discarded Tools menu Provides the following commands View Data Options View Data Views the data in the table To view table data on command This icon starts the SQL Data page 5 37 Manager utility or id icon Options Changes Table Designer Modes on page 5 5 mode To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 5 15 Table Designer 5 16 GUI Object Description Related Information Help menu Provides the following commands How Do Topics Search Documentation What s This Glossary Online Manuals Web Knowledge Base Web Developer Center Web About How Do I Lists the tasks that you can To display help on page perform with Table Designer 5 33 Topics Lists the documentation to
16. Synopsis sqlmgr start stop console Options sqlmgr start starts sqlmgr sqlmgr stop stops sqlmgr sqlmgr console starts sqlmgr in console mode Examples 1 SQLMGR required settings configure sqlmgr port SQLManager MgrUseTransport TCP MgrPort 1583 8 26 Available Utilities 2 Server data source the one to which remote calls are redirected Test dsn srv Driver usr local psql lib libsrde so Description Test Pervasive database DBName named database DBQ DEMODATA In addition each data source should be mentioned in the section ODBC Data Sources in odbc ini such as the following ODBC Data Sources dsnNamel Pervasive SQL data base dsnName2 Pervasive SQL data base An easy way to verify DBName and DSN configuration settings is to run the supplied odbctest program as user psq1 usr local psql bin odbctest DSN DEMODATA See Also butil 1 btadmin 1 syslogd 1 smb conf 5 dbmaint 1 API Programmer s Reference describes the Pervasive SQL API Notes Sqimgr Daemon Mode To start the SQL Manager as a daemon process assuming PVSW_ROOT bin is in your path run o sqlmgr start As a daemon sqlmgr relinquishes the control terminal and becomes the owner of the process group To stop the database server process run o sqlmgr stop 1 Note The package installation script automatically launches sqlmgr and incorporates its execution into rc sc
17. gt gt Can install Pervasive SQL on a server running Btrieve v6 x or earlier page 9 16 installed Pervasive SQL on my Netware 5 x server and it still says am running the older version What s wrong page 9 16 How do I keep my Workgroup Engine from starting up automatically when reboot page 9 16 Security Your security model is confusing When do login using an operating system user and password and when do login using a database user and password page 9 16 Why do I get a log in failed message when have a Pervasive_Admin group defined or have administrator rights page 9 17 Documentation Why does my computer have a different format of online documentation than my co worker s computer We both installed the same software page 9 17 User Counts How do apply a User Count Upgrade page 9 18 How does the Workgroup engine keep track of how many people are accessing the data If people access the data with two engines at the same time what happens page 9 18 Does the Workgroup engine use concurrent or per seat licensing page 9 18 Frequently Asked Questions Aside from licensing is there a limit to how many users can access a Workgroup engine simultaneously page 9 18 Networking How do know which protocol am using for communication can see other systems in Network Neighborhood but can t get to my data page 9 18 Difficulty Accessi
18. oouo a Listing Referential Constraints oe a da eraa en e ee E Checking Consistency na a a ee ee Checking Referential Integrity 0 0 0 E 00 0000 4 License Administrator 2 6 ee ee ee ees Working with License Keys and User Counts 5 License Administrator Concepts s coe a erei a eee Graphical User Interlace eaea a pS oe A E og E OE AA ee Command Line Interface ie a e a aa Aa en User Count Licenses for Prior Versions of Pervasive SQL onoono License Administrator GUI Visual Reference 0 0 0 0 cee ee ees GUI Dialog License Administrator Tasks 0 ee ee GUI Tasks CLI Tasks Table Designer A Tour of Pervasive Table Designer Table Designer Concepts e ria eae ee a a WE ee A E Overview Tabbed Dialogs baere ode ad eis Ob be oe ples 4 eed Rte ce des Modes Data Types Null Values PVS File Table Designer GUI Visual Reference 2 0 ea aa ee ee ee Mains Window crs RoE eat eh gOS Re teas PE ToS pe Ge hee E Ue etd BE ee BG Columns Tab Indexes Tab Statistics Tab Btrieve Tab Table Designer Taks e od saa g hae hae eee eee LES EES RS Ee General Tasks Columns Fasks s 3 4 ine eae aee Ain a 8 wk het ele ta she Bad ele Powe ey Indexes Tasks Statistics Fasksss 93 fd ale be Boe aes Sob oy GS Gla wd Sls oe bole Se wes Btrieve Tasks Contents 3 33 3 33 3 42 3 42 3 43 3 44 4 1 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 9 4 10
19. Programs Pervasive SQL V8 gt Other Utilities Monitor In Monitor select Options Connect and connect to the server in question Then choose MicroKernel Communications In the window that appears find Total Remote Sessions If the Peak value and the Maximum value are the same then it is likely that you have run out of sessions You can increase the number of sessions available by using Configuration in PCC You must have administrative permission on the server or membership in the Pervasive_Admin group in order to do so Connect to the server in PCC double click the Configuration icon for the target server then choose Server Access Number of Sessions Set the value to a number greater than the current setting 4 The remote database server is not running Solution Make sure that the remote database engine is running or ask your network administrator to do so 5 The remote database server is not accepting client requests Solution Use Configuration to make sure that the remote database engine is configured to accept remote requests You must have administrative permission on the server or membership in the Pervasive_Admin group in order to do so Connect to the remote server in PCC double click Configuration for the target server then choose Server Access Accept Remote Request Be sure the value is set to On An error was encountered while connecting to the server The most likely cause of this
20. T Person Last_Name gt N 19 Click Ascending in the list then press the Tab key The ORDER by clause is added to the SQL statement Notice that the ascending symbol is added to the Person table for the ID column All columns ID Bi ADi mnt Wann 20 Click Tools Query Run Current SQL Statement in Grid or click p 6 69 SQL Data Manager 21 The statement returns 10 records but now they are sorted in ascending sequence by ID number ID Number First Name Last 104101361 James Ogelvie 107606655 James Nupp 190907350 James Pacifico 231813169 James Nickson 273532268 Lisa Rap 322662943 James Pow 525012992 Lisa Simpson 722118776 James Queale 729357252 James Ruvaldt 930516519 James Sinadinos You have now completed your first goal for this task Your next goal is to determine from your database the average amount owed by the students You determine this with an aggregate query that uses a Group By clause The Person table does not contain the data you need so you are finished with it In Query Builder Diagram right click on the title bar of the Person table then click Remove all columns 22 Right click in the Query Builder Diagram then click Add table 23 On the Add Table dialog click Billing then Add then Close 6 70 SQL Data Manager Tasks SQL DM should show something similar to the following J All colu
21. The Grid Results grid must be active before you can change values in cells See To set Grid Results to allow changes to database data on page 6 58 6 45 SQL Data Manager 6 46 Note If you have a table without primary keys that contains records with duplicate data for a column you will be unable to update the duplicate data on the Grid Results tab SQL DM cannot tell one record from another because of the duplicate data This problem does not occur if your table contains primary keys because they prevent duplicate data You may use an UPDATE statement to change duplicate data Click the Grid Results tab Populate the grid by running a SELECT statement in Query Pane Click Tools Query Run Current SQL statement in grid or click After the grid has been populated by a SELECT statement you may directly update the table by making changes to the values in the active grid You must have the proper table permissions to affect the database data Change the data in one or more grid cells for a particular row An icon that indicates a changed value appears in the leftmost column of the row Perform an action in SQL DM that causes the changed data to be written to the database The following actions result in the data being changed Clicking the leftmost column of the row containing the changed data clicking the icon for the row Moving to a grid row or a cell different from the one containing the changed
22. To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder on page 6 76 To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 The following image shows Query Builder Grid for INSERT Grid for INSERT statements The table below the image describes the GUI objects Query Builder Grid for DELETE Statements SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference Figure 6 12 Query Builder Grid for INSERT Statements Column New Value GUI Object Description Related Information Column Shows the name of the Query Builder Grid on database column being used page 6 14 in the SQL statement Column names are fully qualified with To build an INSERT the table name statement with Query table_name column_name Builder on page 6 79 New Value Specifies the value to be Query Builder Grid on inserted into an existing column page 6 14 To build an INSERT statement with Query Builder on page 6 79 The following image shows Query Builder Grid for DELETE statements The table below the image describes the GUI objects 6 37 SQL Data Manager 6 38 Figure 6 13 Query Builder Grid for DELETE Statement Column Table Criteria or fea GUI Object Description Related Information Column Shows the name of the Query Builder Grid on database column being used page 6 14 in the SQL statement Column names are fully qualified wi
23. Web scalable to 1 10 What s New 1 18 Windows Database Server Engine starting and stopping 2 3 Database Workgroup Engine starting and stopping 2 7 16 Index XP operating system fast user switching 2 56 running Workgroup engine with fast user switching 2 57 support for 2 56 tray icon with fast user switching 2 57 types of users for fast user switching 2 56 Windows server migrating to NetWare 9 28 Wizards check database name of exe 3 8 create database name of exe 3 8 create table name of exe 3 8 data export name of exe 3 8 data import name of exe 3 8 drop database name of exe 3 8 drop table name of exe 3 8 null conversion name of exe 3 9 Pervasive System Analyzer name of exe 3 9 Wizards in PCC 3 8 Workgroup engine database access 2 43 keeping from autostarting 9 16 licensing 9 18 maximum users 9 18 simultaneous access 9 18 stopping under fast user switching 2 57 X XP see Windows XP operating system Xtrieve replacement for 9 27 Z Z DBA 1 10
24. gt To change Table Designer mode 1 Click Tools Options The Options dialog appears 2 Deselect the current option For example if Table Designer is in linked mode deselect uncheck the option Table linked mode 3 Click OK or click Apply then OK The lower right corner of the Table Designer window indicates the current mode UNLINKED MODE or LINKED MODE Note that only in unlinked mode do all four tabbed dialogs appear Table Designer Tasks Pervasive Table Designer DEMODATA Billing Eile Edit View Tools Help PHG se AAa F Column name Size Position Decimal Null Case Columns Indexes Statistics Btrieve KA LUNLINKED MODE oe To display help Click Help then the type of help you want How Do P Lists the tasks that you can perform with Table Designer Topics Lists the documentation topics for Table Designer Search Documentation Searches for a string throughout the installed set of Pervasive SQL documentation What s This Identifies objects in the Table Designer GUI e Glossary Defines terms used in the Pervasive SQL documentation and products Online Manuals Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can reference the online manuals Knowledge Base Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can query the Pervasive SQL Knowledge Base for additional information about Pervasive SQL Deve
25. penpe ep ee 2 40 Choosing a Computer Naine resero esi ee ee 2 41 Choosing a Computer Name from a Network List 2 2 0 000 2 41 Create Database Wizard Client DSN 1 2 0 0 00 0 0000 2 41 Create Database Wizard Client DSN Confirmation 2 42 Pervasive ODBC Client DSN Setup Screen 2 2 ee ee 2 43 Pervasive ODBC Client DSN Options 0 0 0000008 2 44 Pervasive ODBC Client DSN Setup Screen 2 2 2 2 eee eee 2 44 Accessing Pervasive Data using Microsoft Excel 0 00 0 2 47 Excel Display of ODBC Source Liste rs e a eiea e ee 2 47 Create a New Database using Microsoft Access 2 0 eee ee 2 48 Importing External Data Using Access 2 ee ee ee ee 2 49 Access Display of ODBC Source List 2 ee 2 49 Using Pervasive Data in Microsoft Access 2 ce ee ee 2 51 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 33 3 34 3 35 3 36 3 37 3 38 3 39 Figures Pervasive Control CENT oe Ea E E EA EE eee 3 2 Registering a NewEngine 2 aaa ee 3 4 Choosing a Computer Name 2 ee ees 3 4 Choosing a Computer Name from a Network List 00 3 5 DOS Command Line Screen Example 2 0 2 0 000 000 0004 3 8 Create Database Wizard Dialog Box ea a po eee ee ees 3 10 Create Database Wizard Complete Dialo
26. 4 16 5 2 5 2 5 3 5 5 5 6 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 8 5 18 5 20 5 21 5 25 5 28 5 28 5 29 5 29 5 30 5 30 Contents 6 SQL Data Manager 6a ate er ee ie eS ee i le 6 1 A Tour of Pervasive SQL Data Manager SQL Data Manager Concepts 2 ee ee 6 2 OVERVIEW hn Bot ew RN ee eR Oe ae Ee ee a a 6 2 REStriGtiONS 4 6543 ope S ays Shen Phe eee ete een areas Ge ae See 6 3 Results Fabs inv a ata ae gee ik gids Ok Aes TAC aE a OAS 6 4 Panes sid cates et hee Bi tek ates eh oa aN Bh 5 AL athe Beh S 6 8 SOL References o G08 fee eke OE ES OEE EA RS a a 6 15 SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference 0 0 0 200000 0000 8 6 16 Main Window s soea ese ka Be ee ea ge ee ee ee 6 16 Query Builder Diagram 2 ee 6 31 Query Builder Grid for SELECT Statements 0 0 6 32 Query Builder Grid for UPDATE Statements 0 0 6 35 Query Builder Grid for INSERT Statements 0 0 6 36 Query Builder Grid for DELETE Statements 0 0 6 37 SQL Data Manager Tasko doe pea e eee 6 40 General sl Aasks ena sath e Aer acd weedeat cg Mave A E Eo eR Se oe Nena sia 6 40 Query Pane Tasken ccna dite pce eh wt aes E ek E Bi Grea el goes eure BS 6 40 Execution and Results Tasks 2 e a a a a a 6 41 Query Builder Tasky erk oa aona ee ee 6 41 7 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA nananana anaana 7 1 Usage Help for the Diagnostic Utility in Pervasive SQL V8 PSA CONCEP tS Sis sae ck we aaa e ok aa aig
27. Developer Center also provides access to an expansive technical library and training information http www pervasive com developerzone Developer Genter a The Developer Center is brought to you by the Developer Resource teams across Pervasive Software and is dedicated to delivering you timely and up to date information regarding application development with Pervasive SQL 2000i C Builder C COBOL DataFlex Delphi Java Magic Pascal PHP Visual Basic Visual C LANGUAGES Active X Btrieve DTI DTO Java Libraries JDBC ODBC OLE DB ADO PDAC CHOOSE YOUR PATH ACCESS METHODS 10 3 Pervasive SQL Resources and Contacts Pervasive SQL Knowledge Base 10 4 The Pervasive SQL Knowledge Base Online is a searchable database for technical information regarding installation configuration component management product defect status and answers to the frequently asked questions FAQs The Knowledge Base shown below uses an associative problem solving technology to perform contextual searches and can be used to quickly find specific answers to your questions about Pervasive products http support pervasive com eSupport N Base Search guidelines Search by Context Enter a phrase or statement that best describes the problem Example reading from cd rom returns status 94 CT e Top Solutions FTP Site FTP Site Pervasive Software strives to maintain close ties to devel
28. PHI 305 Political Philosophy 3 Philosophy PHI 406 Ethical Theory 3 Philosophy PHI 407 Symbolic Logic 3 Philosophy PHY 101 Introduction to Physics 3 Physics SQL Data Manager Tasks 5 Activate word wrap in Query Pane if it is not already activated 6 Set Query Builder to build an INSERT statement Query type 21x OK aga C c Cancel Delete 7 In Query Builder Diagram click the columns Name Description Credit_Hours and Dept_Name Course All columns E Nane t Description t Credit_Hours Column New Value Course Name Course Description Course Credit_Hours Course Dept_Name INSERT INTO Course Notice that the 4 symbol appears in the table window 8 Inthe New Value column for Course Name type PHI 201 and press the Tab key 9 In the New Value column for Course Description type Ethics of Accounting Practices and press the Tab key 10 In the New Value column for Course Credit_Hours type 3 and press the Tab key 11 In the New Value column for Course Dept_Name type Philosophy and press the Tab key 6 81 SQL Data Manager SQL DM should show something similar to the following PF New ae PHI 201 Ethics of Accounting Practices 3 Philosophy Column Course Name Course Description Course Credit_Hours Course Dept_Name
29. This is valid after the sign The following example shows invalid comments SELECT FROM tl This is NOT valid before the This is NOT a valid comment because and are not supported SELECT FROM t2 SQL Data Manager Tasks Note If the cursor is positioned after the statement separator the next statement is current This is true even if the statement indicator the yellow arrow gt is still on the line containing the cursor An example helps clarify this Suppose you have the following lines in Query Pane SELECT FROM Person This is a comment SELECT FROM Faculty SELECT FROM Class You run the first statement then position the cursor in front of the t in This The cursor is positioned after the statement separator on that line The statement indicator still points to the line SELECT FROM Person but the actual current line is SELECT FROM Faculty If you click to move to and run the next line the statement indicator moves to and runs SELECT FROM Class gt To cancel undo typing actions in Query Pane 1 Perform one of the following actions a Click Edit Undo or press Cont ro1 Z for each typing action that you wish to cancel For example if you have typed Select From Person and you click Edit Undo the word Person is removed If you click Edit Undo again the word From is removed and
30. To delete an index on command selected page 5 49 or This command and icon Ea icon appear only on the Indexes tab Insert Segment command or icon Inserts a segment for the currently selected index This command and icon appear only on the Indexes tab To insert an index segment on page 5 49 Delete Segment Deletes the index segment To delete an index command currently selected segment on page 5 50 or This command and icon appear only on the Indexes E con tap Reset Restores the information from To discard all changes the last saved state All changes that have not been saved are discarded Reset on page 5 37 Copy command or icon Copies the information in a grid cell to the clipboard To copy data from a grid cell on page 5 38 5 13 Table Designer 5 14 GUI Object Description Related Information Paste command Pastes the clipboard data into the grid cell where the cursor To paste data into a grid cell on page 5 38 Or is located A icon View menu Provides the following commands Columns Indexes Table Statistics Btrieve Data Reset Columns Displays the Columns tab Columns Tab on page 5 18 To work with columns on page 5 32 Indexes Displays the Indexes tab Indexes Tab on page 5 Table Statistics Displays the Statistics tab 20
31. and Visual Basic are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation NetWare and Novell are registered trademarks of Novell Inc NetWare Loadable Module NLM Novell DOS Transaction Tracking System and TTS are trademarks of Novell Inc All other company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Copyright 2002 Pervasive Software Inc All rights reserved Reproduction photocopying or transmittal of this publication or portions of this publication is prohibited without the express prior written consent of the publisher This product includes software developed by Powerdog Industries Copyright 1994 Powerdog Industries All rights reserved This product includes software developed by KeyWorks Software Copyright 2002 KeyWorks Software All rights reserved This product includes software developed by DUNDAS SOFTWARE Copyright 1997 2000 DUNDAS SOFTWARE LTD all rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org The ODBC Driver Manager for NetWare ODBC NLM included in this product is based on the GNU iODBC software Copyright 1995 by Ke Jin lt kejin empress com gt and was modified by Simba Technologies Inc in June 1999 This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 o
32. ascending ID number 1 Click View Query Builder Diagram or click 8 The Add Table dialog the Query Builder Diagram and the Query Builder Grid appear Click Person in the tables list then click Add Click Close The SQL statement is started in Query Pane as soon as you add a table to Query Builder Diagram SQL DM should show something similar to the following Person All columns Column Alias Table Result Order by Criteria Won a O O 0 4 gt SELECT FROM Person 4 of If you see a different type of grid then you need to set Query Builder to build a SELECT statement The next two steps show you how Complete both steps even if you see the same type of grid Click Tools Query Builder Change Query Type or click The Query type dialog appears SQL Data Manager Tasks 5 Click Select then OK Query type Query Builder is now set to build a SELECT statement 6 In Query Builder Diagram click the columns ID First_Name and Last_Name for table Person Person ID Person First _Name Person Last _Name FROM Person Notice that the columns appear in the grid and that the SQL statement in Query Pane continues to be built D C DCC 7 Inthe Alias column for Person ID Person First_Name and Person Last_Name type the following re
33. display appear You should then see the multiple modules on successive rows as shown in Figure 7 5 Figure 7 5 Sorting Multiple Occurrences of a Component Module Usage Version Size Date w3crs1 OF dil codod 8 0 100 0 364KB 14 0ct 02 C PVSW BIN Sort by Module w3dbay75 dll Not loaded 55KB 12May 00 C PVSW BIN w3dbav78 dll Notloaded 8 0 100 0 60KB 14 0ct 02 C PVS W BIN w3dbav80 dll Not loaded 8 0 100 0 36KB 14 0ct 02 C Program Files Co w3dbav80 dll Not loaded 8 0 100 0 36KB 140ct 02 CAPYSWABIN w3dbnv7 dll Not loaded 8 0 100 0 44KB 9 14 0ct 02 C APYSWSBIN eel 5 After you have sorted the modules by name you can determine whether the multiple modules have the same version and which ones are loaded in memory If you see two Pervasive components both marked with the same version such as 8 0 xxx 0 you may want to check to see which is loaded in memory and that its location is where you expect Pervasive System Analyzer can test your system in these ways To test your network page 7 25 To specify advanced settings for network test page 7 25 To understand your network test results page 7 26 To test the transactional database engine page 7 27 To understand your transactional database engine test results page 7 27 PSA Tasks To test the relational database engine page 7 27 To understand your relational database engine test results page 7 28 gt To test your network 1
34. dsn TEST host NewDev sdsn NewTest For more information about the dsnadd utility please see Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server edition 2 45 Using Pervasive SQL Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications This section explains how to access data using Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel The examples covered in this section are Accessing Data Using Microsoft Excel on page 2 46 Accessing Data Using Microsoft Access on page 2 48 Before You Does the Database Have a DSN Available Begin Accessing Data gt Using Microsoft Excel 2 46 If you are connecting from a client workstation or from a Workgroup workstation to a server you must have a Client DSN defined on your workstation for the given remote database Information on how to create a Client DSN is provided in Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 If you have a Workgroup engine installed on your computer you may have an Engine DSN defined on your computer for either local or remote databases Information on how to create an Engine DSN is provided in Setting Up Database Access on Windows on page 2 25 Note The instructions in this section apply only to Pervasive SQL V8 not to previous versions To access Pervasive data using Excel You must have the Pervasive SQL client or any version of the Pervasive SQL engine installed on the computer where you are using Excel Start Excel From the Data menu cho
35. for further review To specify a different location for the PSA log file on page 7 28 PSA Tasks PSA Tasks The following are the primary tasks for PSA Analyze and Archive Tasks To choose the search method for PSA page 7 16 To archive components found by PSA page 7 16 Restore Archive Tasks To select the drive that contains archives page 7 17 m To restore archived files page 7 17 Delete Components or Archives Tasks m To specify the location at which you wish to delete components or archives page 7 18 To specify what to delete on a Windows machine page 7 19 To specify what to delete on a NetWare machine page 7 20 View Components Tasks To select options for the View Components module page 7 21 To add a component to the search list page 7 21 m To add a location to the search list page 7 22 To understand the results of your components view page 7 23 Test Active Installation Tasks m To test your network page 7 25 To specify advanced settings for network test page 7 25 To understand your network test results page 7 26 To test the transactional database engine page 7 27 To understand your transactional database engine test results page 7 27 m To test the relational database engine page 7 27 To understand your relational database engine test results page 7 28 7 15 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA Analyze and A
36. installation procedure They are available as an option in the Custom installation procedure The content is accessible through the Start menu Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 Documentation gt Pervasive SQL V8 For NetWare users you can access the online documentation on any Windows workstation that has the database client installed For Linux users you can access the online documentation on the server in HTML format Certain utilities also provide manpages You can order printed copies of the documentation from your sales representative Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server Edition and Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Workgroup Edition help you get Pervasive SQL running with installation setup and troubleshooting information Both Getting Started editions cover the following topics Preparing to install Pervasive SQL V8 Installing Pervasive SQL V8 Upgrading from previous versions of Pervasive SQL or Btrieve Configuring Pervasive SQL V8 Troubleshooting your Pervasive SQL V8 installation m Where to go for Pervasive SQL product information and technical support Introducing Pervasive SQL What s New User s Guide Advanced Operations Guide SQL Engine Reference Status Codes and Messages Pervasive Products and Services 1 18 Pervasive SQL What s New provides an overview of the new features and changed behavior for the current release of Pervasive SQL relative to the most r
37. on a Linux workstation 2 45 using ODBC Administrator 2 43 to set up database access for a client workstation 2 40 on a Linux server 2 37 on a NetWare server 2 31 on a Windows server 2 25 on a Workstation or Workgroup engine 2 25 to start and stop database engine on Linux 2 9 on NetWare 2 8 on Windows server 2 3 2 6 2 7 to start and stop Windows services within PCC 3 28 to start database engine by using Net Start or Btisc exe on Windows server 2 6 to stop database engine by using Net Stop or Btisc exe on Windows server 2 6 6 Index to turn off database security 3 23 to turn on database security 3 22 to verify database consistency 3 44 to view registered database engines 3 6 Icons in PCC interpreting 3 6 Identifying service pack level 9 15 Import Wizard see Data Import Wizard Importing data 3 33 impwizrd exe 3 8 Inconsistencies database repairing 3 46 Increasing user count licenses 9 18 Index defined 1 6 Index ddf 9 22 Indexes See Table Designer Information how to find 1 17 Inserting acolumn 5 39 Installation client FAQ 9 15 data files not affected by 9 15 reboot NetWare 5 x after 9 16 InstallScout replaced by Pervasive System Analyzer 7 1 Integrity enforced 2 55 Interfaces ADO 1 11 ODBC 1 11 OLE DB 1 11 supported for programming 9 26 J Join defined 1 8 Joining tables in SQL Data Manager 6 13 6 87 L Legacy data creating DDFs for 9 20 Legacy file format converting data files to 9 20 License
38. tell if can use ODBC to access my data files There are several ways to find out First look for DDF files where the data files are located If you see them then most likely you can access the database using ODBC Because it is possible to have DDF files located in a different directory you should also use PCC to determine whether a database has been created for the data files you want to access Finally you can ask your application vendor whether their application uses ODBC to access the data files How can a hard coded filepath in a DDF be changed Using PCC right click on the table and choose Tasks Edit table design Click on the Statistics tab Locate the parameter Table Location and change the value to the file path you wish to use From the menu choose File Save It may appear that the path has not changed To confirm the change open the X File system table and look at the Xf Loc field for the given user table If you cannot see the system tables in PCC click on the View menu and choose Show system tables You can also use the ALTER TABLE USING statement in SQL to change the data file used by a particular table Refer to SQL Engine Reference for further information I have DDFs from Scalable SQL 3 01 Are they compatible with Pervasive SQL V8 DDFs from Scalable SQL 3 01 are not compatible with Pervasive SQL V8 You can use the CNVDDF utility provided on the Pervasive web site to convert the older DDFs to the new
39. the Americas e CIC 00 800 1212 3434 Belgium France Germany Italy Luxembourg The Netherlands Spain Sweden Switzerland and the U K e CIC 32 0 23 37 61 Any other European Middle Eastern African or Asian countries excluding Japan For technical support and discussions about Pervasive products in general Visit the DevTalk forum at http Avww pervasive com devtalk Visit http www pervasive com company contact index asp for other contact information 10 12 Index Symbols PVS file 5 7 A Access conflict 9 18 Access methods 9 26 Access rights adding a group 3 23 adding a user 3 25 cannot perform the operation 9 8 problems due to lack of O S rights 9 4 See also Rights Accessing remote database 2 43 Act as part of the operating system 2 14 Active Directory create Pervasive_Admin group on domain controller 2 14 2 16 Active grid See SQL Data Manager Add column button 3 16 Add index button 3 17 Add segment button 3 17 Adding databases 3 10 See also Table Designer groups 3 23 tables 3 15 See Table Designer users 3 25 Admin share not supported 9 19 Administrative rights 2 10 for Active Directory 2 11 granting 2 10 required to create a database 3 10 troubleshooting 9 17 user rights policy 2 14 Administrator user fast user switching 2 56 ADO 1 11 Advanced Operations Guide 1 18 Advantages of Pervasive SQL 1 10 Analyzing your system 7 1 Attributes column 3 17 Autostart keeping
40. use the same DDF on the second Btrieve file page 9 25 have owner names set on my Btrieve files After created a DSN cannot open the files using ODBC What s wrong page 9 25 Is there a client side requester for the SRDE page 9 26 Is ODBC the only method of access for Pervasive SQL page 9 26 9 13 Basic Troubleshooting 9 14 Is there a single database file housing all the data data definitions stored procedures security table relationships and so on as in some other products page 9 26 Does the SQL engine SRDE have scheduler capabilities to run stored procedures or other types of scripts designed to access and affect data page 9 26 Upgrading from Btrieve 6 15 After upgrade the database engine on NetWare is the SQL engine SRDE going to interpret Btrieve calls or is it necessary to continue running the Btrieve nilm page 9 27 On NetWare will the 6 15 Btrieve NLM interface with the new MicroKernel engine or will the 8 x version of Btrieve NLM have to be loaded to continue accessing the current Btrieve files page 9 27 My current files are in a 5 x format Will they have to be converted to be accessed by the SQL engine SRDE page 9 27 have DDF files today that were used by a product called Xtrieve They are ina 4 x file format Can they be used by the SQL engine or will they have to be converted page 9 27 Is there a tool that replaces Xtrieve page 9 27 e
41. 2 3 4 5 Select Test Network as shown in Figure 7 1 on page 7 12 Enter the machine name or TCP IP address of the machine you wish to test as shown in Figure 7 6 The machine can be the machine where you are currently located or a remote machine Figure 7 6 Selecting the Machine on which to Run a Network Test Target machine 127 0 0 1 Example myservername or 192 221 253 2 G This test requires the Pervasive SOL relational and transactional engines running on the target machine specified If you want to control how the tests are run click Advanced Settings and see To specify advanced settings for network test on page 7 25 Otherwise continue with this procedure Click Next to start the test PSA runs a series of tests and displays the results See To understand your network test results on page 7 26 gt To specify advanced settings for network test 1 2 By default PSA uses the first available protocol You can use this screen to force PSA to use one or more protocols To force PSA to use protocols select the Use Only These Protocols button Use the checkboxes to select the protocols you want PSA to test as shown in Figure 7 7 Note The NetBIOS protocol is not supported on Pervasive SQL Server engines The SPX protocol is not supported on Pervasive SQL Workgroup engines 7 25 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA 7 26 Figure 7 7 Selecting Protocols for Network Tests Pro
42. 2 of this book and or see Advanced Operations Guide After you have created the Engine DSN on the server you can access the database using PCC If you want to access the database using ODBC based applications then you need to use ODBC Administrator to create a local client DSN on your workstation You can do so by choosing Start Programs Pervasive SQL V8 Other Utilities ODBC Administrator In ODBC Administrator click the System tab then click Add In the window that appears select Pervasive ODBC Client Interface and click Finish In the following Frequently Asked Questions window type ina name for the local DSN and enter the server name Click Get DSN List In the box labeled Data Source Name choose the DSN that you created on the NetWare server Click OK You can now access the database on the NetWare server by connecting to the local client DSN you just created have two similar Btrieve files and created a DDF for the first one Since they are similar can use the same DDF on the second Btrieve file The answer depends on how similar the files are If the two files differ only in the number of records you can use the same DDF file If there are any differences at all in the number order names or types of fields or indexes you cannot use the same DDE In other words you can only use the same DDF if the record structure of the two files is identical have owner names set on my Btrieve files After cr
43. 2000 Windows NT Windows 2000 Log On s Log on as amp amp System Accoun Local System account IV Allow Service to Interact with Desktop Allow service to interact with desktop K This Account jal This account 2 13 Using Pervasive SQL 2 14 Logging On as This Account If you change the Log on as setting to This account you must change the user rights policy Act as part of the operating system for the account Otherwise remote login fails For example both the Monitoring utility and the Configuration utility require that you log in to the operating system on the machine where the database engine is running You will receive a message that login failed if the account specified for This account cannot act as part of the operating system Note that even the Administrator account requires that you set the user rights policy for Act as part of the operating system You specify This account on the services property sheet Windows NT Windows 2000 Log On As Log on as System Account P Allow Service to Interact with Desktop Local System account I Allow service to interact with desktop This Account Administrator ia This account Administrator Password a ai Password Confirm Password Confirm password User Rights Policy Tasks The following tasks explain how to change the user rights policy gt To Set User Rights Policy on Window
44. 6 54 copy text from Text Results tab 6 61 create an SQL query or script 6 44 cut or delete text from Query Pane 6 55 cut or delete text from Text Results tab 6 61 delete row s from Grid Results tab 6 59 delete row s on Query Builder Grid 6 88 display help 6 48 exit SQL DM 6 49 find text in Query Pane 6 53 identify machine and database currently open 6 43 insert a row into Query Builder Grid 6 87 joint tables in Query Builder Diagram 6 87 layout the printed page 6 55 move the cursor within Query Pane and run the SQL statement to which it moves 6 50 move the cursor within Query Pane without running any SQL statements 6 49 open a database 6 44 open an SQL script 6 48 paste within Query Pane 6 55 print the contents of Query Pane 6 55 remove a table from Query Builder Diagram 6 87 replace text in Query Pane 6 54 run a single SQL statement 6 56 run all SQL statements 6 57 save an SQL query asa script 6 47 select text in Query Pane 6 54 select text on Text Results tab 6 61 set default behavior for Grid Results grid 6 59 set Grid Results grid to allow changes to database data 6 58 set query timeout period 6 51 set query type for Query Builder 6 62 set SQL statement separator 6 51 set the font for grid results or text results 6 57 set the font for Query Pane 6 56 show or hide Query Builder Diagram 6 62 show or hide Query Builder Grid 6 62 show or hide Query Pane 6 49 start SQL DM as a stand alone appl
45. 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 vil Figures 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 27 2 28 2 29 2 30 2 31 2 32 2 33 2 34 2 35 viii Windows NT Services Dialog Box 2 ee ee 2 3 Windows 2000 Services Dialog Box 2 ee ee 2 4 Windows NT Services Dialog Box esa roe ee ee 2 5 Windows 2000 Services Dialog Box 2 2 ee ee 2 5 Connect to Remote Server Dialog BOX e pa seas iha one ee 2 20 Example DSN Configurations siase eee 2 22 Registering a NewEngine 2 2 ee 2 25 Choosing a Computer Name ras ae aa E eee 2 25 Choosing a Computer Name from a Network List 000 2 26 Create an Engine DSN and Connect to a Server Database 2 27 Naming the New Database on the Server 2 2 ee ee 2 27 Advanced Settings Window gt oeseri si ee ee ee 2 28 Create DBNAME WIndows usua pa ea ee 2 29 Registering a New Engines 2 le e ee ee ee a S 2 31 Choosing a Computer Name 1 ETEA EAEEREN E ee 2 32 Choosing a Computer Name from a Network List 2 0 0 000 2 32 Create an Engine DSN and Connect to a Server Database 2 33 Naming the New Database on the Server 2 0 ee ee ee 2 33 Create Database Wizard Complete os assor enseri ee ee ee 2 34 Advanced Settings Window ssaa eaa ores a ee ee 2 35 Create DBNAME Window 2 ee ee 2 35 Registering a NewEngine 2
46. API Programmer s Reference describes the Pervasive SQL API PVSW_ROOT doc readme html contains useful configuration information and release notes PVSW_ROOT denotes the directory where Pervasive SQL V8 is installed Notes Daemon Mode To start the Pervasive SQL database server as a daemon process assuming PVSW_ROOT bin is in your path run mkded start As a daemon mkded relinquishes the control terminal and becomes the owner of the process group To stop the database server process run mkded stop Note The package installation script automatically launches mkded and incorporates its execution into rc scripts for automatically starting and stopping the database server as part of the system boot sequence Most MKDE errors are handled by returning status codes to applications that call the BTRV and BTRVID functions Occasionally special informational warning and error messages are printed directly by the MKDE for example creation of default configuration file roll forward after for crash recovery unable to open directory for log files When running in daemon mode the MKDE prints these messages to the Linux system s console window dev console You can bring up a console window on your system using xterm C amp Available Utilities Depending on your system configuration root access may be required to bring up a console window If the MKDE is unable to print to dev console then it w
47. Advanced Operations Guide m INSERT on page 3 85 in SQL Engine Reference PVS File Table Designer Concepts a Null Value in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK When you create a database with Table Designer a file with a pvs file extension is created in the same directory location as you specified for the database See steps 2 and 3 in To create a database on page 5 34 The pvs file contains the same name that you specified for the database The pvs file is a shortcut file that provides a convenient way to open Table Designer Double click the file name from the operating system file explorer to open Table Designer The list of databases displays and the database associated with the pvs file is selected Click OK to open the database For example if you create a database named DBAcct in C MyDatabases Table Designer also creates DBAcct pvs in C MyDatabases Ifyou double click DBAcct pvs or right click the file then click Open Table Designer opens to the list of databases and the name DBAcct is selected in the list You may delete the pvs file if you choose It is not required by Table Designer but provided solely as a convenience for you To re create a pvs file create an empty file with an ASCII editor and name the file the same as the database name but with a pvs file extension 5 7 Table Designer Table Designer GUI Visual Referen
48. DSN Click Yes 4 After the DSN has been removed click OK to exit ODBC Administrator 5 Ifyou are simply deleting an unwanted DSN you are finished If you need to re create the DSN you should refer to one or more of the following sections If you need to do this refer to this section Re create an Engine DSN ona Server One of engine or a Workgroup engine Setting Up Database Access on Windows on page 2 25 Setting Up Database Access ona NetWare Server on page 2 31 Setting Up Database Access ona Linux Server on page 2 37 Re create a Client DSN on a client Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 workstation 2 52 Deleting DSNs gt To Delete a DSN Using PCC 1 6 From the Start menu choose Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 Control Center Double click Pervasive SQL Engines If you wish to remove an Engine DSN on the server you must have administrative rights on the server to do so If you do not see the name of the server computer listed in the left hand window of PCC you must register the server See Registering or Removing a Server on page 3 4 Double click the icon representing the computer where you want to remove the DSN Double click Databases Right click on the database you wish to remove Choose Delete from the pop up menu In the Drop Database Wizard that appears clear Delete database name Caution Be certain Delete d
49. Data or click the Btrieve tab Click on the empty grid row below the last named column You may click on any empty cell in the row except for the leftmost cell The leftmost cell is used for positioning on existing columns A new column is inserted A blue asterisk appears in the leftmost cell The default name of the column is col_n where n is a number that automatically increments by one The first column you insert is col_1 the second col_2 and so forth The column is not added to the definition files until you save the database The following image shows a column inserted after the column named Head_of_Dept Column name Type Size Precision Scale Null Case Collate Default Name char 20 oO M Phone_Number decimal 11 0 mM Oo T Building_Name char 25 M L Room_Number uinteger O o Head_Of Dept ubigint Cl m Bicol integer a C ee Click File Save or click J The save action adds the column to the definition files gt To insert a Btrieve column between columns Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified 1 Click View gt Btrieve Data or click the Btrieve tab 2 Click on the leftmost cell of the column above which you want to insert a column A right pointing triangle appea
50. Displays information about the options and parameters no option or wrong option Displays information about the options and parameters See CLI Tasks on page 4 9 for the tasks pertaining to the CLI Each license specifies a user count A user count allows the specified number of computers to connect to the Pervasive database engine concurrently Users are counted by network address The IP address is used for TCP IP the IPX address is used for SPX IPX Each workstation that accesses Pervasive SQL as a client counts as one user Multiple applications on a single client computer are counted as one user not separate users Each Terminal Server session also counts as one user 4 3 License Administrator Licenses for Prior Versions of Pervasive SQL 4 4 Collectively all applications that access the database engine use the same network protocol and address and run on the same machine as the database engine count as one user If one application uses TCP IP and another application uses SPX IPX two licenses are counted if both applications run on the same machine Similarly if a machine contains multiple network cards a user would be counted for each unique network address being used Obtaining a User Count A user count is obtained in the form of a software license key issued by Pervasive Software or by your application vendor if the Pervasive SQL database engine is embedded in an application The Pervasiv
51. Error 1114 when trying to access my data or get an error saying ServerDSN or DBQ was not found in the connection string PCC can access remote server data sources DSNs using connections without client DSNs Many desktop applications such as Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access cannot do this You must create a client DSN on your local computer to provide access to data on the server through the remote server DSN To create a client DSN follow the instructions in Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 You must first make sure that a server DSN exists on the server you want to access get a message saying my Engine components version is different than my client components version When a client requester first connects to an engine the client requester compares its internal router version with the value returned from the engine by a Btrieve Version 26 call If the client version is older than the engine a message dialog box is displayed on the client system with the message Engine components Version is different from Client s along with a suggestion to run Pervasive System Analyzer PSA The same message is also logged in the client s PVSW LOG file This message is only a warning The client is General Troubleshooting not prevented from connecting to the engine in this situation Pervasive Software does test older clients against newer engines but guarantees compatibility between e
52. F To find text in Query Pane on page 6 53 Find Next Searches for the last string Query Pane on page 6 8 F3 specified for the Find actions To find text in Query Pane on page 6 53 Replace Replaces one string with Query Pane on page 6 8 Control H another in Query Pane To replace text in Query Pane on page 6 54 SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference oa icon GUI Object Description Related Information View menu Provides the following commands Query Pane Query Builder Diagram Query Builder Grid Set Font Word Wrap Query Pane Shows or hides Query Pane Query Pane on page 6 8 command By default Query Pane is shown when you start SQL To show or hide Query or DM Pane on page 6 49 Sal icon A database must be open to enable this command or icon Query Shows or hides Query Builder Query Builder Diagram Builder Diagram on page 6 11 Diagram A data b command ata asg must be oper to To show or hide Query enable this command or icon f or Builder Diagram on page 6 62 To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder on page 6 76 To build an INSERT statement with Query Builder on page 6 79 To build a DELETE statement with Query Builder on page 6 82 6 21 SQL Data Manager 6 22 GUI Object Descriptio
53. File Path 2 ee ee ee een 7 29 Viewing the PSA Log File 2 ee ee 7 29 Viewing the PSA Version rai aded ee ee ee 7 30 Tables 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 4 1 5 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 7 1 Comparison of Server and Workgroup Features 000 1 13 Summary of Pervasive SQL Utilities 2 0 ee ee 1 15 Pervasive SQL Engine States 6 ee ee 3 7 File Names of Wizards os uane Ge oo ay a era e Gee Bee oe oh wees de 3 8 Table Wizard Tools 2266 fie be be ae PE eae eS 3 16 Existing Table Properties 2 ee ee ee 3 30 Import Export Wizards Data Formats 0 00000 000 8 3 33 License Administrator Command Line Options and Parameters 4 3 Comparison of File Menu Commands 00020000048 5 3 Comparison of Active and Display only Grid 2 0 ee ee 6 5 Icons in Results Grid Indicator Column 2 2 a 6 6 Symbols Used Within a Table Window 000008 6 11 Components Grid ems erres 0 ee 7 23 xi Tables xii About This Manual This manual introduces you to Pervasive SQL utilities for Server and Workgroup products and shows you how to perform the basic tasks necessary to work with the application Topics include starting and stopping the database engine setting up access to a database and accessing data from other applications This manual also gives you a tour of the Pervasive Control Center PCC PCC allows you to manage Pervasive SQL utilities within
54. Grid Results To select multiple rows press and hold down the left mouse button Move the mouse pointer across the column indicator s for the row s you wish to select You may also press and hold down the Shift or Control key then click the indicator column for the desired row s b Right click on a cell to set a starting place then press and hold down the left mouse button Move the mouse pointer across the cell s you wish to select c Left click within a cell then press and hold down the Shift key Use the cursor arrow keys to extend the selection d Right click on a single cell to select the contents of only that cell Ensure that no other rows or cells are selected 2 Right click then click Copy gt SQL Data Manager Tasks The copied data can be pasted into another application such as Microsoft Excel For example in Excel you would click on a cell right click then click Paste To work with text results Click the Text Results tab The Text Results tab shows in a text format the result of running SQL statements You cannot change the data values in the database by changing the text To clear results from Text Results tab Right click within the Text Results tab then click Clear To select text on Text Results tab Perform one of the following actions a Right click within the Text Results tab then click Select All or press Contro1 A Either action selects all of the contents on the tab b Press
55. Grid Results grid on page 6 45 m To save an SQL query as a script on page 6 47 To open an SQL script on page 6 48 To display help on page 6 48 m To exit SQL DM on page 6 49 Query Pane tasks help you use Query Pane To show or hide Query Pane on page 6 49 To move the cursor within Query Pane without running any SQL statements on page 6 49 Execution and Results Tasks Query Builder Tasks SQL Data Manager Tasks To move the cursor within Query Pane and run the SQL statement to which it moves on page 6 50 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 To wrap text within Query Pane on page 6 52 To cancel undo typing actions in Query Pane on page 6 53 To find text in Query Pane on page 6 53 To replace text in Query Pane on page 6 54 To select text in Query Pane on page 6 54 To copy text from Query Pane on page 6 54 To paste within Query Pane on page 6 55 To cut or delete text from Query Pane on page 6 55 To print the contents of Query Pane on page 6 55 To layout the printed page on page 6 55 To toggle insert overtype mode on page 6 56 To set the font for Query Pane on page 6 56 Execution and results tasks apply to the running of SQL statements and working with results on the Grid Results tab and the Text Results tab To run a single SQL statement on page 6 56 To run all SQL st
56. Help HAvl SOG lar F t Size Precision Scale Null Case Collate Default Column name Type Columns J J GUI Object Description Related Information Column Name Specifies the alpha numeric To set a column name name for the column The limit on page 5 41 is 20 characters Type Specifies the data type of the Pervasive SQL column Supported Data Types on page A 2 in SQL Engine Reference To set a column data type on page 5 42 Size Specifies how many bytes are To set a column size on permitted for the data type page 5 42 Precision Specifies the number of To set column precision significant digits for floating on page 5 43 point values Scale Specifies the number of To set a column scale on significant digits that are tothe page 5 44 right of the decimal point for floating point values Null Specifies whether NULL To set a column to allow values are allowed forthe data or disallow nulls on page type A shaded square 5 44 indicates that nulls do not apply to the data type A checked square indicates that NULL values are allowed for the data type 5 19 Table Designer Indexes Tab 5 20 GUI Object Description Related Information Case Specifies whether the To set case sensitivity for database engine uses case a column on page 5 45 sensitive or case insensitive comparisons when searching for character
57. Insert Overtype indicator 6 31 Knowledge Base Web 6 27 New SQL Query command 6 18 Online Manuals Web 6 27 Open Database 6 18 Open SQL Query command 6 18 Page Setup 6 19 Paste 6 20 Print 6 18 Progress indicator 6 30 Properties 6 26 Query Builder 6 25 Query Builder Diagram command 6 21 Query Builder Grid command 6 22 Query Pane 6 29 Query Pane command 6 21 Replace 6 20 Results Grid 6 30 Rows fetched indicator 6 31 Run All SQL Statements command 6 24 Run Current SQL Statement in Grid command 6 23 Run Current SQL Statement in Text command 6 23 Save SQL Query As 6 18 Save SQL Query command 6 18 Search Documentation 6 27 Select All 6 20 Set Font command 6 22 SQL Statements 6 27 Stop command 6 24 Text Results tab 6 30 Title Bar 6 17 Index 11 Topics 6 27 Undo 6 19 What s This 6 27 MAX maximum aggregate function 6 33 MIN minimum aggregate function 6 33 panes 6 8 paste copied data into Excel 6 60 primary work areas 6 2 purpose 6 2 Query Builder 6 9 defined 6 8 logical AND 6 67 mixing use of statements 6 10 SQL statements to build with 6 10 Query Builder Diagram 6 11 behavior when no tables in Diagram 6 12 joining two tables 6 13 6 87 symbols used in table window 6 11 Query Builder Diagram GUI reference 6 31 Query Builder Grid 6 14 behavior when no tables in Query Builder Diagram 6 15 grid for DELETE statements 6 37 grid for INSERT statements 6 36 grid for SELECT statements 6 32 gri
58. License Administration on page 4 11 License Key Accepts a license key a combination of letters and numbers typed in or pasted License Administrator Concepts on page 4 2 To Apply a License Key on page 4 13 GUI Object License Administrator GUI Visual Reference Description Related Information Apply License Key Applies the license key in the License Key field to the specified database engine The title bar shows the computer on which the database engine is running This button is enabled if the license key in the License Key field is valid anda database engine is running on the specified computer To Apply a License Key on page 4 13 Applied Licenses Lists the applied license information for the specified computer Product The name of the Pervasive SQL product such as Server or Workgroup License Type The type of license such as permanent or temporary User Count The user count for the specific license Expiration Date The date on which a license expires if applicable or n a if not applicable Vendor A unique number identifying the vendor software that installed the license Application A unique number identifying the application to which the license applies User Count on page 4 3 To Display Applied Licenses on page 4 14 Remove License Removes the selected license s
59. Login The computer name appears in the License Administrator title bar and in the Computer Name field Ifthe selected computer is running Pervasive SQL 2000i or a prior release a message displays informing you that License Administrator does not support the prior release The message instructs you to use the legacy utility User Count Administrator to work with the older license type User Count Administrator is installed as part of the prior release s database engine If the computer is not the one you want select a different computer as described in To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 License Administrator Tasks Note Pervasive SQL 2000i and prior releases use a different type of license License Administrator automatically detects the license type on the machine being accessed For Pervasive SQL 2000i and prior releases you must use the legacy utility User Count Administrator to work with the older license type User Count Administrator is installed as part of the prior release s database engine Refer to the Pervasive SQL documentation of the prior release for information on how to use User Count Administrator Pervasive SQL documentation is located on the Web at http www pervasive com support technical online_manuals asp To Start License Administrator as a Stand alone Application From the desktop click Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 Other Utilities License Admi
60. On Windows 2000 double click Administrative Tools then double click Services A dialog box similar to Figure 2 2 appears Using Pervasive SQL Figure 2 2 Windows 2000 Services Dialog Box Tree Bs Pervasive SQL relational Started Automatic Sa Pervasive SQL transactional Started Automatic By Plug and Play Manages d Started Automatic Bs Print Spooler Loads files Started Automatic By Protected Storage Provides pr Started Automatic I By Q05 RSVP Provides n Manual amp BsRemote Access Auto Connection Ma Creates a Manual Ky Remote Access Connection Manager Creates a Manual Sa Remote Procedure Call RPC Provides th Started Automatic Services Local v 3 Do one of the following a On Windows NT click Pervasive SQL relational then click Start Click Pervasive SQL transactional then click Start b On Windows 2000 right click Pervasive SQL relational then click Start Right click Pervasive SQL transactional then click Start gt To stop the database services on Windows NT or 2000 by using services 1 Click Start gt Settings Control Panel 2 Do one of the following a On Windows NT double click on the Services icon A dialog box similar to Figure 2 1 displays Starting and Stopping the Database Engine Figure 2 3 Windows NT Services Dialog Box Services Startup Service Status Pervasive SOL relational Started Pervasive
61. Perform one of the following actions a Click File Save SQL Query or click W If you do not have an SQL script already open a Save As dialog appears SQL DM assigns a default name to the query The default name is queryn sql where n is an integer that increments by one Queryl sq is the first default name query2 sql the second and so forth If you have an SQL script already open a Save As dialog does not appear SQL DM saves the SQL statements in Query Pane with the name of the open script even if all lines from the open script have been cleared and new lines typed For example suppose you open MySQLScript sql then click File New SQL Query Query Pane is cleared and the statement indicator is positioned to the top of the pane You type an SQL statement then click File Save SQL Query The SQL statement is saved as file MySQLScript sql b Click File Save SQL Query As 6 47 SQL Data Manager A Save As dialog appears If you have an SQL script open this option lets you save the query with a different file name gt To open an SQL script 1 Click File gt Open SQL Query or click fa If Query Pane contains statements that have not been saved you are prompted to save them Click Yes to save the existing statements specify a file name and location then click Save Click No to discard the existing statements 2 Type in the file name of the query you want to open in the File name field or navigate to the location
62. Pervasive SQL Server engine cannot be deleted because it is a temporary license The 5 user license included with the Pervasive SQL Workgroup engine cannot be deleted Ensure that the computer name in the title bar is the computer from which you want to delete a database license If not select a different computer as described in To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 2 Click on a Product name in the Applied Licenses list You may select multiple licenses by holding down the Shift or Control keys and clicking on the desired product names 3 Click Remove License gt To Display Applied Licenses 1 Ensure that the computer name in the title bar is the computer for which you want to administer database licenses If not select a different computer as described in To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 2 View the information for the applied licenses in the Applied Licenses list Note You must first apply a license to display information about it such as user count license type expiration date and so forth Once applied if the license key is not what you want you may remove it provided the license is not a temporary license Temporary licenses expire on their own and cannot be removed The permanent license License Administrator Tasks included with the Pervasive SQL Workgroup engine cannot be deleted See To Apply a License Key on page 4 13 and
63. SOL transactional Started Plug and Play Started Protected Storage Started Remote Access Autodial Manager Started Remote Access Connection Manager Started Remote Access Server Remote Procedure Call RPC Locator Remote Procedure Call RPC Service Started Server Started Startup Parameters _ Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Manual Manual Automatic Automatic i x Start Stop Fause Continue ELLLER E S b On Windows 2000 double click Administrative Tools then double click Services A dialog box similar to Figure 2 2 appears Figure 2 4 Windows 2000 Services Dialog Box aint 3 Do one of the following a On Windows NT click Pervasive SQL relational then Action view e ga 2 ES 2 gt I m Tree Name Description status Startup Type Services Local By Pervasive SQL relational Started Automatic By Pervasive SQL transactional Started Automatic By Plug and Play Manages d Started Automatic Print Spooler Loads files Started Automatic By Protected Storage Provides pr Started Automatic a By QoS RSVP Provides n Manual Bs Remote Access Auto Connection Ma Creates a Manual B4Remote Access Connection Manager Creates a Manual Sa Remote Procedure Call RPC Provides th Started Automatic click Stop Click Pervasive SQL transactional then click Stop b On Windows
64. SQL query or script on page 6 44 Open SQL Query Opens an SQL script and Query Pane on page 6 8 command places its contents into Query Pane To open an SQL script or on page 6 48 a gt icon Save SQL Query Saves the SQL statement s Query Pane on page 6 8 command in Query Pane as an ASCII file S called an SQL script To save an SQL query as m icon a script on page 6 47 Save SQL Query Saves the SQL statement s Query Pane on page 6 8 As in Query Pane as an ASCII file called an SQL script If you To save an SQL query as have an SQL script already a script on page 6 47 open this command lets you save the statements with a different file name Open Opens a database for use To open a database on Database within SQL DM page 6 44 If a database is already open SQL DM closes it and opens the one you specify Close Database Closes the database currently open in SQL DM To close a database on page 6 45 Print Allows you to specify options for printing the contents of Query Pane Query Pane on page 6 8 To print the contents of Query Pane on page 6 55 SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference GUI Object Description Related Information Page Setup Allows you to specify options To layout the printed for the layout of the printed page on page 6 55 page Exit Terminates the execu
65. Secura aa e an naa a e a ar a ai e a T eaa ana eia a deed Documentation e ved a Sls dG e E a gl E Se Ve eee OE D User Counts panoi ia eile teria eee Kop Re Gee a ee etn Be ea Networking me roeie Se Gee BEE AE Re Sele hee ag we aLES Difficulty Accessing Data obs 4 ee eae gee ee ee E Slated wee a e ODBC and DDFS i640 bon bet alae we ae BE I Pee DR eg as Upgrading from Btrieve 6 15 2 ee ee ee Upgrading and Migration 2 ee ee eee Miscellaneous ye i e hdd eA oe OG eet eee bale 04 ES 4 ee hae bd 10 Pervasive SQL Resources and Contacts 0 A Guide to Pervasive SQL Customer Information Resources Printed Documentation a ey e e p n ee ee Developer Cga 5 gat E E tee E ES TE E his E ose Pervasive SOL Knowledge Base ocra eaaa a e Aa e a eee E i in E E E A E AEE ELA R E A TEE EE E EN Online Documentation eaaa Pervasive Library s aE E RE Ea 4 a ara len a ar eek E WEDD ac sik bute ach n Bete Sab a E R BA Tae oie Paw A Subscription Based E mail Services 0 ee DDG VT alesse fe gee tas aaa TSS Ra Ge eSNG Cee Sat rag a af celina AU a ae INGWSSTOUp oada eso Rais a E E 3 WG Sara an tye Med era ae ne E MailiContacts lt 4 4 Sede 4 aha en ode tet a Et ee eG Dae Te Technical Support re 8S bs Jo sci ae gd es eh oh Ek acd S Contents 8 1 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 4 8 5 9 1 9 2 9 8 9 12 9 15 9 16 9 17 9 18 9 18 9 19 9 21 9 27 9 28 9 29 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 6 10 7 10 8 10
66. See Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server edition for information on Pervasive SQL Linux utilities and user accounts To create an empty database use the following at the command line dbmaint a d 1 b i e nDbname ldictpath ddatapath The list of commands for dbmaint include a add database name a delete database name 1 list all database names Options include b create Bound database i create database with Relational Integrity enforced e do not create dictionary files for database nDBName specify database name 1Dictpath specify dictionary path dDatapath specify data path a show full data in the DBNames list For example to create DBName TEST with relational integrity type dbmaint a i nTEST Note Unless datapath is specified the new database is created in the default location P gt VSW_ROOT data Likewise if dictpath is not specified the dictionary is created in the default location 2 37 Using Pervasive SQL To delete an existing database use the following at the command line dbmaint d nDbname For example to delete the newly created database TEST type dbmaint d nTEST To list all existing databases dbmaint 1 a 2 To set up an Engine DSN modify the following files e PVSW_ROOT etc odbc ini SQLMGR required settings SQLManager MgrPort 1583 MgrUseTransport TCP PVSW_ROOT etc odbc ini
67. Ss 2 46 Accessing Data Using Microsoft Excel 2 oe ee ee ee 2 46 Accessing Data Using Microsoft Access 2 ee ee ee 2 48 Deleting DSNSiiso sun ba en ee ote oe be EE DG be ed be Pw SS 2 52 Bound Databases and Enforced Integrity 2 0 0 2 00 000000 8 2 55 Using the Fast User Switching Feature of Windows XP 000 2 56 3 Using the Pervasive Control Center 085 3 1 A Brief Tour of Pervasive Control Center An Overview of Pervasive Control Center 0 0 cee ee ee 3 2 Registering or Removing a Server anaua ee 3 4 Viewing Database Engines g a ba E aK ee ee 3 6 Interpreting Engine Status Icons 2 1 ee eee 3 6 Pervasive Control Center Wizards 1 ee 3 8 Adding or Creating a Database 2 ee ee 3 10 Deleting a Database 2 0 0 fave wen oe oes hae Bae toe a ees Bae Paha 3 13 Additig a Table sa a Aedes yas eect reo St gat aie den hie th held Reeds we eter GE RS 3 15 Dropping a Table s as bos a a e eo ae Be ee eee ht Ge es 3 20 Setting Database Security ee 3 22 Turning Security On and Off aaas ee ee ee 3 22 Working with Groups and Users aooaa 3 23 Stopping and Restarting Services on Windows Servers 00000 3 28 Viewing and Modifying Table Properties 0 0000000000 3 29 Viewing and Modifying Data 2 ee ee en 3 32 iv Exporting Importing Data aaa Export and Import Procedures o se sawysa ke naa uee ees Checking Consistency and Referential Integrity
68. Text Results The tabbed views always appear you may select one or the other but cannot hide them Figure 6 2 SQL DM Results Tabs Pervasive SQL Data Manager DOCLAB2 DEMODATA Oy x Eile Edt View Tools Help Den nE A een Mano mnM D a i P ora sesute Ara ET Rowe Fecha s Grid Results Tab The Grid Results tab shows in a matrix format like a spreadsheet the result of running SQL statements Each field is represented as a column and the data appears in cells within the columns The grid is used only for the results of SELECT statements statements that return data SQL Data Manager Concepts Figure 6 3 Grid Results Tabbed Dialog Pervasive SQL Data Manager DOCLAB2 DEMODATA Of x Ele Edit View Tools Help Oa OEM ATE R Mem me ee B SELECT FROM Person E 4 gt ID First_Name Last_Name Pera_Street Perm_City gt P 104101361 Jameson Ogelvie 5333 E Wallace Ave Scottsdale 104321686 Kanagae Yoko 817 Big Burn Court Miami 104643157 Haniza Yaacob 10039 Bissonnet Street Atascocita 104862054 Harold Dinbat 762 Gingerblosson Drive Cupertino 105095306 Hope Noga 3383 NW 7th Street Ocracoke 105111267 Bradley Giddy 416 E Walnut Street Drexel Hill 105318557 William Tuten 77 Madison Ave Lexington 105402001 Deborah Mebane 4608 Avenue F Austin 105622326 Any Sylar 715 E Lucius Ave Columbus 105852651 Allen Brake 12630
69. To modify a table design with Table Designer you must have full administrator rights on the machine on which the database engine is running even if you are a member of the Pervasive_Admin group Note For Linux servers administrator level rights can be granted only by using the btadmin utility to add users and passwords to the btpasswd file The Pervasive_Admin option is offered so that you can grant users administrative rights to the database engine without granting them administrative rights to the operating system where the database engine resides Rights Within an Active Directory Environment Rights Provided to non Administrative Users Tasks for Granting Administrative Rights Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine You may use one or more Pervasive_Admin groups within an Active Directory environment See Support for Active Directory Service on page 7 2 in Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server edition or Support for Active Directory Service on page 8 2 in Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Workgroup edition Runtime only access enables a user without administrator level rights to perform such functions as extract a list of DSNs extract a count of DSNs extract information on a DSN extract information on the location of the DBnames configuration file dbnames cfg connect to databases retrieve update insert and delete data as permitted by database security To
70. Veirs Mill Road Baltimore Grid Results Grid States The results grid has two states active and display only The active state allows you to directly change database data by changing the values in the grid cells You must have the proper table permissions to affect the database data See To add a new user to the database on page 3 25 which explains how to set permissions for a user The active state is indicated by a gray indicator column on the very left of the grid Table 6 1 Comparison of Active and Display only Grid Active Grid indicator column on left Display only Grid SELECT FROM Person p SELECT FROM Person ID c 104101361 104101361 Jam 104321686 Ka 104321686 Kan 104643157 Ha 104643157 Han 104862054 Wa 104862054 Wal 105095306 Ho 105095306 Hop 105111267 Br 105111267 Bra 105318557 Wi 105318557 Wil 105402001 De 105402001 Deb 105622326 An 105622326 Any 105852651 105852651 All 4 Grid Results A Text Results Grid Results SQL Data Manager 6 6 The indicator column uses icons to inform you which row is active contains the cursor or whether data has changed in that row Table 6 2 Icons in Results Grid Indicator Column Active Row Cell Value s Has Changed In Row When the grid is in the display only state you cannot change the values in gr
71. Workgroup engine from autostarting 9 16 Available sessions error in PCC if none available 9 9 Backup online 9 31 Benefits of Pervasive SQL 1 10 Bound databases 2 55 BSTART loading NSS volumes first 2 8 Btadmin utility 8 6 Bti ini 2 37 2 38 8 26 Btrieve and terminology 1 9 owner names 9 25 testing 7 1 version 6 x and Pervasive SQL 9 16 Btrieve nlm mixing versions of NLMs not permitted 9 27 nwmkde nlm and 9 27 SQL engine and 9 27 BTRV UNLINK 2 9 BUTIL Linux and 8 8 C Cannot access data after upgrade 9 19 Cell defined 1 6 Changing hard coded file path in DDF 9 21 order of columns 5 40 Index 1 Check Database Wizard name of exe 3 8 Checkdb exe 3 8 Checking database consistency 3 43 Client definition of 1 4 DSN 2 22 defined 2 21 DSN setup 2 43 2 45 installation 9 15 setting up database access 2 40 troubleshooting network protocols 9 6 Clilcadm utility 8 17 Clustering 9 15 CNVDDF utility 9 21 Coexistence with previous versions 9 16 Column attributes 3 17 changing order of 5 40 defined 1 5 deleting 5 41 inserting 5 39 Microsoft Access limited to 256 columns 2 50 set case sensitivity 5 45 set collating sequence 5 46 set data type 5 42 set default 5 47 set name 5 41 set precision 5 43 set scale 5 44 set size 5 42 set to allow or disallow nulls 5 44 too few when creating table for existing data 9 28 Commenting SQL statements 6 9 Compatibility between Server and Workgroup 1 12 between versions where
72. a single easy to use framework xiii About This Manual Who Should Read This Manual This manual provides information for users who install and run Pervasive SQL client server and Workgroup products Pervasive Software would appreciate your comments and suggestions about this manual Please send comments to docs pervasive com xiv Manual Organization Manual Organization This manual is divided into the following chapters Chapter 1 Introducing Pervasive SQL This chapter provides an introduction to Pervasive SQL and an overview of utilities and Pervasive SQL documentation Chapter 2 Using Pervasive SQL This chapter covers the basic tasks required to work with Pervasive SQL Chapter 3 Using the Pervasive Control Center This chapter explains how to get your work done using Pervasive Control Center Chapter 4 License Administrator This chapter explains how to increase user counts and add delete and view license keys Chapter 5 Table Designer This chapter explains how to add change or delete databases and tables using the Table Designer Chapter 6 SQL Data Manager This chapter explains how to use the SQL Data Manager to run SQL statements against a Pervasive SQL database Chapter 7 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA This chapter explains how to work with archived Pervasive SQL components and test an active installation Chapter 8
73. again to move to the next line which contains a DELETE statement The results show on the Text Results tab You click I again to move to the next line which contains another SELECT statement The results show on the Grid Results tab See also Results Tabs on page 6 4 and To type a comment into Query Pane on page 6 52 gt To set SQL statement separator Two or more SQL statements in Query Pane must be separated by a delimiter By default SQL DM sets the delimiter to the pound sign You may change the delimiter to the semicolon if you choose Note You must use the pound sign as the statement delimiter in Query Pane if you create stored procedures Stored procedures use the semicolon as a statement delimiter within the procedure itself 1 Click Tools Properties 2 Click the semicolon in the list for SQL statements separator 3 Click OK gt To set a query time out period The query time out period specifies how many seconds to allow an SQL statement to run before the SRDE cancels the statement The default is zero seconds which means that no time out period is specified The value you specify is stored in the registry and will also apply the next time you start SQL DM The time out period applies to SELECT UPDATE INSERT and DELETE statements but not to Data Definition Language DDL statements such as CREATE INDEX ALTER TABLE DROP TABLE and so forth The SRDE stops processing a query
74. any previous versions of Pervasive SQL installed and running Archives previously installed Pervasive SQL components Restores components that you have previously archived using PSA m Deletes Pervasive SQL components or archives Displays the Pervasive components on your system with version information usage status size and location Identifies duplicate components on your system Tests your network communications to verify connectivity m Tests the transactional engine to verify connectivity to the MKDE m Tests the relational engine to verify connectivity to the SRDE Compared with previous versions of Pervasive SQL Pervasive System Analyzer replaces and extends the former SmartScout and InstallScout utilities For more information about Pervasive System Analyzer features see the following sections m Why Use PSA on page 7 3 a PSA Tests in Detail on page 7 3 m Frequently Asked Questions on page 7 7 m Introductory Network Information on page 7 11 a PSA GUI Visual Reference on page 7 12 m PSA Tasks on page 7 15 Why Use PSA PSA Tests in Detail PSA Concepts Here are some scenarios where you might use PSA after installation You installed another application based on Pervasive SQL and now one or more of your Pervasive based applications are no longer functioning You are encountering network errors and wish to test your client s connectivity to a
75. choose Properties Set Poll interval seconds to 999 Click OK Computer names are listed in the namespace tree under the Pervasive SQL Engines node An icon indicating the state of the Pervasive SQL engine on that computer accompanies each engine Viewing Database Engines name The possible states of the database engine are outlined in the following table Table 3 1 Pervasive SQL Engine States Engine Status Small Icon Large Icon Workgroup local or remote Windows NT 2000 Server Green triangle relational and transactional Windows NT 2000 Server Green triangle transactional only NetWare Server Blue triangle Linux Server Brown triangle Engine stopped Engine detection in progress No Service Found eo Gm Go Se Se amp gt 1 Note When PCC is next started engines remain in the Namespace even if the engines are not running Engines that are not running are listed in the namespace with an appropriate icon indicating the engine is not running Using the Pervasive Control Center Pervasive Control Center Wizards 3 8 This section provides information about wizards available from Pervasive Control Center PCC These wizards can be invoked using a DOS command line or through a window in PCC In this manual PCC is the default starting point for creating and deleting tables data and databases If you invoke a wizard from t
76. column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell i 2 p A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click in the Precision grid cell You can set precision only for applicable data types such as DECIMAL If precision is not applicable you will be unable to position the cursor in the Precision grid cell Delete the existing value use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete Type the precision value you want 5 43 Table Designer 5 44 Precision specifies the number of significant digits for floating point values gt To set a column scale This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell Isia p A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click in the Scale grid cell You can set a scale value only for applicable data types such as NUMERIC If collating sequence is not applicable you will be unable to position the cursor in the Scale grid cell Delete the existing value use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete Type the scale value you want Scale specifies the number of significant digits that are to the right of the decimal point for floating point values gt To set a column to allow or disallow nulls For additio
77. continuous operation by using the but il endbu command A stops continuous operation of all the files defined for the backup index sourceFile indexFile descriptionFile Oowner Available Utilities The index command builds an external index file for an existing Pervasive SQL formatted file based on a field not previously specified as a key in the existing file Before you can use the index command you must create a description file to specify the new key characteristics The records in the new file consist of the following m The 4 byte address of each record in the existing data file The new key value on which you want to sort If the key length you specify in the description file is 10 bytes the record length of the external index file would be 14 bytes 10 plus the 4 byte address load unformattedFile outputFile Oowner The load command inserts records from an unformatted input sequential file into a Pervasive SQL formatted file It performs no conversion on the data in the input sequential file After the utility transfers the records to the data file it displays the total number of records loaded Before running the load command you must create the input sequential file and the data file You can create the input sequential file using a standard text editor or an application the input sequential file must have the required file format as explained below You can create the data file using either butil c
78. data you may move with the Tab key arrow keys or by using the mouse Running a SELECT statement Closing the database File Close Database Exiting SQL DM File gt Exit SQL Data Manager Tasks Note You may see the row in which you change a value move to a different location within the grid An example helps clarify why this occurs Suppose you have a table t1 with a single integer column coll that contains the values 1 through 5 in ascending order If you run a SELECT statement against tl SQL DM returns 5 records Now assume you delete record 3 DELETE FROM t1 WHERE col1 3 Your table now has a hole in it where record 3 existed If you run a SELECT statement again SQL DM returns 4 records 1 2 4 and 5 Now assume you add another value for coll at the bottom of the Grid Results tab you type in 6 at the bottom of the integer column and press the Tab key The record containing the value 6 moves in the grid to the 3rd position from the top In other words the new record occupies the hole that resulted from the deletion of the other record This is the normal behavior of the Grid Results tab The SRDE fills any holes in a table that have resulted from deleting records SQL DM just queries the database and displays the natural ordering of the records Once all of the holes are filled records are added to the end of the existing records To save an SQL query as a script
79. data that is not applicable to a particular data type For example you cannot paste a value into the Size cell for an INTEGER You may paste data that you cut or copied from another application such as a text editor or a spreadsheet program Table Designer Tasks Columns Tasks gt To insert a column at end of column definitions Inserting deleting or moving a column on the Columns tab changes the database The database is rebuilt when you save the Table Designer information This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click View gt Columns or click the Columns tab 2 Click on the empty grid row below the last named column You may click on any empty cell in the row except for the gray leftmost cell The gray leftmost cell is used for positioning on existing columns A new column is inserted A blue asterisk appears in the leftmost cell The default name of the column is col_n where n is anumber that automatically increments by one The first column you insert is col_1 the second col_2 and so forth The column is not added to the table until you save the database The following image shows a column inserted after the column named Head_of_Dept Column name Type Size Precision Scale Null Case Collate Default Name char 20 oO M Phone_Number decimal 11 a M o T Building
80. file format Record Length Shows the length of the data file s records Page Size Shows the page size in bytes of the data file The page size determines the maximum number of index segments that can be defined in a table Number of Records Shows the number of records currently contained in the data file Number of Indexes Shows the number of indexes defined for the table Number of Duplicate Pointers Shows the number of linked duplicate indexes that can be added Number of Unused Pages Shows the number of pre allocated pages available If pre allocation is enabled the MicroKernel pre allocates a specified number of pages when it creates the data file Pre allocation guarantees that disk space for the data file is available when the MicroKernel needs it Variable Records Shows whether the data file contains variable length records Variable Record Blank Truncation Shows whether blank truncation is enabled If it is the MicroKernel truncates the blanks in variable length records Blank truncation is applicable only if the Variable Records statistic is Yes and Data Compression is set to No Data Compression Shows whether data compression is enabled If it is the MicroKernel compresses each record it inserts into the data file Index Balancing Shows whether balanced indexing is enabled Viewing and Modifying Table Properties Table 3 4 Existing Tab
81. for SELECT statements to show data returned The data returned appears in a columnar format with each field represented as an underlined heading The length of the underline number of characters reflects the field width The data appears as rows below the headings left aligned with each heading SQL Data Manager Panes Figure 6 5 Text Result Tab View T Pervasive SQL Data Manager DOCLAB2 DEMODATA _ oO x Eie Edit View Tools Help Oa S mie Al SE m w rm Em A SELECT FROM Person 4 ID First_Name Last_Name Perm_Street 104101361 Jameson Ogelvie 333 E Wallace Ave 104321686 Kanagae Yoko 817 Big Burn Court 104643157 Haniza Yaacob 10039 Bissonnet Street 104862054 Harold Dinbat 762 Gingerblossom Drive 105095306 Hope Noga 3383 NW 7th Street 105111267 Bradley Giddy 416 E Walnut Street 105318557 Willian Tuten 77 Madison Ave 105402001 Deborah Mebane 4608 Avenue F 105622326 Any Sylar 715 E Lucius Ave 105852651 Allen Brake 12630 Veirs Mill Road 106072976 Howell Jeter 15 Stewart Place hd 4 Vnd Results Tox Resu gt OVA flows Fetched 1500 If you stop the execution of SQL statements or if execution stops because of an error the Text Results tab lists the statement that was last run Knowing the last statement run can help you troubleshoot problems See To stop running SQL statements on page 6 57 and To continue running SQL statements that were
82. for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell i 2 p A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected 2 Click the option box in the Case grid cell 5 45 Table Designer 5 46 You can set a collating sequence only for applicable data types A shaded square indicates that case sensitivity does not apply to the data type A checkmark in the box indicates that column values are case insensitive Lack of a checkmark indicates that column values are case sensitive Option Box State Meaning Case insensitive O Case sensitive O Case does not apply By default Pervasive SQL is case sensitive when sorting string keys Uppercase letters are sorted before lowercase letters If you specify case insensitive values are sorted without distinguishing case gt To set a column collating sequence For additional information about collating sequences see Manipulating Btrieve Data Files with Maintenance on page 14 1 in Advanced Operations Guide and Alternate Collating Sequences in the Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK If you use an alternate collating sequence ACS you cannot specify case sensitivity Case sensitivity does not apply if the key uses an ACS This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click on th
83. from the specified computer This button is enabled when a Product name is selected in the Applied Licenses list To Remove a License on page 4 14 4 7 License Administrator 4 8 GUI Object Description Related Information Refresh Re displays the information To Refresh the List of for Applied Licenses and Applied Licenses on removes any license key page 4 15 information from the License Key field The Computer Name field is cleared then displays the machine name to which License Administrator is currently connected Help Displays the online help for To Display Help on page License Administrator 4 15 License Administrator Tasks License Administrator Tasks This section explains the tasks that you can perform with License Administrator GUI Tasks To Start License Administrator from Pervasive Control Center PCC on page 4 10 To Start License Administrator as a Stand alone Application on page 4 11 m To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 To Apply a License Key on page 4 13 a To Remove a License on page 4 14 To Display Applied Licenses on page 4 14 m To Determine a Total User Count on page 4 15 m To Refresh the List of Applied Licenses on page 4 15 To Display Help on page 4 17 CLI Tasks To Display All Applied Licenses on page 4 16 To Display a Specific App
84. given computer Every Pervasive SQL database that you expect to access using ODBC must have a DSN available on the same computer as the database engine and if applicable another DSN on the client computer The only exceptions are Pervasive tools which can access remote databases without using DSNs on the client computer A DSN that points to a database engine is called an Engine DSN A DSN that points to an engine DSN is called a Client DSN Note Pervasive SQL databases that are accessed only through Btrieve do not need DSNs However in this case the database is not visible in PCC nor can it be manipulated using PCC Pervasive recommends using Data Dictionary Files DDFs and DSNs with all databases including ones accessed only through Btrieve to make them easier to manipulate Figures 2 6 shows possible DSN configurations 2 21 Using Pervasive SQL 2 22 Figure 2 6 Example DSN Configurations Engine with Local Data Database p Engine Engine DSN lt gt gt Data Files Computer Engine with Remote Data Database Engine Engine DSN q lt No server engine Data 0 Server engine not running gt Files Computer Network File Server Database Simp reat lt gt i ngine Client Engine Client Computer or Remote Server Computer Server Computer with Client Application Servers and Clien
85. in Grid command or Pasa icon Runs the current statement in Query Pane and places the results on the Grid Results tab if the statement is a SELECT statement If the current statement is not a SELECT statement the results are placed on the Text Results tab This command is enabled if a database is open and one or more SQL statements are present in Query Pane Results Tabs on page 6 4 Query Pane on page 6 8 To set Grid Results to allow changes to database data on page 6 58 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 To run a single SQL statement on page 6 56 Run Current SQL Statement in Text command or B icon Runs the current statement in Query Pane and appends the results on the Text Results tab This command is enabled if a database is open and one or more SQL statements are present in Query Pane Text Results Tab on page 6 7 Query Pane on page 6 8 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 To run a single SQL statement on page 6 56 6 23 SQL Data Manager 6 24 GUI Object Description Related Information Run All Runs all statements in Query Text Results Tab on SQL Pane starting with the page 6 7 Statements statement at the top command or El icon Output is placed on the Text Results tab never on the Grid Results tab The output is appended to any results that already exists on
86. in Query Pane contains a GROUP BY clause aes e Billing Amount Owed Billing ina r a SELECT AVG Billing Amount_Owed Billing Amount_0O sROUP BY Billing Amount_Owed Result Order by Group by Criteria AVG wd Da crou BY _ O wed FROM Bi In other words you need one line in Query Builder Grid for each aggregate function or Group By clause that you want in the SQL statement 28 Click Tools Query Run Current SQL Statement in Grid or click 9 The average amount owed by students is 2 894 26 EXPR_1 b 2894 26 6 72 29 30 31 SQL Data Manager Tasks Notice that the column heading for the output is EXPR_1 What if you wanted the heading to read Average Amount Owed What would you change on Query Builder Grid to produce this result You would type Average Amount Owed as an Alias for Billing Amount_Owed Do that and run the statement again to see if the heading changes You have now completed your second goal for this task Your last goal is to find which persons in your database are also on the faculty and determine the department in which the faculty member teaches and the salary of the faculty member Because you now have some experience using Query Builder the steps for this goal are more generic and contain fewer images of the GUI If you are unsure how to complete a step revi
87. insert an index on page 5 48 To delete an index on page 5 49 To insert an index segment on page 5 49 To delete an index segment on page 5 50 To specify index sort column on page 5 51 To allow duplicates in index on page 5 51 To specify index as modifiable on page 5 52 To specify index sort sequence on page 5 53 Statistics tasks apply to the statistics tab To change the location of a table s data file on page 5 53 To display table information on page 5 54 Btrieve tasks apply to the Btrieve tab To insert a Btrieve column at end of column definitions on page 5 54 To insert a Btrieve column between columns on page 5 55 To delete a Btrieve column on page 5 56 To set a Btrieve column name on page 5 56 To set a Btrieve column type on page 5 57 To set a Btrieve column size on page 5 58 To set decimal places for a Btrieve column on page 5 58 To set a Btrieve column to allow nulls on page 5 59 To set case sensitivity for a Btrieve column on page 5 60 To change Btrieve column position on the GUI on page 5 60 General Tasks gt To start Table Designer as a stand alone application 1 From the desktop click Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt Table Designer This step assumes that Table Designer was installed as part of a Pervasive SQL default installation A vendor application that uses an embedded da
88. list of all the values in a particular column A table can have zero or more indexes on it The database engine uses indexes to find specific records in the database without having to step through every record one at a time Creating indexes on columns which will frequently be used in database searches is likely to improve the performance of your database Database A database is a collection of one or more tables The data in the tables does not need to be related among the various tables but usually there are many relations For example a database might consist of the Food Preferences table below and the Phone Book table above With Pervasive SQL a database consists of one or more data files and Data Dictionary Files DDFs on your hard disk The DDFs are special data files that contain all the definitions for tables columns and other attributes that define the structure of your database Schema The term schema refers to the complete set of definitions that describe the entire structure of a database A typical schema includes Key Concepts definitions for tables columns indexes and many other attributes The DDFs for a database contain the database s schema Food Preferences Table Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Col Names Name Meat Grain Drink Row 1 Fred Black sushi wheat sake Row 2 Jane Doe steak oats beer Row 3 Ann Dean cod bran spring water Remote The term remote
89. machine running a Pervasive SQL server Your Pervasive based application is not functioning correctly and you wish to test the functionality of the Transactional or Relational interface components to the Pervasive SQL engine You wish to restore Pervasive components archived previously by PSA Ifyou are an existing customer you may want to archive components currently in use on your system in preparation for another install PSA runs automatically during the installation of Pervasive SQL 2000 SP3 and higher This section contains more information about each functional area of PSA Analyze and Archive This test is performed automatically during install but can also be run later You need to have administrative rights on the system in order to archive components Before copying new files PSA scans your system for previous versions of Pervasive products and allows you to archive them so that they do not interfere with your new installation The archive and restore features are not meant as a replacement for the Add Remove Programs dialog in Windows which is the normal way to remove software Archiving provides a way in which you can save a product for later restoration if you encountered issues For example if you were installing a newer Pervasive SQL service pack and wanted a way in which to restore the previous service pack if you encountered issues If there is another archive of the same product PSA will ask you if y
90. more than one copy of PSA on your system However if you find yourself in a situation where there are multiple copies of PSA on your machine PSA will detect any other copies of PSA that are not in lt OSdrive gt Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software Shared PSA directory and you can choose to archive them How do I run PSA There are three methods for running PSA During Installation PSA automatically runs at install time to prepare your system for Pervasive SQL product installation From the Start Menu Click Start Programs Pervasive System Analyzer From the Command Prompt Click Start Run Type lt OSdrive gt Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software Shared PSA psawizrd and press Enter When would I want to use PSA The following lists the most common situations where you would want to use PSA You installed another application based on Pervasive SQL and now one or more of your Pervasive based applications are no longer functioning You are encountering network errors and wish to test your client s connectivity to a machine running a Pervasive SQL server Your Pervasive based application is not functioning correctly and you wish to test the functionality of the Transactional or Relational interface components to the Pervasive SQL engine You wish to restore Pervasive components archived previously by PSA Pervasive System Analyzer PSA 7 10 m You wish to archive components current
91. of the file and click on the file An SQL query file is an ASCII file of one or more SQL statements By default an SQL query files saved from SQL DM has a file extension of sql 3 Click Open SQL DM places the contents of the open script into Query Pane Note that if you change the script then click File Save SQL Query or click fg the changes overwrite the script file If you want to save the changes to a different location or as a different script name click File Save SQL Query As gt To display help 1 Click Help then the type of help you want How Do R Lists the tasks that you can perform with SQL DM Topics Lists the documentation topics pertaining to SQL DM SQL Reference Displays an alphabetical list of SQL statements and keywords that are links to the SQL Engine Reference Statements not supported by SQL DM are listed below the alphabetical list Search Documentation Searches for a string throughout the installed set of Pervasive SQL documentation Whats This Identifies objects in the SQL DM GUI e Glossary Defines terms used in the Pervasive SQL documentation and products 6 48 SQL Data Manager Tasks e Online Manuals Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can reference the online manuals Knowledge Base Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can query the Pervasive SQL Knowledge Base for additional information ab
92. of these utilities A dialog box appears Enter your operating system user name and password and click OK Figure 2 5 Connect to Remote Server Dialog Box fl Connect to Remote Server x manm id Cancel The password is encrypted before being sent over the network using a unique and pre defined encryption key The Pervasive SQL V8 engine unpacks and decrypts the user name and password and verifies access It then returns a status code to the client indicating the success or failure of the verification Setting Up ODBC Database Access Setting Up ODBC Database Access Basic Concepts This section covers the steps to set up access to a database We will review some conceptual information before detailing the steps to perform the tasks of setting up Client and Engine Server DSNs and creating a new database using Pervasive SQL V8 This section covers the following topics Basic Concepts on page 2 21 m What to Know if You are Recreating DSNs on page 2 23 m Prerequisites to Setting up Database Access on page 2 24 ODBC Standard Pervasive SQL adheres to the Microsoft standard for ODBC database connections According to the standard applications must connect to databases through Data Source Names DSNs defined in the operating system Note Pervasive SQL does not support File DSNs You must use User or System DSNs System DSNs are generally preferred because they are available to all users on a
93. on the message that asks if you want to delete the partially exported file Open the partially exported file in an editor The last record in the file is the record containing the invalid data 3 35 Using the Pervasive Control Center Figure 3 26 Exporting Data Status Exporting Data Export Progress Statistic Completed Exported rows 211 Time 0 sec Operation status Export completed successfully gt To import data into an existing table You designate an empty string by using double quotes You designate a NULL by using two commas two field separators together For example the following table shows how you would designate a middle initial as an empty string and as a NULL respectively Designating an Empty String Designating a NULL Jane we Smith Jane 7 Smith 1 Click on the Tables node in the Namespace under the database into which you are importing data 2 Right click on the desired table object in the table list in the Control Center s right pane 3 Select Tasks then Import Data in the shortcut menu 4 Enter the location of the file that contains the data to be imported into the table Also indicate the format of the data Figure 3 27 Import Wizard Choose a Source File Dialog Box File path to import Je temp data_in sdf Imported data format Standard Data Format SDF C Unformatted MicroKemel UNF File type Jans z Text qualifier Double Qu
94. or click Rb lt a A red x appears in the gray leftmost grid cell X The x indicates that the index segment is marked for deletion The segment is not deleted until you save the table information Click File Save or click Jy The save action deletes the index segment Table Designer Tasks gt To specify index sort column For detailed information about sort order see Sort Order in the Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK When Table Designer is in unlinked mode index changes affect only the data definition files 1 Click Edit gt Indexes or click the Indexes tab 2 Click in the Column grid cell 3 Open the list for columns click 4 Scroll to the column name you want and click the name Some data types such as BIT cannot be used for an index Columns with such data types are not valid choices gt To allow duplicates in index For detailed information about duplicates see Duplicatability in the Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK When Table Designer is in unlinked mode index changes affect only the data definition files 1 Click Edit Indexes or click the Indexes tab 2 Click on the grid indicator cell for the index you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell i 2 i A solid right point triangle indicates that the index is select
95. page 5 52 Allowing modification of key values does not affect performance Key pages are only updated if the actual key value changes not if non key fields in a particular record are changed Sort Specifies the type of sorting to To specify index sort use for the key ascending or sequence on page 5 53 descending Statistics Tab The following image shows the Statistics tab of the GUI The table below the image describes the GUI objects The menu items and icons are explained in Main Window on page 5 8 5 21 Table Designer 5 22 Figure 5 6 Statistics Tab Pervasive Table Designer Elle Edit View Tools Help ADS eelAR t Parameter Table Name Table Location Dictionary Path File Version Record Length Page Size Number of Records Number of Indexes Number of Duplicate Ptrs Number of Unused Pages Variable Records Var Rec Blank Truncation Data Compression Key Only File Index Balancing Freespace Threshold Uses Alternate Collating Seq System Data Key as it appears in the database definition GUI Object Description Related Information Parameter Labels the statistical To display table information shown on the information on page 5 54 tabbed area See the next 18 rows in this table for the labels Table Name Shows the name of the table Naming Conventions in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide Table Location Shows the p
96. refers to an object such as a file server or a database that is not located in the computer you are using now When you connect to a database over the network you are connecting to a remote database Remote is the opposite of local Remote can refer to either the client or the server depending on whether you are currently seated at the server computer or a client computer Remote always refers to an object that is not located on the system you are using Local The term local refers to the computer you are using right now or something stored on this computer A local database is a database in which the data files are stored on the hard disk of the computer you are currently using Local is the opposite of remote Local can refer to either the client or the server depending on whether you are currently seated at the server computer or a client computer Relational The term relational refers to the storage of data in the form of related tables The related tables allow relationships to be created between sub sets of data For example you can see that both our example tables contain the Name column and some of the names are the same Because we can cross reference the names in the Phone table with the names in the Food table we have the power to ask and answer such questions as What is the phone number of someone who likes steak We may 1 7 Introducing Pervasive SQL Unique Benefits of Pervasive SQL 1 8 also answer
97. relatively simple queries You may create the following types of SQL statements with Query Builder m SELECT see To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 m UPDATE see To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder on page 6 76 m INSERT see To build an INSERT statement with Query Builder on page 6 79 m DELETE see To build a DELETE statement with Query Builder on page 6 82 A SELECT statement retrieves data from one or more tables An UPDATE statement changes the values of columns in one or more existing rows in a table An INSERT statement creates a new row ina table and inserts values into specified columns A DELETE statement removes one or more rows from a table Mixing Use of Typed Statements and Built Statements You may mix the use of statements that you type into Query Pane and statements added by Query Builder For example you could begin a statement with Query Builder then manually type additional syntax Note however that Query Builder is not aware of what you add manually to Query Pane This means that the next time Query Builder adds to the statement being build your manually added portion will be removed An example helps clarify this Suppose you use Query Builder to build a simple SELECT statement You then type a WHERE clause into Query Pane The statement is valid and may be run provided the syntax you typed is correct If you then use Query Builder to contin
98. selected To view the log file at the completion of Pervasive System Analyzer tests Click View Log File to display the PSA log file you specified for analysis details Figure 7 12 Viewing the PSA Log File You have successfully completed the Pervasive System Analyzer Wizard View Log File To close the wizard click Finish A summary of the tasks PSA completed is listed for you Please restart your computer if you are instructed to do so To determine what version of PSA you are running Using Windows Explorer or My Computer browse to the location of your PSA installation The drive location will be the same as the location of your Windows operating system Assuming Windows is installed on C the PSA installation folder would be C Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software Shared PSA Find psawizrd exe in the folder Right click on the icon for psawizrd exe and select Properties Click the Version tab and select the Product Version item Read the version on the right column as shown in Figure 7 13 7 29 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA Figure 7 13 Viewing the PSA Version General Company Name Language Product Name Product Versio 7 30 chapter Linux Supplementary E Documentation Additional Information on Linux Utilities This chapter discusses information specific to Pervasive SQL V8 for Linux It also maps out which sections in the existing documentation that are not used w
99. single step create sourceFile descriptionFile Y N The create command generates an empty Pervasive SQL formatted data file using the characteristics specified in the description file If the path name is the name of an existing Pervasive SQL formatted file this command creates a new empty Pervasive SQL formatted file in place of the existing Pervasive SQL formatted file Any data that was stored in the existing file is lost and cannot be recovered Y IN indicates whether to replace an existing file If you specify N but a Pervasive SQL formatted file with the same name exists the utility returns an error message and does not create a new file The default is Y drop sourceFile lt keyNumber SYSKEY gt Oowner The drop command removes an index from a Pervasive SQL formatted data file and adjusts the key numbers of any remaining indexes subtracting 1 from each subsequent key number If you do not want to renumber the keys you can add 128 to the key number you specify to be dropped endbu lt A sourceFile listFile gt The endbu command ends continuous operation on a data file or set of data files previously defined for backup Execute this command after you have issued the startbu command and your backup utility has finished running To back up data files using continuous operation first issue the but il startbu command followed by the data file or set of data files Next run your backup program Then stop
100. so forth b Right click within Query Pane then click Undo or press Control Z gt To cancel an Undo action redo in Query Pane The Redo action performs the opposite of the last Undo action For example if the last Undo action removed the word Select from a statement Redo restores the word Select to the statement 1 Right click within Query Pane then click Redo or press Control yY for each Undo action that you want to cancel gt To find text in Query Pane 1 Click Edit Find or press Control F A dialog appears on which you specify a text string to find 2 Type or paste a text string into the Find what field 6 53 SQL Data Manager 6 54 3 Specify any options for the search such as case sensitivity and direction 4 Click Find Next 5 To repeat the search for the same string click Edit Find Next or press F3 gt To replace text in Query Pane 1 Click Edit Replace or press Contro1 H A dialog appears in which you specify a text string to search for and a text string with which to replace it 2 Type or paste a text string into the Find what field 3 Type or paste a text string into the Replace with field 4 Specify any options for the search such as case sensitivity and direction 5 Perform one of the following actions a Click Find Next to locate the next occurrence of the search string then click Replace to change the search string to the replace string Repeat these act
101. solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click in the Default grid cell You can set a default only for applicable data types If a default is not applicable you will be unable to position the cursor in the the Default grid cell Delete the existing value if present use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete 4 Type the default value you want 5 47 Table Designer 5 48 The default value is used if you perform an SQL INSERT for a row but do not provide a value for the column Index Tasks gt To insert an index When Table Designer is in unlinked mode index changes affect only the data definition files Xs Tip You may create dummy indexes in your data definition files to match indexes in your Btrieve file An example helps clarify Suppose your Btrieve file has indexes 0 1 2 and 5 and in your Index ddf file you have indexes 0 1 and 2 You could create dummy indexes in the definition file for 3 and 4 and an actual index for 5 Thus your indexes would match as follows Btrieve File Indexes Data Definition File Indexes 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 dummy 4 dummy 5 5 The dummy indexes can be on any column that can be indexed because they are not used by your Btrieve file Click Edit Indexes or click the Indexes tab Click on the empty grid row below the last named index You may also click on the gray leftmost cell of an existing index i
102. statements the window contains check boxes that allow you select columns The following table explains the symbols used within a table window Table 6 3 Symbols Used Within a Table Window Symbol Explanation Marks a check box for a SELECT statement Indicates that a table bl column is to appear in Query Builder Grid Marks a check box for an UPDATE statement Indicates that a table Ci column is to appear in Query Builder Grid 6 11 SQL Data Manager 6 12 Table 6 3 Symbols Used Within a Table Window Symbol Explanation Marks a check box for an INSERT statement Indicates that a table column is to appear in Query Builder Grid Indicates that all columns are unselectable for a DELETE I statement You cannot delete individual columns so check boxes do not appear in the table window for a DELETE statement Instead of selecting columns you specify the criteria in Query Builder Grid for the rows you want to delete Indicates that the column is being ordered by ascending values This al symbol appears if you select ascending for a column on Query Builder Grid A Indicates that the column is being ordered by descending values This Af symbol appears if you select descending for a column on Query Builder Grid Indicates that the column is used in a GROUP BY clause cm Behavior When Query Builder Diagram Contains No Tables If Query Builder Diagram contains no ta
103. submit to the following contacts docs pervasive com For comments or concerns regarding the content of Pervasive SQL documentation Requests for manuals should be directed to your sales rep or salessupport pervasive com uteam pervasive com For comments or concerns regarding the Pervasive SQL utilities such as PCC PSA installation and other Pervasive tools salessupport pervasive com For information about Pervasive SQL sales matters such as contacts pricing and product specifications developer pervasive com For developer relations A great way for developers to communicate their ideas about all Pervasive products interfaces and programs info pervasive com For general information about the company marketing efforts public relations and other general questions investor relations pervasive com For questions from investors 10 11 Pervasive SQL Resources and Contacts Technical Support You may obtain technical support from the following Web based support options Pervasive Knowledge Base at http support pervasive com eSupport To open a support incident http www pervasive com support index asp Click on Open an Electronic Incident To report a product defect http www pervasive com support index asp Click on Report a product defect If you require something other than what Web based support options provide contact Pervasive Support by phone 800 287 4383 option 3
104. such questions as Which consumer profile purchased the most product B after buying product A You can see how powerful relational data access is The SRDE component of Pervasive SQL provides full relational access to your data Join A join refers to an association between columns of related tables Typically a join operation is part of a SELECT query which is used to obtain information from related tables One unique feature of Pervasive SQL is that it allows applications to access data through either the industry standard relational method outlined above or through an ultra high speed transactional or hierarchical method known as the Btrieve interface In fact Pervasive SQL allows applications to use both access methods at the same time to access the same data Transactional Interface The transactional interface is a high performance low overhead access method capable of handling updates inserts and deletes much faster than other database products Applications that use the transactional interface bypass the relational interface and communicate directly with the MKDE to maximize performance In the interest of performance the transactional interface offers only basic security including file passwords and encryption It does not allow SRDE data access to bypass transactional security Relational Interface The relational interface uses industry standard ODBC to provide a rich environment for data definition secu
105. the Computer Name field After you click Refresh PVSW1 is displayed in the field gt To Display Help 1 Click Help 2 Click the desired area License Administrator CLI Tasks 4 16 License Administrator Concepts to understand the basics of License Administrator License Administrator GUI Visual Reference to identify and understand the purpose of the objects on the GUI License Administrator Tasks to perform activities with License Administrator To Display All Applied Licenses Enter the following command clilcadm lt interpret i gt The license key is located on the Pervasive SQL product installation media NetWare 4 x requires the word load load clilcadm To Display a Specific Applied License Enter the following command clilcadm lt interpret i gt license_key NetWare 4 x requires the word load load clilcadm To Apply a License Key Enter the following command clilcadm lt apply a gt license_key The license key is located on the Pervasive SQL installation media NetWare 4 x requires the word load load clilcadm To Remove a License Enter the following command clilcadm lt remove r gt license_key The license key is located on the Pervasive SQL installation media NetWare 4 x requires the word load load clilcadm License Administrator Tasks gt To Display Help 1 Enter either of the following commands clilcadm lt help h gt clilcadm NetWa
106. the decimal point Case For character data types checking the Case attribute forces the database engine to use case insensitive comparisons when searching for values in the database Null For data types that allow NULL values IDENTITY and BIT data types cannot be null checking the Null attribute permits NULL values in the column ACS If you wish to use an alternate collating sequence ACS for this column specify the path name to the ACS here Default If you wish to specify a default value for this column enter the value here The default value is used if a row is inserted and no value is provided for this column 5 The next dialog box Figure 3 12 displays the SQL statement that could be used to recreate this table at a later date This statement can prove useful in replicating a database structure at another location or as a safety measure in case the table must be re created Figure 3 12 Create Table Wizard Generate SQL Script Dialog Box CREATE TABLE New Table unnamed_3 INTEGER wil Save 6 You can click the Save button to save the script so that it can be run in the Pervasive SQL data manager at any time Click Next 3 18 Adding a Table 7 By clicking Finish in the dialog box below Figure 3 13 the changes that have been entered thus far will be committed to the database Figure 3 13 Create Table Wizard Complete Dialog Box Completing Create Table Wizard You have succes
107. the shortcut menu The following dialog box appears allowing you to delete the table Figure 3 14 Drop Table Wizard Completing the Drop Table Wizard IV Delete Data file To drop the table click Finish Dropping a Table The option Delete Data file not only removes the table from the database but also removes the actual data file itself from the machine s hard drive Click Finish The final Drop Table Wizard dialog box not shown indicates to you that the table was successfully dropped Click Close Note When a table is in use it cannot be dropped If you are unable to drop a table use Monitor to verify whether the table is in use 3 21 Using the Pervasive Control Center Setting Database Security For further information on database security see Advanced Operations Guide Owner Names and Relational Security Turning Security On and Off 3 22 Database security helps prevent intruders from accessing the data on your databases or unintentional damage to data by authorized users By default security is turned off Security is enabled on Pervasive SQL databases through the PCC or by executing an SQL statement gt 3 xs Note When turning security on or off all database connections must be closed Because SQL Data Manager uses additional connections you must close all SQL Data Manager windows before attempting to turn security on or off If you are viewing the contents or propertie
108. the statement delimiter in Query Pane if you create stored procedures Stored procedures use the semicolon as a statement delimiter within the procedure itself b Click File New SQL Query or click If Query Pane contains statements that have not been saved you are prompted to save them Click Yes to save the existing statements specify a file name and location then click Save Click No to discard the existing statements Any SQL statements in Query Pane are cleared and the statement indicator is positioned at the top left of the pane The indicator is the yellow arrow gt c Use Query Builder to build a statement See Query Builder Tasks on page 6 41 If execution stops because of an error the statement indicator positions to the statement that was being run when the interruption occurred Also the Text Results tab lists the statement that was last run Knowing the last statement run can help you troubleshoot the problem See To continue running SQL statements that were stopped on page 6 57 gt To close a database 1 Click File Close Database 2 Click Yes to confirm that you want to close the database Note that the title bar no longer shows the name of an open database or the name of a machine on which the database resides In addition the commands and icons for running a query become inactive grayed out You can run a query only if a database is open gt To change data with Grid Results grid
109. to find information 9 29 Components of Pervasive SQL 1 3 Concepts basic database structures and terms 1 5 databases 1 2 1 5 ODBC standard 2 21 2 Index Configuration bti ini 2 37 2 38 8 26 delay in eliminating 3 5 3 6 engine DSN 2 37 odbc ini 2 38 8 27 server O S rights required 9 4 Conflict access 9 18 Connection strings ServerDSN or DBQ not found in 9 2 Consistency checking 3 43 Contacting Pervasive resources 10 1 Continuous Operations behavior after server failure 9 31 Converting data files to older file format 9 20 v3 01 DDFs to current version 9 21 Cost of ownership lowest 1 10 Create Database Wizard creating a Client DSN 2 40 creating an Engine DSN on NetWare 2 31 creating an Engine DSN on Windows 2 25 name of exe 3 8 prerequisites to creating a database 2 24 CREATE GROUP 9 25 CREATE PROCEDURE error code 4994 9 11 Create Table Wizard column attributes 3 17 name of exe 3 8 CREATE USER 9 25 Createdb exe 3 8 Creating databases 3 10 O S rights required 9 4 See Table Designer DDFs for existing data 9 23 DDFs for old data record size is wrong 9 20 DSN on NetWare 9 24 table for existing data file too few columns 9 28 tables 3 15 tables See also Table Designer users 3 25 Creating an SQL query with SQL Data Manager 6 44 Cross platform support 1 10 Crtblwzd exe 3 8 D Data cannot access troubleshooting 9 3 exporting 3 33 importing 3 33 modifying 3 32 stored in files 9 26 viewing 3 32
110. users just as the Server engine does That is each combination of a set of requesters and an application creates a unique client ID Licenses are tracked per computer based on the unique ID for the network card Only one engine is ever permitted to access the files at a time The second engine to try to open the files gets locked out because the engines open the data files in exclusive mode non file sharing so that corruption cannot occur Does the Workgroup engine use concurrent or per seat licensing Concurrent Refer to User Count on page 4 3 Aside from licensing is there a limit to how many users can access a Workgroup engine simultaneously The Workgroup engine architecture is basically the same as the Server engine There are no theoretical limits only practical ones such as bandwidth system processing power and economics Client server licenses are less expensive than Workgroup once you reach about 7 to 10 users How do know which protocol am using for communication can see other systems in Network Neighborhood but I can t get to my data From the Start menu of any Windows computer with the database client installed choose Programs Pervasive System Analyzer In the Welcome screen that appears click Next In the following screen check the box Test Network Communications and make sure all the other boxes are not checked Click Next In the following screen Difficulty Accessing Data Frequently As
111. when creating DDFs for old data 9 20 Recreating DSNs 2 23 2 52 Redirected mapping not supported 9 19 Referential constraints listing 3 42 verifying 3 44 Referential integrity 2 55 checking 3 42 how to check integrity 3 44 Registering a remote engine in PCC 3 4 Relational access setting up on NetWare 9 23 Remote database access 2 43 defined 1 7 Remove column button 3 16 Remove index button 3 17 Remove segment button 3 17 Removing a column See Table Designer a remote engine from PCC 3 4 atable 3 20 See Table Designer databases 3 13 DSN 2 52 Repairing database inconsistencies 3 46 Replication 9 31 Requester defined of 1 4 for SQL Relational Database Engine 9 26 troubleshooting client 9 4 Rights adding a group 3 23 adding a user 3 25 administrative 2 10 required to create a database 3 10 granting 3 24 3 25 10 Index granting administrative for this account 2 13 on Linux 2 19 on NetWare 4 2 5 x or 6 x 2 19 on Windows 2000 2 12 on Windows NT 2 12 if changed from system account 2 13 Row defined 1 5 Rows orphan checking for 3 44 Running in trace mode 9 30 S Scalable solution 1 10 Scalable SQL converting v3 01 DDFs to current version 9 21 Scheduling events 9 26 Schema defined 1 6 Security administrative rights 2 10 database 3 22 file system 1 20 2 46 logging in as administrator 2 13 2 20 OS login vs DB login 9 16 owner names vs SQL security 9 25 turning database security off 3 23 turning database securi
112. you make the changes however look at the information for this class 1 Set Query Builder to build a SELECT statement change the query type to Select 2 Add table Class to Query Builder Diagram 3 Click the column All columns then run the SQL statement for output to the Grid Results tab SQL Data Manager Tasks SQL DM should show something similar to the following SELECT Class FROM Class 4 Name Section Max_Size Start_Date Start_Time gt 160 PHY 20 001 30 06 05 95 10 30 00 AM 161 PHY 30 001 25 06 06 95 08 00 00 AM 162 PHY 30 001 25 06 06 95 11 00 00 an 163 PHY 40 001 25 06 06 95 02 00 00 PM 164 PHY 40 001 30 06 06 95 08 00 00 AM 165 Psc 10 001 100 06 07 95 08 00 00 AM 4 Gri Resuits K Ten Rezus e 4 Scroll the results grid until you see the record for Psychology 101 that has a start time of 11 00 am ID Name Section Max_Size Start_Date Start_Time Finish Ti 173 PSY 101 001 200 06 07 95 11 00 00 AM 01 50 00 PH 175 PSY 102 001 100 06 07 95 08 00 00 AM 10 50 00 AM 176 PSY 203 001 50 06 08 95 06 00 00 AM 10 50 00 AM 177 PSY 203 002 50 06 08 95 11 00 00 AM 01 50 00 PM d gt This is the record you want to change Notice that its ID is 173 5 Activate word wrap in Query Pane if it is not already activated 6 Set Query Builder to build an UPDATE statement
113. 1 8 WhyRervasive SQL 5 26 4 a5 8s ot E a E gee akan gh Bw Gre eae ww gabe BAR eS 1 10 Understanding the Product Family 2 0 0 2c eee eee ee 1 12 Work ra a tial te ta Aine bob MOU hE ih gal hg A Ake Ue iat Sa 1 12 SOLVE es seth a RR ie Base tS S Matt Sail A nde Als Gd ae atte rd a a 1 13 Datalxchan gery js si aep8 co det amp GAS o Meee E E E a ate ete 1 14 Crystal Reports for PervasiveSQL 1 ee ee 1 14 Helpful Utilities sii 8 cade a e Sve baat Sb Stee cd Mowe E gee A Seale AAS 1 15 Using Pervasive SQL Documentation 0 2 ee eee 1 17 Getting Started Guides 3 ccs ns ace oo hw SS ad Oe Dade ee eee 1 17 Whats NeW iare ma Sib nd dg Be ee E E Ee 1 18 User SSUES apa he e a a Ek idk a Ma A AA 1 18 Advanced Operations Guide sra ai eaan eo EE ee en 1 18 SOL Engine References ma mR P wows E a Sa Ge a E O Bas 1 18 Status Codes and Messages oeras a ma me a ee 1 18 Pervasive Products and Services nsanu ee ee es 1 18 Online Helps 26 Sati E eat Steet hate coat de Ga ee Gita de a Seder aaah arg 1 19 FilesSystemi SeCurit yee soo cacch E A E eek E EE E an Deh git States E e 1 20 2 Using Pervasive SQL 22s see ee ee 2 1 A Walk through of Basic User Tasks Starting and Stopping the Database Engine 2 2 0 0 0 0 0000004 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Server Engine on a Windows Server 2 3 Starting and Stopping the Workgroup Engine on Windows 2 7 Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on NetWa
114. 2000 right click Pervasive SQL relational then click Stop Right click Pervasive SQL transactional then click Stop 2 5 Using Pervasive SQL 2 6 3 To start the database services on Windows NT or 2000 by using Net Start or Btisc exe Click Start Run Type one of the following a net start Pervasive SQL lt transactional relational gt b btisc start Pervasive SOL lt transactional relational gt Click OK Note Btisc exe is located in the PVSW BIN folder gt To stop the database services on Windows NT or 2000 1 2 3 by using Net Start or Btisc exe Click Start gt Run Type one of the following a net stop Pervasive SQL lt transactional relational gt b btisc stop Pervasive SQL lt transactional relational gt Click OK Note Btisc exe is located in the PVSW BIN folder gt To start the database services on Windows NT or 2000 _ by using PCC Click Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt Control Center In the Namespace click on a registered engine Click Action gt Tasks Do one of the following a Click Start All Pervasive Services to start both the relational and transactional services b Click Start Relational Service to start the relational service Starting and Stopping the Workgroup Engine on Windows Starting and Stopping the Database Engine c Click Start Transactional Service to start the tra
115. 30 00 WHERE ID 173 AND Class Name PSY 101 Click Tools Query gt Run Current SQL Statement in Text or click I The Text Results tab contains the following result SQL statement script has executed successfully 1 row s were affected Now look at the data in the Class table again to verify that you changed the record Set Query Builder to build a SELECT statement change the query type to Select Click the column All columns then run the SQL statement for output to the Grid Results tab Scroll the results grid until you see the record for Psychology 101 with ID 173 Notice that the maximum class size is now 175 and the start time is 10 30 am ID Name l Section Max_Size Start Date Start_Time 4 067 08 79 PSY 101 001 175 06 07 95 pey i 0670775 175 PSY 102 001 100 06 07 95 08 00 00 AM l 176 PSY 203 001 50 06 08 95 08 00 00 AM 177 PSY 203 002 50 06 08 95 11 00 00 AM gt To build an INSERT statement with Query Builder This task assumes the following You have completed the task To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 That tasks contains how to information that is not covered again in this task You have reviewed these sections in this chapter SQL Data Manager Concepts on page 6 2 and SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference on page 6 16 6 79 SQL Data Manager 6
116. 5 creating tables See Table Designer Delete Database Wizard 3 13 deleting databases 3 13 eliminating delay in Configuration 3 5 Export Wizard 3 33 Import Wizard 3 33 interpreting engine icons 3 6 overview 3 2 poll interval 3 5 registering a remote server 3 4 setting database security 3 22 SQL Data Manager 3 32 stopping and restarting services 3 28 turning security on off and 3 22 viewing and modifying table properties 3 29 See Table Designer viewing database engines 3 6 wizards available 3 8 Pervasive Products and Services 1 18 Pervasive System Analyzer 7 1 name of exe 3 9 Pervasive SQL advantages 1 10 benefits 1 10 client defined 2 22 components of 1 3 explained 1 2 features 1 10 Server 1 12 server defined 2 22 Workgroup 1 12 Pervasive SQL 7 need to recreate DSNs 2 23 Pervasive SQL utilities See Utilities Pervasive_Admin security group 2 10 use with Active Directory 2 14 2 16 Platform support 1 10 Preserving DDFs 9 22 Primary key modifying table definition and 5 6 Programming interfaces supported 9 26 Protocol determining network 9 18 PSA see Pervasive System Analyzer psawizrd exe 3 9 PVS file 5 7 PVSW LOG client and server compatibility 9 2 Q Query Builder See SQL Data Manager Query Builder Diagram See SQL Data Manager Query Builder Grid See SQL Data Manager Query timeout period 6 51 Questions frequently asked 9 12 Index 9 R Record defined 1 5 length determining 5 38 wrong
117. 6 77 SQL Data Manager 7 In Query Builder Diagram click the columns ID Name Max_ Size and Start_Time Start_Time _ Finish_Tine _ Building_Name _ Room_Number _ Faculty_ID Column Table New Value Criteria or Class ID Class Class Name Class Class Max_Size Class Class Start_Time Class a Class Notice that the symbol appears in the table window instead of the w symbol that appears for a SELECT statement 8 In the Criteria column for Class ID type 173 and press the Tab key 9 Inthe Criteria column for Class Name type PSY 101 and press the Tab key You could build your statement without the class name because the class ID uniquely identifies the record For clarity to someone reading the SQL statement though include the class name 10 In the New Value column for Class Max_Size type 175 and press the Tab key 11 In the New Value column for Class Start_Time type 10 30 00 and press the Tab key remember to use single quotes around the time 6 78 SQL Data Manager Tasks SQL DM should show something similar to the following New Value 173 Class Name a PSY1 ot 12 13 14 15 Class Max_Size Class class Start_Time Class gt UPDATE Class SET Class Max_Size 175 Class Start_Time 10
118. 8 on Linux Pervasive SQL V8 uses the standard Linux logging system Depending on the configuration of etc syslog conf messages are sent to the syslogd daemon which does one of the following logs it in an appropriate system log e writes it to the system console forwards it to a list of users forwards it to syslogd on another host over the network More information can be found in the man pages for syslogd and syslog conf User Manual Exclusions for Linux The section Configuration Reference of the Advanced Operations Guide regarding the settings for System Cache Windows Linux engines only and Accept Remote Request Windows Linux engines only are ignored in Pervasive SQL V8 for Linux The chapter Manipulating Btrieve Data Files with Maintenance of the Advanced Operations Guide works only on the client for Pervasive SQL V8 8 3 Linux Supplementary Documentation Man Pages ty The following man pages are available for the Pervasive SQL V8 for Linux product btadmin butil clilcadm dbmaint dsnadd mkded sqlmgr To make these man pages available add spvsw_ROOT man to your MANPATH environment variable If you need more detailed information on a utility or application see Available Utilities on page 8 5 Note Check the man pages for the most current information Every effort is made to ensure that the information in this guide matches that in the man pages On occasi
119. 80 SQL DM is running see To start SQL DM as a stand alone application on page 6 42 or To start SQL DM from PCC on page 6 43 The database DEMODATA is open see To open a database on page 6 44 Both Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid are hidden see To show or hide Query Builder Diagram on page 6 62 and To show or hide Query Builder Grid on page 6 62 No tables are open in Query Builder Diagram see To remove a table from Query Builder Diagram on page 6 87 Your goal for this task is to add a new philosophy class to the database Before you make the change however look at the information for the existing courses 1 Set Query Builder to build a SELECT statement change the query type to Select Add table Course to Query Builder Diagram Click the column All columns then run the SQL statement for output to the Grid Results tab Scroll the results grid until you see the records for Philosophy SQL DM should show something similar to the following All column Column Alias Table Result Order by Criteria bs je ar Course Course amp m SELECT Course FROM Course 4 Name Description Credit_Hours Dept_Name PHI 101 Introduction to Ethics 3 Philosophy PHI 102 Contemporary Moral Issues 3 Philosophy PHI 203 Moral Issues in Public Schools 3 Philosophy PHI 304 Existialism 3 Philosophy
120. ATE Statements on page 6 35 Query Builder Grid for INSERT Statements on page 6 36 Query Builder Grid for DELETE Statements on page 6 37 The following image shows the main window of the GUI The table below the image describes the GUI objects By default Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid are hidden when you start SQL DM SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference Figure 6 9 SQL Data Manager Main Window Pervasive SQL Data Manager DOCLAB2 DEMODATA _ oO x File Edit View Tools Help File DSH BEM A aE ma rm BeBe D z 4 Grid Results f OVR Rows Fetched 0 GUI Object Description Related Information Title Bar Shows the following information name of the utility name of the computer on which the database resides if a database is open name of the open database if one is open For example in Figure 6 9 the open database is DEMODATA on machine DOCLAB2 File menu Provides the following commands New SQL Query Open SQL Query Save SQL Query Save SQL Query As Open Database Close Database Print Page Setup Exit 6 17 SQL Data Manager 6 18 GUI Object Description Related Information New SQL Query Creates a new SQL script in Query Pane on page 6 8 command Query Pane Clears Query or O icon Pane and positions the statement indicator at the top of the pane To create an
121. Administrator 4 1 CLI tasks how to apply license key 4 16 display all applied licenses 4 16 display help 4 17 display specific license 4 16 remove a license 4 16 command line interface 4 2 graphical user interface 4 2 GUI tasks how to apply license key 4 13 determine total user count 4 15 display applied license 4 14 display help 4 15 remove a license 4 14 select a computer for license administration 4 11 start as stand alone application 4 11 start from PCC 4 10 GUI visual reference 4 5 license key 4 2 licenses for prior releases 4 4 tasks how to 4 9 user count 4 2 4 3 applying 4 4 obtaining 4 4 License count increasing 9 18 See User count License key administering licenses with License Administrator 4 1 and user count 4 2 4 3 applying a key 4 13 4 16 applying user count 4 4 determining total user count 4 15 displaying a specific license 4 16 displaying all applied licenses 4 14 4 16 for prior releases 4 4 obtaining user count 4 4 removing a license 4 14 4 16 starting License Administrator 4 10 4 11 Licensing workgroup engine 9 18 Limited user fast user switching 2 56 Linked mode See Table Designer Linux client DSNs 2 45 configuration bti ini 2 37 8 26 engine DSNs 2 37 manual pages 8 4 MicroKernel Database Engine starting and stopping 2 9 naming databases 2 37 user manual exclusions 8 2 changes exclusions 8 2 utilities 8 2 utilities 8 5 btadmin 8 6 butil 8 8 clilcadm 8 17 dbmaint 2 37 8 18 dsnad
122. C is an integrated framework in which users can connect to Pervasive SQL engines set up and modify databases query and update data and tune engine performance PCC uses a Windows Explorer like motif a tree of objects referred to elsewhere as the Namespace This tree of objects can be opened or expanded to reveal more detail Examples of objects include engines databases tables users and engine configuration settings Figure 3 1 shows a picture of PCC Figure 3 1 Pervasive Control Center Bm Pervasive SQL Control Center iol x Action View Tools Help e ole xe nme ay Control Center Root B amp Pervasive SQL Engines iy DZIPPE Databases al Databases Configuration D eff Configuration nf Register New Engine olf View Restart Pervasive Services X Delete ee ae E Refresh op Relational Service Stop Transactional Service Properties Help Namespace Each object in the tree when selected has its own set of functions and its own set of tools to enable these functions For example if one of the Databases located under a Pervasive SQL engine is selected a different set of tools appears in the toolbar than if Configuration is selected The Configuration tools function separately from the Pervasive SQL engine tools Much of the functionality of PCC is implemented as wizards that act upon objects in the namespace To perform a function
123. CT statement returns The following operators are recognized as search criteria for a value BETWEEN expression AND expression NOT BETWEEN expression AND expression IN NOT IN IS NULL IS NOT NULL LIKE NOT LIKE equals lt less than gt greater than lt less than or equal to gt greater than or equal to lt gt not equal to Or Specifies an additional search Query Builder Grid on condition linked to the previous criteria by a logical OR Note The grid does not contain a column for a logical AND The task To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder explains how to construct a logical AND page 6 14 To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 Query Builder Grid for UPDATE Statements SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference The following image shows Query Builder Grid for UPDATE statements The table below the image describes the GUI objects Figure 6 11 Query Builder Grid for UPDATE Statements New Value Criteria GUI Object Description Related Information Column Shows the name of the Query Builder Grid on database column being used page 6 14 in the SQL statement Column names are fully qualified with To build an UPDATE the table name statement with Query table_name column_name Builder on page 6 76 Table Shows the name of the table Query Builder Grid on with whi
124. DDF Sniffer and DDF Builder used the Btrieve API to manipulate DDFs which was less desirable than doing it through the native relational interface of Pervasive SQL These products contributed to issues that were difficult to isolate and fix Does Pervasive Control Center have the same functions as DDF Sniffer Namely can PCC read a Btrieve data file without DDFs and analyze the file to help me build DDFs Yes it does in general but it lacks some of the automation features offered by DDF Sniffer such as the ability to recommend data types to use for non indexed fields However PCC avoids many of the problems that DDF Sniffer and DDF Builder encountered in trying to create and maintain DDFs via the Btrieve API rather than through the relational engine The result is that you probably need to knowa bit more about databases and data types than you would with DDF Sniffer but you will wind up with fewer problems in the long run For more information see the question and answer immediately above How do I set up ODBC on a NetWare server so that can perform relational operations Pervasive SQL includes an ODBC manager for NetWare All you need to do is use PCC to create a new database on the NetWare server then create a client DSN on the client to make the remote database available to client applications 9 23 Basic Troubleshooting 9 24 You must have administrative permissions on the NetWare server to perform these tasks Here a
125. DOCLAB2 DEMODATA Fie Edit View Tools Help If the title bar does not show the name of a database and the name of a machine then no database is open To open a database Click File Open Database The Login to database dialog appears If the desired database has Pervasive SQL security enabled type the user name and password required for the database in the User and Password fields respectively By default the user name is Master If the database does not have security enabled you may leave the User and Password fields blank Click a desired server in the Server list Click a desired database in the Database list Click OK gt To create an SQL query or script By default when you start SQL DM Query Pane is ready for you type in SQL statements Statements that you build with Query Builder also appear in Query Pane Note that Query Builder clears the contents of Query Pane so you will lose any statements typed in unless you have saved them as a script A script is one or more SQL statements saved as an ASCII file See To save an SQL query as a script on page 6 47 1 Perform one of the following actions a Type the SQL query into Query Pane Separate SQL statements with a delimiter By default SQL DM uses the pound sign You may change this delimiter character to the semi colon See To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 SQL Data Manager Tasks Note that you must use the pound sign as
126. Data Manager GUI Visual Reference Description Related Information Query Builder Provides the following commands Change Query Type To show or hide Query Builder Diagram on page 6 62 Add Table Group By Change Changes the type of Query Builder Grid on Query Type statement being built with page 6 14 command Query Builder The choices for r type are SELECT INSERT To set query type for UPDATE and DELETE Query Builder on page 6 CH icon This command is enabled ita 8 database is open and Query Builder Diagram or Query Builder Grid is enabled Add Table Adds a table to Query Builder Query Builder Diagram command Diagram so you may select on page 6 11 fields from the table or fe icon This command is enabled if a database is open and Query Builder Diagram or Query Builder Grid is enabled Query Builder Grid on page 6 14 To add a table to Query Builder Diagram on page 6 86 To remove a table from Query Builder Diagram on page 6 87 Group By command or icon Specifies a GROUP BY clause in a SELECT statement when you build an SQL statement with Query Builder This command is enabled if a database is open and Query Builder Diagram or Query Builder Grid is enabled Query Builder Diagram on page 6 11 Query Builder Grid on page 6 14 To add a Group By column to Query Builder Grid on
127. Data Source type System Data Source Open Mode Normal Data dictionary file location MNWI2SYS dztest Data file location s X 5 Ifno errors have occurred the wizard indicates success and displays a final dialog box not shown Click Close Now if you look in the PCC namespace a new entry should appear for the database just created You may have to refresh the list in the Pervasive Control Center for the new database to show To do this point the cursor at the menu click Action then Refresh gt Note Ifyou have created a brand new database where no DDFs or data files existed previously your new database is empty No tables or columns have been created You can use the Create Table Wizard described in Adding a Table on page 3 15 to define tables and columns 3 12 Deleting a Database Deleting a Database PCC includes a Drop delete Database Wizard You can use the wizard to delete a DSN a Database Name or an entire database You may also delete a database with Table Designer See Table Designer on page 5 1 To delete an Engine DSN a Database Name or a complete database from a server you must have administrative rights on the server 3 y4 Caution This procedure is different than removing an engine from the PCC Namespace This procedure may permanently delete data files and data dictionaries Caution Do not use the Drop Database Wizard or the PCC Delete comm
128. Data definitions stored in files 9 26 Data Dictionary Files See DDFs Data Export Wizard 3 33 name of exe 3 8 Data files changing location of 5 53 converting to older file format 9 20 not affected by install uninstall 9 15 re use of space 9 30 similar sharing of DDFs 9 25 Data Import Wizard 3 33 name of exe 3 8 Data replication 9 31 Data Source Names about 2 22 Database access prerequisites 2 24 setting up 2 21 setting up on client 2 40 binding 2 55 concepts 1 2 consistency checking 3 42 defined 1 2 1 6 engine administrative rights 2 10 definition of 1 3 starting 2 2 with PCC 3 28 stopping 2 2 with PCC 3 28 inconsistencies check database wizard and 3 46 mirroring 9 31 named 2 22 securing a 3 22 security logging in as an administrator 2 20 security vs OS security 9 16 structures 1 5 Database administrator not required 1 10 Database Management System defined 1 2 functions of 1 3 Database names cannot retrieve error 9 8 Database Server Engine starting and stopping Windows NT 2 3 Database Workgroup Engine starting and stopping Windows 2 7 Databases adding 3 10 creating 3 10 deleting 3 13 removing 3 13 dbmaint 2 37 Dbmaint utility 2 37 8 18 DBMS see Database Management System DBNAMES Named Databases 2 22 DBQ not found in connection string 9 2 DDF Builder 9 23 DDF Fase 9 23 DDF Sniffer 9 23 DDFs 2 55 building for existing data 9 23 changing hard coded file path 9 21 converting from old version 9 21 d
129. Grid on page 6 88 To add a Group By column to Query Builder Grid on page 6 88 General Tasks gt To start SQL DM as a stand alone application 1 From the desktop click Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt SQL Data Manager This step assumes that SQL DM was installed as part of a Pervasive SQL default installation A vendor application that uses an embedded database engine may require that you start SQL DM with different menu commands The GUI executable is named sqldmegr exe SQL DM starts by providing a dialog in which you choose a database engine and database name to connect to By default the local database engine on the same computer as SQL DM is specified 2 Click the desired database engine and database to open 3 Click OK SQL Data Manager Tasks Note SQL DM opens a separate instance for each database This means that you can open multiple instances of SQL DM for the same database Changes saved in one instance are reflected in another instance only if you run a query or queries in the other instance For example suppose you start SQL DM twice called instance A and B for database MyDBase If you change data in instance A and save the changes you need to run a SELECT statement in instance B to see those changes gt To start SQL DM from PCC 1 Start PCC if it is not already running Click Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt Control Center 2 Expand the tree in the nam
130. IP Security Policies on Local Machine E Re access this computer from the net Everyone Users Po 5 1 5 21 7765617 Backup Operators Everyone Users Po Power Users Admini Administrators Administrators 6 In the policy pane right click Act as part of the operating system then click Security Act as part of the operating m SES va ig Add workstations to domain Re Back up files and directories Re Bypass traverse checking Rg Change the system time 8 Create a pagefile Administrators Re Access this computer from the network Everyone Users Po Power Users Admini 2 17 Using Pervasive SQL 7 Click Add Local Security Policy Setting Act as part of the operating system Local Effective Assigned To Policy Setting Policy Setting 1 5 21 776561 741 764733703 120 2660629 1001 Add 8 Inthe Name pane click on the user or group for whose account you want to grant the user policy For example you could grant the policy to the Pervasive_Admin group 9 Click Add The user name is added to the bottom pane For example the following image shows that the Administrator has been added Name Administrator Add Check Names A The user name is added to the settings for local security policy E 10 Click OK Act as part of the operating system Local Effective Assigned To Policy Setting
131. Integrity enforced checked if you plan to enforce the referential integrity rules defined in the database Usually it is a good idea to do so Click Bound DDFs created if you want to prevent any other databases from being associated with these DDFs and data files Checking this option creates a new set of empty DDFs Do not click this option if you are setting up access to an existing database In the Dictionary location box type or select the location of the DDFs This location can be the location of existing DDFs if you are setting up an existing database for use with ODBC or it can be an empty directory if you are creating a new database 2 29 Using Pervasive SQL For Server databases this must be a full path name on the server do not enter or browse a mapped drive path Browsing for the location only works if you are seated at the server or you are browsing a local directory tree that is identical to the directory tree on the server Workgroup engine users may enter a full path name on a local hard drive or a mapped drive or UNC name In the Data file location box you must accept the default or browse to the location of the data files This location can be the location of existing data files if you are setting up an existing database for use with ODBC or it can be an empty directory if you are creating a new database For Server databases this must be a full path name on the server do not enter or browse a mappe
132. Linux Supplementary Documentation This chapter explains how to get things done on Linux server platforms Chapter 9 Basic Troubleshooting This chapter provides information for troubleshooting and resolving problems XV About This Manual m Chapter 10 Pervasive SQL Resources and Contacts This chapter explains the resources and information at your disposal as a valued customer of Pervasive Software The manual also includes an index xvi Conventions Conventions Unless otherwise noted command syntax code and examples use the following conventions CASE Commands and reserved words typically appear in uppercase letters Unless you are working with Linux or the manual states otherwise you can enter these items using uppercase lowercase or both For example you can type MY PROG myprog or MYprog Bold Words appearing in bold include the following menu names dialog box names commands options buttons statements etc onospaced Monospaced font is reserved for words you enter such as font command syntax Square brackets enclose optional information as in log_name If information is not enclosed in square brackets it is required A vertical bar indicates a choice of information to enter as in file name file name lt gt Angle brackets enclose multiple choices for a required item as in D lt 5 6 7 gt variable Words appearing in italics are variables that you m
133. Microsoft Access E Microsoft Access Eile Edit view Insert Tools Window Help O se H Sar Ba s o m 5 St a8 Za g db3 Database Woven B Desion Yequew X 2a EE HH Create table in Design view Create table by using wizard Create table by entering data Billing Forms Class Reports Course Department Enrolls Macros Faculty Modules Person Room Fa Favorites Note If you are linking a table and it does not have an index that uniquely identifies each record then Microsoft Access displays a list of the fields in the linked table Click a field or a combination of fields that will uniquely identify each record and then click OK 2 51 Using Pervasive SQL Deleting DSNs This section describes how to delete a DSN One reason you may have to perform this task is if you are upgrading from Pervasive SQL 7 If this is the case you must delete your existing DSNs before installing Pervasive SQL V8 and re create them using Pervasive SQL V8 This procedure does not delete Data Dictionary Files DDFs or data files gt To Delete a DSN using ODBC Administrator for Windows DSNs only 1 From the Start menu choose Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 Other Utilities gt ODBC Administrator 2 Inthe ODBC Administrator window click on the System DSN tab 3 Click on the DSN you wish to remove and click Remove You are prompted to confirm removal of the
134. NetWare servers and version NetWare Windows 32 bit workstations License Win32 Manages Pervasive SQL Windows Administrator NetWare license keys and user counts NetWare and and Linux Linux servers remote Workgroup local Command line version on Windows NetWare and Linux ODBC Win32 Sets up Data Source Names All Windows Administrator DSNs for client and engine engines local interfaces Server remote Gateway Win32 Used to configure and Workgroup engine Locator maintain gateway locator only files for the Workgroup engine Pervasive Win32 Analyzes system All System components runs Analyzer communication tests and archives or restores previous database engine files on your system Using Pervasive SQL Documentation Using Pervasive SQL Documentation Getting Started Guides All Pervasive SQL documentation both printed and online assumes you are familiar with the basics of using a computer such as clicking and dragging opening and saving files If you need assistance with these tasks please consult the documentation that came with your computer and or operating system This section describes the Pervasive SQL documentation Of these titles only Getting Started and Status Codes Quick Reference card are provided in hardcopy with Pervasive SQL the rest are provided on the Pervasive SQL CD ROM These online documentation files are installed on Windows platforms when you choose the Typical
135. Pervasive SQL Enginps A Dana Register New Engine View gt Refresh A dialog is displayed that allows you to choose the machine name where the Pervasive SQL server resides Figure 3 3 Choosing a Computer Name Computer name ee Test OK Cancel 4 Ifyou are unsure of the server name click the button located to the right of the name field and browse from the Network list that appears as shown below Registering or Removing a Server Figure 3 4 Choosing a Computer Name from a Network List Browse for Computer 7 x Select engine to be connected Dquaglint Dquaglin2k Dtan_2 Dtan2k Dzippe Ebserver Elucke2k Emagee Ememilla_ws Eric laptop Essbase Gbeck Gdillon nt 5 Select the computer name from the list or enter the computer name in the field and click OK The server should now appear in the Namespace window of PCC Note If you have engines registered that are not running you may encounter delays in Configuration as PCC periodically attempts to contact these engines To eliminate the delay unregister the dead engines You can minimize the delay by performing the following procedure In PCC right click Pervasive SQL Engines and choose Properties Set Poll interval seconds to 999 Click OK gt To remove a remote server from the Namespace 1 This procedure does not erase the data or database from the server It only keeps the server from a
136. Pervasive SQL V8 User s Guide Guide to Using Pervasive SQL Pervasive Software Inc 12365 Riata Trace Parkway Building B Austin TX 78727 USA Telephone 512 231 6000 or 800 287 4383 Fax 512 231 6010 Email info pervasive com Web http www pervasive com PEIVASIVE disclaimer trademarks PERVASIVE SOFTWARE INC LICENSES THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION PRODUCT TO YOU OR YOUR COMPANY SOLELY ON AN AS IS BASIS AND SOLELY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE ACCOMPANYING LICENSE AGREEMENT PERVASIVE SOFTWARE INC MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE SOFTWARE OR THE CONTENT OF THE DOCUMENTATION PERVASIVE SOFTWARE INC HEREBY EXPRESSLY STATES AND YOU OR YOUR COMPANY ACKNOWLEDGES THAT PERVASIVE SOFTWARE INC DOES NOT MAKE ANY WARRANTIES INCLUDING FOR EXAMPLE WITH RESPECT TO MERCHANTABILITY TITLE OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE AMONG OTHERS Btrieve Client Server in a Box Pervasive Pervasive Software and the Pervasive Software logo are registered trademarks of Pervasive Software Inc Built on Pervasive Software DataExchange MicroKernel Database Engine MicroKernel Database Architecture Pervasive SQL Solution Network Ultralight and ZDBA are trademarks of Pervasive Software Inc Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Windows Millennium Windows 2000 Windows XP Win32 Win32s
137. Policy Setting S 1 5 21 776561741 764733703 120 2660629 1001 Administrator o 11 Click OK 12 Exit the window for Local Security Settings then exit Administrative Tools 2 18 Granting Administrator Rights on NetWare 4 2 5 x or 6 x Granting Administrator Rights on Linux Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine gt To grant a user database administrator rights on 1 4 NetWare 4 2 5 x or 6 x Do one of the following a Run the 32 bit utility NWADMN32 located in SYS PUBLIC WIN32 b Run the NWADMN3X utility located in SYS PUBLIC The NetWare Administrator dialog box appears Select the Object menu Select Create The New Object dialog box opens Select Group and click OK The Create Group dialog box opens Enter Pervasive_Admin as the name of the group and click Create Once Pervasive_Admin is created you can double click on the name and the Details dialog box for that group will appear Members is an options page listed in the right hand panel of the dialog box click on it and then click Add to select a user and click OK to close the dialog box Note Users may not log in to Pervasive SQL V8 if they are in violation of any restrictions set in their NetWare user profile These restrictions may be accessed and changed by double clicking the user name in the NDS tree which will bring up the Details dialog box for that user The Login Restrictions Login Time Restrictions and Network Addres
138. QL Resources and Contacts Printed Documentation 10 2 Pervasive SQL V8 comes with a printed copy of Getting Started and Status Codes Quick Reference A complete suite of online documentation is installed on Windows when you choose the Typical installation procedure It is available as an option in the Custom installation procedure The content is accessible through the Start menu Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 Documentation Pervasive SQL V8 Printed versions of the following titles are available for purchase m Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server or Workgroup edition m Pervasive SQL User s Guide m SQL Engine Reference m Status Codes and Messages m Pervasive Products and Services ms Advanced Operations Guide m What s New in Pervasive SQL for latest release To order manuals please contact Pervasive Software using one of the following methods Online through the Pervasive Store http www pervasive com commerce E mail salessupport pervasive com Phone 1 800 287 4383 Developer Center Developer Center The Pervasive Software Web site is a great source for Pervasive SQL information http www pervasive com It is your most immediate source for assistance with the product The link shown below is commonly referred to as Developer Center It is a great starting point from which to navigate to available downloads documentation product updates news articles sample code and tutorials
139. Reset Restores the information from To discard all changes the last saved state All Reset on page 5 37 changes that have not been saved are discarded Open Table Opens a table To start Table Designer This command appears only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application as a stand alone application on page 5 30 To open a table on page 5 35 Open Database Opens a database This command appears only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application To start Table Designer as a stand alone application on page 5 30 To open a database on page 5 33 Create Table Creates a new table in your database and opens that table for you This command appears only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application To start Table Designer as a stand alone application on page 5 30 To create a table on page 5 36 Create Database Creates a new database which then becomes the one open in Table Designer This command appears only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application To start Table Designer as a stand alone application on page 5 30 To create a database on page 5 34 Delete Table Deletes a table from physical storage This command appears only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application To start Table Designer as a stand alone application on page 5 30
140. SQL Workgroup edition 2 57 Using Pervasive SQL 2 58 Using the Pervasive Control Center chapter A Brief Tour of Pervasive Control Center Pervasive Control Center PCC is an easy to use graphical tool designed to help you create and manipulate databases and control your DBMS It allows you to access nearly all the functions of the product from one place This chapter leads you on a tour of PCC to help you learn the interface the variety of Pervasive SQL V8 tools and common operations launched from PCC The topics in this chapter include m An Overview of Pervasive Control Center on page 3 2 m Registering or Removing a Server on page 3 4 a Viewing Database Engines on page 3 6 m Pervasive Control Center Wizards on page 3 8 Adding or Creating a Database on page 3 10 e Deleting a Database on page 3 13 e Adding a Table on page 3 15 Dropping a Table on page 3 20 PCC Shortcuts Stopping and Restarting Services on Windows Servers on page 3 28 PCC Functions Viewing and Modifying Table Properties on page 3 29 m Viewing and Modifying Data on page 3 32 Setting Database Security on page 3 22 Exporting Importing Data on page 3 33 m Checking Consistency and Referential Integrity on page 3 42 3 1 Using the Pervasive Control Center An Overview of Pervasive Control Center Pervasive Control Center PC
141. SQL Server engine Test network Test the network connectivity to a server The network tests display detailed information about any problems encountered during the test and provides suggestions on how to remedy the problems If you do not have Internet Explorer installed this test is not available because the test uses an embedded HTML component to display results To test your network on page 7 25 To specify advanced settings for network test on page 7 25 To understand your network test results on page 7 26 Test transactional engine Tests the functionality of the transactional Btrieve database engine To test the transactional database engine on page 7 27 To understand your transactional database engine test results on page 7 27 7 13 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA 7 14 GUI Object Description Related Information Test relational engine Tests the functionality of the relational SQL database engine To test the relational database engine on page 7 27 To understand your relational database engine test results on page 7 28 Log file specification Allows you to specify a different log file location than the default PSA logs detailed information on the tests it performs You can use this log file to review tests at a later time or to forward them to Pervasive Technical Support
142. SQL databases This chapter includes the following sections Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on page 2 2 Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine on page 2 10 Setting Up ODBC Database Access on page 2 21 Setting Up Database Access on Windows on page 2 25 Setting Up Database Access on a NetWare Server on page 2 31 Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server on page 2 37 Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications on page 2 46 Deleting DSNs on page 2 52 Bound Databases and Enforced Integrity on page 2 55 Using the Fast User Switching Feature of Windows XP on page 2 56 2 1 Using Pervasive SQL Starting and Stopping the Database Engine 2 2 This section outlines how to start and stop the Pervasive SQL engine For most engine configuration parameters you need to stop and restart the engine in order for a particular change in your configuration to take effect To start and stop the database engine follow the instructions for your platform Starting and Stopping the Server Engine on a Windows Server on page 2 3 m Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on NetWare on page 2 8 Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on Linux on page 2 9 Note Btrieve v6 15 Users If you have any log LOG files you want to roll forward you must do so before you load the Perv
143. Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified 1 Click View gt Btrieve Data or click the Btrieve tab 2 Specify where to position the column Table Designer Tasks a Click Edit Move Up or click to move the column up one grid row b Click Edit Move Down or click to move the column down one grid row Note that moving a column up or down changes the position only on the Table Designer GUI and in the data definition files The data remains unaffected 5 61 Table Designer 5 62 chapter SQL Data Manager M A Tour of Pervasive SQL Data Manager The topics in this chapter include m SQL Data Manager Concepts on page 6 2 m SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference on page 6 16 m SQL Data Manager Tasks on page 6 40 6 1 SQL Data Manager SQL Data Manager Concepts This section contains the following topics m Overview on page 6 2 m Restrictions on page 6 3 Results Tabs on page 6 4 m Panes on page 6 8 m SQL Reference on page 6 15 Overview SQL Data Manager SQL DM allows you to run Structured Query Language SQL statements against a Pervasive SQL database With SQL statements you may retrieve create change or delete data in a database provided you have the proper database permissions to perform these actions The SQL statements that you may use with SQL DM are do
144. To Remove a License on page 4 14 gt To Determine a Total User Count 1 Ensure that the computer name in the title bar is the computer for which you want determine a database user count If not select a different computer as described in To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 2 Fora particular product total the user count values that appear in the Applied Licenses list excluding any values for expired temporary licenses For example total all values for the Pervasive SQL Server product that are permanent licenses or temporary licenses that have not expired The sum is the total number of users who can concurrently connect to the database engine on the computer gt To Refresh the List of Applied Licenses 1 Ensure that the computer name in the title bar is the computer you want If not select a different computer as described in To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 2 Click Refresh The information for Applied Licenses is re displayed and any license key information is removed from the License Key field The Computer Name field is cleared then displays the machine name to which License Administrator is currently connected For example suppose License Administrator is connected to PVSW1 and you attempt to connect to PVSW2 which does not have a database engine running License Administrator displays a message that it could not connect and PVSW2 is displayed in
145. _Name char 25 M L Room_Number uinteger O o Head_Of Dept ubigint O oO 3 Click File Save or click J The save action adds the column gt To insert a column between columns Inserting deleting or moving a column on the Columns tab changes the database The database is rebuilt when you save the Table Designer information This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click View Columns or click the Columns tab 5 39 Table Designer 5 40 Click on the leftmost cell of the column above which you want to insert a column A right pointing triangle appears in the cell indicating the selected column p Click Edit Insert Columns or click A new column is inserted A blue asterisk appears in the leftmost cell The default name of the column is col_n where n is anumber that automatically increments by one The first column you insert is col_1 the second col_2 and so forth The column is not added to the table until you save the database The following image shows a column inserted before the column named Head_of_Dept Column name Type Size Precision Scale Null Case Collate Default Name char 20 oO M Phone_Number decimal 11 0 mM oO T Building_Name char 25 M Room Number uinteger O O i a ai Ya ie mm mm b Head_Of Dept ubigint Oo Click File Sav
146. a Daa Se St abaa aa ea 7 2 PSA Functional Overview a s sa t eee 7 2 Why Use PSA e to 4 Soo e wn eS E Gok be ea ee ee ep eS 7 3 PSA Tet ii Detal arae O yd hanes Soa be 4 fe hal be a neds 4 7 3 Frequently Asked Questions 2 0 eee 7 7 Introductory Network Information 000000005 7 11 PSA GUI Visual References sa a eae dbs Ges Rae ole a A a le 7 12 PSA TaS kS iun i b davies e Set dew eb ahh el 54 l aa a onc a tans 7 15 Analyze and Archive Tasks ss acur rerea ee 7 16 Restore Archive Tasks r pi airen eE ees 7 17 Delete Components or Archives Tasks aoua 7 18 View Components Task s e Cen arela ea da aa ee ee 7 21 Test Active Installation Tasks se cres to ner aa pae ee eee 7 24 Other Tasks r tc aos ha Grecian aa A AEE Gale E lee wid amp 7 28 vi 8 Linux Supplementary Documentation Additional Information on Linux Utilities User Manual Exclusions for Linux aaa 0 Utilities tesenn Re e Te ees ee ee a ed eee BAS Changes and Exclusions 2 an e a aa ee ee Man Pag eS 2 ervo gan ag eres AOR Ge ae ve RAN ee te Se aie ae OR ie Eh es a Available Utilities e s 2 6 3 S85 oes fe dd ahi E ee Ae he ee Slee 9 Basic Troubleshooting 2 0 2 ee eee ee ee es How to Identify and Solve Common Problems General Troubleshooting 6 0 ad rira ee ee Error Messages from PCG sroga ee Frequently Asked Questions e e e a a EAEE ee eee Installation 20 43 4 sae ek 4 E E E p Ee O E SRS E
147. a files Checking this option creates a new set of empty DDFs Do not click this option if you are setting up access to an existing database In the Dictionary location box type or select the location of the DDFs As previously cautioned do not enter or browse a mapped drive path because the Server engine cannot interpret mapped drive paths You must enter a full path name Caution Browsing for the location only works if you are using the server itself or you are browsing a local directory tree that is identical to the directory tree on the server Ensure that you enter a full path name In the Data file location box you must accept the default or browse to the location of the data files As noted previously browsing for the location only works if you are seated at the server or you are browsing a local directory tree that is identical to the directory tree on the server Click OK to close the Create Database Name window This returns you to the Create Database Wizard 14 Click Next and go to step 10 Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server gt To Set Up a Named Database and Engine DSN from a Linux Server Database names are created in Linux by using the dbmaint utility at the server For a complete description of dbmaint see dbmaint on page 8 18 or read the dbmaint man page 1 Note This utility can only be run by user accounts belonging to group pvsw
148. abase on page 3 25 3 27 Using the Pervasive Control Center Stopping and Restarting Services on Windows Servers 3 28 PCC offers a convenient way to start and stop Pervasive SQL servers on Windows NT 2000 machines without having to use the Windows Services control panel Services on remote machines may be started and stopped provided that you have database administration rights on the remote machine 1 Tostart or stop a relational service right click on the machine in the PCC Namespace and select Tasks from the shortcut menu The submenu options allow you to start or stop the transactional engine the relational engine or both Figure 3 20 Stopping and Restarting Services in the Pervasive Control Center IE Pervasive SQL Control Center 3 0 x Action View Tools Help e gt omi xe nme Control Center Root B g Pervasive SQL Engines E E DZIPPE E Databases ff Configuration Bp E Fei n Register New Engine B al Databases Configuration olf view Restart Pervasive Services X Delete F S Re Stop Relational Service Stop Transactional Service Properties Help 7 Note You must stop the relational and transactional services to completely stop Pervasive SQL Stopping just one of the services does not stop the database engine completely Viewing and Modifying Table Properties Viewing and Modifying Table Properties In PCC it is very easy to vi
149. ad dependencies 2 9 MicroKernel Database Engine starting and stopping 2 8 migrating to Windows server 9 28 NSS volumes 2 8 slower on updates 2 8 nwmkde nlm and btrieve nlm required 9 27 ODBC and 9 23 reboot 5 x after installing Pervasive SQL 9 16 unloading Pervasive SQL 2 9 Network communications verifying 9 18 protocol determining 9 18 troubleshooting 9 6 Network communications testing 7 1 New utilities 7 1 News obtaining via e mail 10 8 Non standard DDFs detecting 9 22 NSS volume support 2 8 Nulcnvwz exe 3 9 Null modifying table definition and 5 6 restrictions for column 5 6 Null Conversion Wizard name of exe 3 9 O ODBC 1 11 concepts 2 21 interface determining if used 9 21 odbc ini 8 27 setting up on NetWare 9 23 Odbc ini 2 38 8 27 OLE DB provider 1 11 Online backup 9 31 Online documentation format varies by computer 9 17 Online help 1 19 Operating system security vs DB security 9 16 troubleshooting access rights 9 4 Order of columns changing 5 40 Orphan rows checking for 3 44 Overview Pervasive Control Center 3 2 Owner names and SQL security 9 25 cannot use PCC to grant permissions for files with owner names 3 23 Ownership lowest total cost of 1 10 P Password troubleshooting wrong 9 10 Performance NSS volumes slower on updates 2 8 Pervasive Control Center 3 2 accessing a remote server 3 4 adding databases 3 10 column attributes 3 17 Create Table Wizard 3 15 creating tables 3 1
150. after the specified period returns SQL_ERROR and sets SQLSTATE to S1T00 Because SQL statements are atomic no records are updated inserted or deleted if the SRDE cancels an UPDATE INSERT or DELETE statement respectively 1 Click Tools Properties 6 51 SQL Data Manager 6 52 3 gt Type a value for Query time out The allowed range is 0 through 4 294 967 295 Partial seconds for example 30 5 and negative numbers are not allowed Click OK To wrap text within Query Pane By default word wrap is turned off which is indicated by lack of a checkmark beside the command 1 gt Perform one of the following actions a Right click within Query Pane then click Word Wrap or press Control w b Click View gt Word Wrap Note that these actions function as a toggle alternately activates and deactivates word wrap To type a comment into Query Pane Comments are indicated by double dashes Each comment must be on a separate new line or after the statement separator on an existing line SQL DM does not support the use of a start end comment block such as See To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 1 2 Click at the beginning of the line where you want a comment lt Type followed by your comment text The following example shows valid comments SELECT FROM t1 This is a valid comment and so is this SELECT FROM t2
151. age 7 21 If you want to add more paths to the search locations see To add a location to the search list on page 7 22 Otherwise continue with this procedure Click Next to search for and display the components results list See To understand the results of your components view on page 7 23 To add a component to the search list Referencing Figure 7 2 on page 7 21 ensure that Additional modules checkbox is selected M Additional modules 7 21 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA 7 22 2 Enter the base component filename without a drive letter or path in the text box immediately below the Additional modules checkbox For example MYFILE DLL Click the Add Component button If the component you added is not in the path add the path to the searched locations using the To add a location to the search list task on page 7 22 Return to Step 4 of the To select options for the View Components module task on page 7 21 To add a location to the search list Referencing Figure 7 2 on page 7 21 ensure that the Additional locations checkbox is selected M Additional locations Click the Add Location button i Browse to the location using the directory selector My Documents a g Rasputin a 314 Floppy A Local Disk C E amp Compact Disc D 4 Volt on Aus rd 3 H 6 Local Disk S Local Disk T E Users on Aus rdivol2 U E wwwroot on ausdev3 W
152. aintain Named Databases on page 5 12 in Advanced Operations Guide This tool lets you bind and unbind a database 1 2 Click View gt Table Statistics or click the Statistics tab Click in the Table Location grid cell and delete the existing value if present Use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete Type the location you want If you are specifying a location on the same server where the database engine is running specify the location in this manner For NetWare enter a path in the form vol path For Windows NT enter a path in the form drive path where drive is the local drive letter For Linux enter the standard Linux path format from root If you are specifying a location to data files on another server specify the full UNC path For NetWare enter the path in the form server vol path For Windows enter the path in the form server sharename path For Linux enter the path in one of two ways server share path or server PVSWS path To display table information Click View gt Table Statistics or click the Statistics tab Btrieve Tasks gt To insert a Btrieve column at end of column definitions Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified Table Designer Tasks Click View gt Btrieve
153. anager Tasks You have completed the task To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 That tasks contains how to information that is not covered again in this task You have reviewed these sections in this chapter SQL Data Manager Concepts on page 6 2 and SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference on page 6 16 SQL DM is running see To start SQL DM as a stand alone application on page 6 42 or To start SQL DM from PCC on page 6 43 The database DEMODATA is open see To open a database on page 6 44 Both Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid are hidden see To show or hide Query Builder Diagram on page 6 62 and To show or hide Query Builder Grid on page 6 62 No tables are open in Query Builder Diagram see To remove a table from Query Builder Diagram on page 6 87 Your goal for this task is to remove from the database classroom 100 in the Boerner Building Before you make the changes however look at the information for the existing classrooms 1 Set Query Builder to build a SELECT statement change the query type to Select Add table Course to Query Builder Diagram Click the column All columns then run the SQL statement for output to the Grid Results tab 6 83 SQL Data Manager 4 Scroll the results grid until you see the records for the Boerner Building All columns _ Building_Nane Column Alias Table Result Order b
154. anced Settings Window How do you want to describe the new database Description EREE Which open mode do you want to use for the connection call DSN Open Mode Normal To which internal database name do you want the database linked Database name l DEMODATA Create In the Advanced Settings window you can type a description for the new database For more information in Integrity enforced and Bound see Bound Databases and Enforced Integrity on page 2 55 13 Setting Up Database Access on Windows In the DSN Open Mode field choose Normal unless you have reviewed the other options as described in Advanced Operations Guide In the Database name field choose the DBNAME of the database for which you wish to create the Engine DSN If you find the DBNAME you want click Next and return to step If the DBNAME you want to access is not listed click the Create button to create an internal DBNAME for the database Click Next Figure 2 13 Create DBNAME Window Database name Named db1 Cancel IV Integrity enforced I Bound DDF created Dictionary location Jc temp superduped B Data file locations X C temp superduper In the Database Name field type in the internal name you want to assign to the database This name does not need to be the same as the DSN This name is not displayed in PCC nor is it exposed to users trying to connect to the database during runtime Leave
155. ancel Grant To Help SMSCIiSveAcet SMSCIiSvcAcct amp SMSCIT oknAcct amp SMSCIIT oknAcct amp IV Show Advanced User Rights 9 Click OK 10 Exit User Manager gt To Set User Rights Policy on Windows 2000 1 Click Start Settings Control Panel 2 Double click Administrative Tools 2 16 Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine 3 Right click Local Security Policy then click Open J Administrative Tools File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back al Qsearch C4 Folders Address Administrative Tools ow on Component Services Telnet Server Admir Run as 4 Expand the tree for Local Policies click the plus sign Local Security Settings Action view e gt lm Tree Security Settings 9 Account Policies IC 4 Audit Policy GQ User Rights Assignment GQ Security Options C Public Key Policies IP Security Policies on Local Machine F ERT Tree RP Security Settings GQ Account Policies E3 Local Policies 08 Audit Policy Re act as part of the operating system Re add workstations to domain RE Back up files and directories RE Bypass traverse checking 82 change the system time Re create a pagefile 88 Create a token object Re create permanent shared objects E2 Debug programs E Public Key Policies a
156. and to delete DataExchange enabled databases or DataExchange templates Use the Deactivation Wizard to remove DataExchange enabled databases and the Template Remover Wizard to remove templates The Deactivation Wizard and the Template Remover Wizard can be accessed from the PCC after the Pervasive DataExchange product is installed gt To remove an existing database from an engine 1 2 In PCC right click on the database to be deleted Select Delete from the shortcut menu The following dialog box appears Figure 3 8 Drop Database Wizard Dialog Box Database name Associated with demodata IV Delete database name IV Delete system files 3 13 Using the Pervasive Control Center 3 14 lt 3 This dialog provides options to customize how much of the database to remove from the system By default the database DSN the internal database name and all data files are removed If no options are selected only the DSN is deleted The internal database name the DDFs and the data files are not affected If Delete database name is the only option checked the DSN and the internal database name are deleted but the DDFs files and the data files are not affected If Delete system files is checked the DDFs and data files are deleted You cannot select this option without also selecting Delete database name Caution Depending on the options you have selected deleting a database may erase the related
157. and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the text you want to select c Press and hold down the Shift key then press the cursor arrow keys to move the cursor across the text you want to select To copy text from Text Results tab Perform one of the following actions a Press Control c b Right click on the selected text then click Copy Copied text is placed in the clipboard To cut or delete text from Text Results tab Text must first be selected before you can cut or delete it Text cut is placed in the clipboard and is available for pasting Text deleted is not placed in the clipboard 1 Perform one of the following actions a To cut text right click within the Text Results tab then click Cut or press Control x 6 61 SQL Data Manager 6 62 b To delete text press the Delete key Query Builder Tasks gt To show or hide Query Builder Diagram A database must be open before you can show or hide Query Builder Diagram 1 Click View gt Query Builder Diagram or click 8 These actions function as a toggle That is if Query Builder Diagram is hidden the action shows it and vice versa See also Behavior When Query Builder Diagram Contains No Tables on page 6 12 gt To show or hide Query Builder Grid A database must be open before you can show or hide Query Builder Grid 1 Perform one of the following actions a Click View gt Query Builder Grid b Click EE The
158. appears Figure 2 27 Pervasive ODBC Client DSN Setup Screen Pervasive ODBC Client DSN Setup x Client Data Source Name Cancel Description Pervasive ODBC Client Interface Gh Test r Server Address Options Transport Hint Try TCPIP first then SPX hd Data Source Name Create Madify In the Client section type in a DSN with a maximum length of 32 characters for the data source to which you wish to set up a connection This DSN will help you identify the data source It will be visible only on the current machine Type a description of the data source if desired with a maximum length of 80 characters If you want to enable OEM ANSI conversion click the Options button and make your selection in the dialog box that appears 2 43 Using Pervasive SQL Figure 2 28 Pervasive ODBC Client DSN Options Do not modify the Network settings or TCP IP Port Number unless you have first reviewed the information about these Client DSN options in Advanced Operations Guide 7 Click OK to return to the Pervasive ODBC Client DSN Setup dialog box Figure 2 29 Pervasive ODBC Client DSN Setup Screen 2 Pervasive ODBC Client DSN Setup Pervasive ODBC Client Interface Try TCPIP first then SPX 8 Inthe Server area type in the host name of the computer where the data source resides You can enter a machine name TCP IP address or an IPX SPX MAC address 9 To use a
159. ase directly Up until this point you should use an operating system login For example if you run Monitor or Configuration to work with a remote server engine you are prompted for a password In both Documentation Frequently Asked Questions cases you must supply a user name and password for an operating system account that has administrative permissions on the remote system or an account that is a member of Pervasive_Admin This applies also when you are creating a new database Once you start to work with the data itself then you must supply a database user and password if prompted If database security is turned off then you would never need a database user name or password In this case you would only need an operating system user and password to perform administrative tasks as noted in the preceding paragraph Why do get a log in failed message when I have a Pervasive_Admin group defined or have administrator rights The settings for the Pervasive SQL services can affect whether or not you have permission to log in to the machine where the database engine is running The settings apply whether or not you use a Pervasive_Admin group If you change the Log on as setting for a Pervasive SQL service to This account you must change the user rights policy Act as part of the operating system for the account Otherwise remote log in fails For example both the Monitoring utility and the Configuration utility requ
160. asive SQL V8 MicroKernel which uses a different logging scheme You must use both the v6 15 or earlier engine and its accompanying Roll Forward Utility Refer to your Btrieve v6 15 or earlier documentation for information about logging and instructions about how to roll files forward Starting and Stopping the Server Engine on a Windows Server Starting and Stopping the Database Engine On Windows NT or 2000 Pervasive SQL Server runs as services The services are loaded as part of the installation process and are set to be always available if you followed the Typical installation gt To start the database services on Windows NT or 2000 by using services Click Start Settings Control Panel Do one of the following a On Windows NT double click on the Services icon A dialog box similar to Figure 2 1 displays Figure 2 1 Windows NT Services Dialog Box Services HW Profiles Startup Parameters moo Service Status Startup Pervasive SOL relational Started Automatic Pervasive SOL transactional Started Automatic Start Plug and Play Started Automatic Protected Storage Started Automatic Stop Remote Access Autodial Manager Started Automatic Remote Access Connection Manager Started Manual a Dees Remote Access Server Manual Papin Remote Procedure Call RPC Locator Manual Remote Procedure Call RPC Service Started Automatic Startup Server Started Automatic Help b
161. asive SQL V8 Server engine on the target computer Create a new database using existing DDFs and data files Share the server resource as appropriate Win32 Clients No change DOS Clients If moving to Windows NT replace BREQUEST with BREQNT or BREQTCP If moving to NetWare replace BREQNT or BREQTCP with BREQUEST See also the readdos txt file installed with the database engine When I create a table using an existing Btrieve file the wizard displays fewer columns than there are in the Btrieve file What s wrong Btrieve files contain a limited amount of information about the structure of the file The table creation wizard can figure out some field definitions using the indexes but after the indexes are exhausted data segments may remain that contain more than one actual field The wizard has no way of interpreting the contents You must use your detailed knowledge of the record structure to split out these fields and build a table definition that matches all the fields in the record Miscellaneous Frequently Asked Questions The procedure for this task is provided in Advanced Operations Guide Where can I find information on migration from earlier product versions to Pervasive SQL V8 Where can find migration and compatibility information Getting Started with Pervasive SQL contains an entire chapter that provides detailed instructions on how to upgrade If your application uses Scalable SQL or ODBC then you should re
162. at means that you can delete all but one table from your database with Table Designer One table must be open to enable the Delete Table command and you cannot delete the table that is open You may also delete tables with the Drop Table wizard See Dropping a Table on page 3 20 These steps apply only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application To delete a table within PCC see To delete an existing table from a database on page 3 20 1 Click File Delete Table The Delete Table dialog appears that shows a list of tables 2 Click the table you want to delete 3 Click OK Table Designer Tasks gt To view table data 1 Click Tools View Data or click j The command or the icon starts Pervasive SQL SQL Data Manager For more about SQL Data Manager see SQL Data Manager on page 6 1 To identify insertions or deletions that have not been saved Observe the cells on the grid indicator column The indicator column is the gray leftmost grid column fed fral A blue asterisk in a cell shows information that is marked for addition A red x in a cell shows information that is marked for deletion fe ix To save changes Click File Save or click J If Table Designer is in unlinked mode click OK on the warning message to save changes To discard all changes Reset Click View Reset or click Reset restores the table attributes and table data to the last saved s
163. atabase name is not checked If this box is checked the internal database name as well as the DSN will be deleted and you will have to re create the internal database name Also if you want to save the system files and DDFs make sure the Delete system files is not checked One reason that you may need to preserve these files is because a Btrieve application is accessing them Click Next to display the confirmation screen and then click Finish You will notified of a successful deletion Click Close to exit the Delete Database Wizard 2 53 Using Pervasive SQL 7 Ifyou are simply deleting an unwanted DSN you are finished If you need to re create the DSN you need to select one or more of the following options If you need to do this refer to this section Re create an Engine DSN ona One of Server engine or on a Workgroup engine Setting Up Database Access on Windows on page 2 25 Setting Up Database Access on a NetWare Server on page 2 31 Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server on page 2 37 Re create a Client DSN ona Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 client workstation 2 54 Bound Databases and Enforced Integrity Bound Databases and Enforced Integrity When creating a database you are offered the options of Integrity Enforced and Bound DDFs created Integrity Enforced means it enforces any triggers and referential integrity defined w
164. atements on page 6 57 To stop running SQL statements on page 6 57 To work with grid results on page 6 58 To set Grid Results to allow changes to database data on page 6 58 To set default behavior for Grid Results tab on page 6 59 To delete a row s from Grid Results tab on page 6 59 To work with text results on page 6 61 To clear results from Text Results tab on page 6 61 To select text on Text Results tab on page 6 61 To copy text from Text Results tab on page 6 61 To cut or delete text from Text Results tab on page 6 61 Query Builder Diagram tasks orient you to the use of Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid 6 41 SQL Data Manager 6 42 To show or hide Query Builder Diagram on page 6 62 To show or hide Query Builder Grid on page 6 62 To set query type for Query Builder on page 6 62 To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder on page 6 76 To build an INSERT statement with Query Builder on page 6 79 To build a DELETE statement with Query Builder on page 6 82 To add a table to Query Builder Diagram on page 6 86 To remove a table from Query Builder Diagram on page 6 87 To insert a row into Query Builder Grid on page 6 87 To delete a row s from Query Builder Grid on page 6 88 To delete a row s from Query Builder
165. base permissions to perform these actions The SQL statements that you may use with SQL DM are documented in SQL Engine Reference See SQL Data Manager on page 6 1 for a complete discussion of SQL DM Exporting Importing Data Exporting Importing Data Export and Import Procedures Pervasive SQL provides an ODBC interface which makes it easy to access your data from a large number of third party programs Sometimes data must be made available in other ways or in specific formats To ease the migration of data to and from Pervasive SQL databases Pervasive Control Center PCC includes import and export wizards The Import Export wizards in PCC support two different data formats which can be read and written The formats are shown in Table 3 5 Table 3 5 Import Export Wizards Data Formats File Format Description Standard Data Format Data is represented as standard ASCII OEM or Unicode characters Commas separate the columns By default the quote character is used to enclose columns and carriage return line feed is used to separate records The column separator and record separator characters are configurable Unformatted MicroKernel The wizard does not convert the data to ASCII Binary columns remain in binary format Each record is preceded by its length in bytes and is followed by a comma delimiter A carriage return line feed terminates each record An empty string is designated in export
166. bles such as the first time you show Query Builder Diagram for a particular session of SQL DM the following occurs 1 Query Builder Diagram appears 2 Query Builder Grid appears 3 The Add Table dialog appears Actions 2 and 3 occur as a convenience Query Builder Diagram works in tandem with Query Builder Grid The Grid lets you further specify the conditions that create the SQL statement Query Builder Diagram also requires tables so it makes sense to let you select the initial tables with which you want to work If Query Builder Diagram contains one or more tables Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid must be shown or hidden independently See To show or hide Query Builder Diagram on page 6 62 and To show or hide Query Builder Grid on page 6 62 The following image shows what occurs if you show Query Builder Diagram for the sample database DEMODATA and Query Builder Diagram contains no tables SQL Data Manager Concepts The Add Table dialog appears Query Builder Diagram appears Query Builder Grid appears showing the grid for a SELECT statement Query Pane appears Grid Results tab is active Figure 6 7 Results of Showing Query Builder Diagram Containing No Tables Elle Edit View Tools Help De te eels A Se i gt we eo Add Table Grid Results OVA Rows Fetched 0 Query Builder Diagram allows you to create an inner join bet
167. bs a sha ee 4 ae ge ae oh bse oars Wee 4 eh GOR bo Ae aes 6 4 Grid Results Tabbed Dialog 2 2 0 ee ee ees 6 5 Scroll Box Tool Tip Indicating Row at Top of Grid 2 2 ee 6 7 Text Result Tabi View y inu a a e Bey bb die te are gee Gace SG 6 8 Query Builder Diagram with Tables Class and Faculty 6 11 Results of Showing Query Builder Diagram Containing No Tables 6 13 Example of Join Line Between Columns 2 0000000 6 14 SQL Data Manager Main Window gt so sesar ierices eee eee eee 6 17 Query Builder Grid for SELECT Statements 2 000 6 32 Query Builder Grid for UPDATE Statements 000 6 35 Query Builder Grid for INSERT Statements 2000 6 37 Query Builder Grid for DELETE Statement 000 6 38 PSA Man Dialog erur ea Sahni be BUS wa ee ak wt ee Dae Gee ele 7 12 View Modules Section of PSA eee en 7 21 View Modules Results 4 00 6 80 6 aie ew ae PE RES ee Se ee aes 7 23 Multiple Occurrences of a Component Found 00 7 24 Sorting Multiple Occurrences ofa Component 000 7 24 Selecting the Machine on which to Runa Network Test 0 00 7 25 Selecting Protocols for Network Tests 2 0 ee ee ee ee 7 26 Selecting Number of Stress Test Messages 6 ee ee 7 26 Successful Network Test Screen 2 ee 7 26 Specifying the PSA Log File Name and Location 000 7 28 Searching for PSA Log
168. cases you may wish to import only some of the columns in a table into a new table Using an example this procedure explains how to do it 1 First assume we are starting with an export table that was created with the following statement CREATE TABLE Customer FirstName char 10 LastName char 10 Telephone char 12 AmtOwed currency Next assume that the following statements were executed to insert sample data INSERT INTO Customer VALUES Alexi Pruneda 512 264 9999 1200 69 INSERT INTO Customer VALUES Matte Pruneda 512 264 9999 9999 69 2 Now assume the import table was created with the following statement CREATE TABLE phonelist FirstName char 10 LastName char 10 i Telephone char 12 Notice that this table does not have all the columns of the original one 3 Using the following query in the Export Wizard export the data from the original table into an export file named cust sdf SELECT FROM Customer 3 39 Using the Pervasive Control Center 3 40 Note that the export file contains four columns Alexi Pruneda 512 264 9999 1200 69 Matt Pruneda 512 264 9999 9999 69 4 Using the Import Wizard import the data from the SDF file into the new table a To start the Import Wizard from PCC select the Tools menu and choose Wizards Import Data b In the Import Wizard in the box labelle
169. ce Main Window 5 8 This section describes the objects on the Table Designer graphical user interface GUI Main Window Columns Tab Indexes Tab Statistics Tab Btrieve Tab The following image shows the main window of the GUI The image shows all icons that may appear on the window not all icons appear for each tabbed work area The table below the image describes the GUI objects Table Designer GUI Visual Reference Figure 5 3 Table Designer Main Window Pervasive Table Designer DOCLAB2 DEMODATA Billing Ele Edit View Tools Help SLRS ae eas 2 Columns Indexes Statistics Btrieve 47 bytes UNLINKED MODE GUI Object Description Related Information Title Bar Shows the following information name of the utility name of the computer on which the database resides if Table Designer started from PCC name of the open database name of the open table For example in Figure 5 3 table Billing in database DEMODATA on machine DOCLAB2 File menu Provides the following commands Save Reset Open Table Open Database Create Table Create Database Delete Table Delete Database Exit Save command or LA icon Saves the Table Designer information to catalog files To save changes on page 5 37 5 9 Table Designer 5 10 GUI Object Description Related Information
170. ch are stored on data pages The MicroKernel uses the threshold to determine whether to add data to an existing variable page or to create a new one A higher free space threshold reduces fragmentation of variable length records across several pages but uses more disk space File Attributes in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide Btrieve Tab Table Designer GUI Visual Reference GUI Object Description Related Information Uses Alternate Shows whether the table uses Alternate Collating Collating an alternate collating Sequences in Sequence sequence for sorting Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide System Shows whether the data file System Data in Data Key has system data keys Pervasive SQL enabled Programmer s Guide Value Shows the value for each To display table parameter information on page 5 54 The following image shows the Btrieve tab of the GUI The table below the image describes the GUI objects The menu items and icons are explained in Main Window on page 5 8 Note that this tab appears only when Table Designer is in unlinked mode Figure 5 7 Btrieve Tab Pervasive Table Designer File Edit View Tools Help Bao RJ ARIT Column name Type Size Position Decimal Null Case 5 25 Table Designer 5 26 GUI Object Description Related Information Column Name Specifies the alpha numeric name for the column T
171. ch the column is page 6 14 associated To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder on page 6 76 New Value Specifies the value used to Query Builder Grid on replace update a value in an existing column page 6 14 To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder on page 6 76 6 35 SQL Data Manager Query Builder Statements 6 36 GUI Object Description Related Information Criteria Specifies a search condition for the associated column The default operator is equals Text literals are automatically single quoted when you move from the Criteria cell The criteria specifies the data that you want to change The following operators are recognized as search criteria for a value BETWEEN expression AND expression NOT BETWEEN expression AND expression IN NOT IN IS NULL IS NOT NULL LIKE NOT LIKE equals lt less than gt greater than lt less than or equal to gt greater than or equal to lt gt not equal to Query Builder Grid on page 6 14 To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder on page 6 76 Specifies an additional search condition linked to the previous criteria by a logical OR Note The grid does not contain a column for a logical AND The task To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder explains how to construct a logical AND Query Builder Grid on page 6 14
172. ck Delete Row s or press the Delete key The indicator column is the leftmost column in the grid gt To add a Group By column to Query Builder Grid See steps 25 through 27 in To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 for an example of adding a Group By column 6 88 chapter Pervasive System Analyzer _ PSA Usage Help for the Diagnostic Utility in Pervasive SQL V8 Pervasive System Analyzer is a utility that performs many functions that include m Analysis and display of Pervasive SQL components Archival restoration and deletion of Pervasive SQL components Testing of network connectivity and of the functionality of the transactional and relational engines The following are the sections found in this chapter m PSA Concepts on page 7 2 a PSA GUI Visual Reference on page 7 12 m PSA Tasks on page 7 15 7 1 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA PSA Concepts PSA Functional Overview The Pervasive System Analyzer PSA runs automatically as the first phase of installation in order to optimize your system for installation of the newest version Pervasive SQL V8 You may also run PSA at any time to analyze your system archive Pervasive components restore previously archived Pervasive components delete Pervasive components and settings or delete Pervasive archives PSA performs the following tasks m Analyzes your system to see if you have
173. ction to NetWare or Linux database server engines Table 1 2 Summary of Pervasive SQL Utilities Runs on these Server or Utility name platforms Description Workgroup Pervasive Win32 Utilities warehouse for All Control Center Pervasive SQL Lists engines and databases available Configuration Win32 Manipulates settings for All Pervasive client and server components Monitor Win32 Monitors server engine All activity Useful for database administration and programming diagnostics Function Win16 Executes Btrieve operations All Executor Win32 enabling you to learn how the Btrieve interface operates on data files Pervasive SQL Linux Performs common Linux Windows Maintenance Win32 Pervasive SQL file and data and NetWare and manipulations such as servers NetWare importing and exporting data All 32 bit Windows workstations for GUI version SQL Data Win32 Allows you to execute SQL All local Manager statements interactively Server remote Table Designer Win32 Allows you to add delete or All local change the characteristics of columns within a table and to create a database or a table Server remote 1 15 Introducing Pervasive SQL 1 16 Table 1 2 Summary of Pervasive SQL Utilities Runs on these Server or Utility name platforms Description Workgroup Rebuild Win16 Converts one version of Windows and Win32 MicroKernel files into another
174. cumented in SQL Engine Reference SQL DM includes a graphical user interface GUI that runs only on Windows 32 bit platforms You may start the GUI as a stand alone application or from within Pervasive Control Center PCC y Caution Backup all your data definition files DDFs and data files before you perform functions through SQL DM This tool gives you the ability to modify your database table definitions and data You could inadvertently change your files in an irreversible manner Full recovery is possible if you have performed a backup SQL DM contains four primary work areas see Figure 6 1 m Query Builder Diagram Query Builder Grid Query Pane m Results tabs This section discusses the primary areas in detail See SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference on page 6 16 to identify other objects in the GUI such as menu commands toolbar icons and so forth 6 2 Restrictions SQL Data Manager Concepts Figure 6 1 Primary Areas of SQL DM Graphical User Interface oog Query Pane Grid Results The following actions and SQL statements are not supported in SQL DM m Creating a database m Use of dynamic parameters indicated by a question mark a COMMIT and START TRANSACTION m SET SECURITY SQL Data Manager Results Tabs SQL DM contains two tabbed views that are used to display the results of running SQL statements m Grid Results m
175. d 2 45 8 20 mkded 8 22 Mkded console mode 8 25 mkded daemon mode 8 24 sqlmgr 8 26 sqlmgr btiini 2 37 2 38 8 26 sqlmgr console mode 8 28 sqlmgr daemon mode 8 27 sqlmgr odbc ini 2 38 8 27 Load balancing 9 16 Loading database engine 2 2 NSS volumes before BSTART MGRSTART 2 8 Local defined 1 7 Location changing for table data file 5 53 Log on authority for service 2 13 Log on failed troubleshooting 9 17 Logical AND creating with Query Builder 6 67 Index 7 Login OS vs DB 9 16 Lowest total cost of ownership 1 10 M Manual pages 8 4 Map Root not supported 9 19 Maximum users for workgroup engine 9 18 MGRSTART loading NSS volumes first 2 8 MicroKernel Database Engine defined 1 3 starting and stopping Linux 2 9 NetWare 2 8 Microsoft Access accessing Pervasive SQL data using 2 48 limited to 256 columns 2 50 Excel accessing Pervasive SQL data using 2 46 Migrating NetWare to Windows server 9 28 where to find information 9 29 Windows server to NetWare 9 28 Mirroring database 9 31 MKDE See MicroKernel Database Engine Mkded utility 8 22 console mode 8 25 daemon mode 8 24 Modifying data 3 32 table properties 3 29 See Table Designer Monitor O S rights required 9 4 Multiple processors use of 9 29 N Name field in Create Database Wizard 2 27 Named databases 2 22 Namespace defined 3 2 8 Index Naming databases dbmaint utility 2 37 from a Linux server 2 37 NetWare btrieve nlm and SQL engine 9 27 lo
176. d File path to import select cust sdf the file that you used to export the values Then click Next Choose Use SQL statement for import a d In the query window type this query INSERT INTO phonelist FirstName LastName Telephone VALUES The named fields must be in the same order as the fields listed in the cust sprf file The named fields do not need to be in the same order as they exist in your destination table You can move the column names in the INSERT statement around as necessary to correspond properly with the fields in the SDF file Click Next You should get immediate feedback that the records were imported Note that the fourth data column in the SDF file is ignored oO Notes The import process can exclude any number of fields at the end of each record but it cannot exclude any fields at the beginning or middle of a record As in the example above the SDF file contained 4 fields but we imported only the first 3 by including only 3 question marks in the VALUES clause You may not exclude beginning or middle values from the SDF file as in VALUES OF VALUES These syntax forms generate error messages If you need to achieve this effect then you should use a SELECT statement during your export process to generate an SDF file that contains only the columns you want to import into your other table The process is simpler if you are exporting and importing the sam
177. d drive path Browsing for the location only works if you are seated at the server or you are browsing a local directory tree that is identical to the directory tree on the server Workgroup engine users may enter a full path name on a local hard drive or a mapped drive or UNC name Click OK to close the Create Database Name window This returns you to the Create Database Wizard 14 Click Next and go to step 10 2 30 Setting Up Database Access on a NetWare Server Setting Up Database Access on a NetWare Server gt To Set Up Database Access on a NetWare Server from a Client Workstation Note This scenario is the only option for NetWare You must create both the Client and the Engine DSNs from the client workstation using PCC or ODBC Administrator If you have not done so already please review Prerequisites to Setting up Database Access on page 2 24 before proceeding 1 Open Pervasive Control Center PCC Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt Control Center The PCC Namespace contains a list of database engines that have been registered 2 Double click on Pervasive SQL Engines The PCC Namespace contains a list of database engines that have been registered You must register the remote NetWare server with PCC To do so right click on Pervasive SQL Engines then click Register New Engine Figure 2 14 Registering a New Engine fa Peryasive SQL Control Center Action View Tools Help e gt a
178. d for UPDATE statements 6 35 grids specific to SQL statement types 6 14 Query Builder Grid GUI reference for DELETE 6 37 Column 6 38 Criteria 6 39 Or 6 39 Table 6 38 Query Builder Grid GUI reference for INSERT 6 36 Column 6 37 New Value 6 37 Query Builder Grid GUI reference for SELECT 6 32 Alias 6 32 Column 6 32 Criteria 6 34 Group by 6 33 Or 6 34 12 Index Order by 6 33 Result 6 32 Table 6 32 Query Builder Grid GUI reference for UPDATE 6 35 Column 6 35 Criteria 6 36 New Value 6 35 Or 6 36 Table 6 35 Query Pane 6 8 cursor movement within 6 9 records fetched indicator 6 6 restrictions 6 3 results tabs 6 4 Grid Results tab 6 4 6 5 scrolling 6 6 states of Grid Results 6 5 Text Results tab 6 7 SQL statements to use with 6 15 SUM aggregate function 6 33 tasks adda Group By column to Query Builder Grid 6 88 add a table to Query Builder Diagram 6 86 build a DELETE statement with Query Builder 6 82 build a SELECT statement with Query Builder 6 63 build an INSERT statement with Query Builder 6 79 build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder 6 76 cancel undo typing actions in Query Pane 6 53 cancel an undo action redo in Query Pane 6 53 change data with Grid Results grid 6 45 clear results from Text Results tab 6 61 clear the contents of a row s on Query Builder Grid 6 87 close a database 6 45 continue running SQL statements that were stopped 6 57 copy text from Grid Results tab 6 60 copy text from Query Pane
179. d of to dev console or the system log While the Pervasive SQL database server is running the butil Maintenance Utility can be executed to perform a variety of common file and data manipulation operations For example run butil ver to print information on the Pervasive SQL version that is currently running Synopsis mkded start stop console help Options The options described below are supported by mkded These options are case insensitive start Runs the Pervasive SQL database server as a daemon process stop Terminates execution of Pervasive SQL engine that was previously started in daemon mode with the start command line argument Available Utilities console Runs the Pervasive SQL database server in console mode When Pervasive SQL is started in console mode a gt gt prompt will be displayed allowing you to enter interactive commands The following commands are supported within console mode status prints client and file engine status quit exits the MKDE process displays help information help Provides an informative message on options to the mkded command Configuration Pervasive SQL for Linux uses a bti ini file to obtain MKDE configuration parameters On startup the MKDE determines the location of this file as follows 1 Ifthe BTIINI environment variable is defined then look for bti ini in the directory specified by this environment variable 2 If 1 does not apply then loo
180. data files and data dictionaries from your hard drive Do not delete a database unless you are certain you want to do so Click Next To delete the database click Finish To quit without deleting the database click Cancel Figure 3 9 Completing Drop Database Wizard Dialog Box Completing Delete Database Wizard You have successfully completed the steps required to delete the database The details about the database to be deleted are specified below The database demodata and its system files will be deleted 4 After you click Finish the wizard displays a final dialog box not shown that indicates success Click Close At this point the database should disappear from the PCC Namespace You may need to refresh the screen in the PCC to view this change To do this go to the toolbar click Action then Refresh Adding a Table Adding a Table Tables are the objects in which databases store data PCC s Create Table Wizard enables you to easily add and remove tables from any existing database You may also add a table with Table Designer See Table Designer on page 5 1 y Note To create a table in a database database security must be turned off or you must have access rights to create tables Caution Itis highly recommended that you backup all your DDFs and data files before you perform functions through Table Designer That tool lets you modify your database schema and data If you inadvertently set th
181. database operations that are common to most Btrieve applications If your machine passes this test then the following is verified m Your Pervasive SQL transactional engine is running Your client interface components are installed correctly The network communication between the client and the server is functioning correctly Btrieve applications running on your computer should function correctly Relational Engine This test runs a series of relational interface operations to simulate your requester performing actual SQL database work A dialog box displays during the tests to show progress This test verifies the ability of your client interface to connect to the Pervasive SQL relational engine SRDE When you run this test PSA attempts to perform common SQL database operations If your machine passes this test then the following is verified m Your Pervasive SQL relational engine is running Your client interface components are installed correctly The network communication between the client and the server is functioning correctly SQL applications running on your computer should function correctly Frequently Asked Questions PSA Concepts Listed below are some frequently asked questions about using PSA gt gt gt Q Where is the PSA readme located page 7 7 Q What is the default log file name page 7 7 Q Can use a different log fil
182. ded you have the proper table permissions By default SQL DM starts with the Grid Results grid active See also To set default behavior for Grid Results tab on page 6 59 Click Tools Active Grid A checkmark beside the Active Grid command indicates that the grid is active In addition an indicator column appears as the leftmost column in the grid 4 Grid Results The indicator column contains no column label SQL Data Manager Tasks gt To set default behavior for Grid Results tab 3 Note A grid that allows changes to database data is referred to as active This means that if you change data in one of the grid cells you change the data in your database provided you have the proper table permissions By default SQL DM starts with the Grid Results grid active See also To set default behavior for Grid Results tab on page 6 59 Click Tools Properties Click the option Active grid mode on startup to set or clear the default behavior A checkmark beside the option indicates that the grid will be active each time SQL DM is started Click OK gt To delete a row s from Grid Results tab Note that the delete action has no undo The grid must be active to allow deletion of rows See To set Grid Results to allow changes to database data on page 6 58 1 Right click on the row the record that you want to delete then click Delete Row s You may also sel
183. deleted records recovered or reused Yes space from deleted records is re used on subsequent inserts Space in files is never de allocated back to disk If index balancing is turned on then unused space in index pages is also re used See Converting MicroKernel Data Files on page 15 6 in Advanced Operations Guide for information about using the Rebuild utility Frequently Asked Questions Is database shadowing available allowing a complete up to date second copy of the database to exist on another drive or machine Pervasive SQL does not contain specific functionality for this but many customers have successfully used hardware mirrored drive arrays and solutions like Vinca s now acquired by Legato Standby Server to provide this functionality Pervasive SQL 2000i SP3 and later supports Pervasive s data replication product Pervasive DataExchange Pervasive DataExchange can be used to synchronize all or part of two or more databases What is the mechanism that allows the database to be backed up online What happens if the server goes down in the middle of a backup with many open transactions Continuous Operations allows you to put a set of data files in a special safe mode so that they can be safely backed up while in use While data files are in Continuous Operations mode they are not modified and special delta files store the results of any database operations After the backup is complete the data files must b
184. der to verify that your client or workstation can communicate with network protocols to reach the machine on which your Pervasive SQL server is installed To run this test specify a machine name or IP address where a Pervasive SQL engine is running Using the Advanced Settings screen you can select the protocols you would like to test as well as the number of stress test messages to send By default the network test connects using any available protocol that is installed on the system and configured for use in Pervasive SQL by way of the Supported Protocols configuration parameter found on page 4 8 in Advanced Operations Guide The default number of stress test messages is 75 See To specify advanced settings for network test on page 7 25 for more information The progress bar will complete for all selected tests If you are running this test as part of installation and the test completely fails then the install is aborted The steps involved in testing network communication are 1 Verify Available Protocols Pervasive System Analyzer PSA Verify Network Client Availability Qualify Target Name Resolve Target Location to network address Verify Server Address Verify Server Connection N OO FF WO KN Run Stress Test Transactional Engine This test verifies the ability of your client interface to connect to the Pervasive SQL transactional engine Btrieve When you run this test PSA attempts to perform basic
185. describes the GUI objects License Administrator Utility DOCLAB2 m Computer Name Connect Select Engine rm License Key ff fa cen Key m Applied Licenses Remove License Refresh Help 4 5 License Administrator 4 6 GUI Object Description Related Information Title Bar Shows the name of the utility and the name of the computer that License Administrator is accessing By default the computer name is the local computer to which you are currently logged in Computer Name By default shows the name of the computer that the License Administrator is accessing This object is also an entry field into which you may type the name of a computer If you have typed in a computer name but not clicked Connect or pressed Enter the field could contain a computer name that differs from the one in the title bar The title bar always shows the computer that License Administrator is accessing The Computer Name field may also be populated if you click Select Engine and choose a computer To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 Connect Establishes communication between License Administrator and the computer listed in the Computer Name field To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 Select Engine Allows you to choose a computer on which to administer licenses To Select a Computer for
186. e number of fields to and from the SDF standard data format files Exporting Importing Data Then the SQL queries are not necessary and you can choose to export and import the full table If the export and import tables are part of the same database importing can also be done using SQL queries The following example would achieve the same results as the steps listed above INSERT INTO phonelist FirstName LastName Telephone SELECT FirstName LastName Telephone FROM Customer 3 41 Using the Pervasive Control Center Checking Consistency and Referential Integrity Checking the consistency and the integrity ofa file and displaying the constraints on a file is a simple process using the Check Database wizard in PCC Using this wizard you can perform a consistency test a referential integrity RI test or an index consistency test A consistency test checks logical and physical consistency of the selected database including table and indexes a referential integrity test checks referential integrity constraints applied to the selected database To perform the tests you must be logged into the database using its data source name If you are performing the RI test your database must be named stored on the same server as the SRDE and have referential constraints defined whether or not RI is enabled Listing gt To produce a report that lists all foreign key Referential definitions and related information
187. e removed from Continuous Operations mode at which time the changes stored in the delta files are rolled into the live files If the server goes down while files are in continuous operations mode the next time the data file is accessed the database engine detects the existing delta file and rolls in the changes at that time You can put data files into Continuous Operations mode by using the BUTIL STARTBU command or Maintenance utility described in Advanced Operations Guide 9 31 Basic Troubleshooting 9 32 Pervasive SQL Resources and Contacts chapter A Guide to Pervasive SQL Customer Information Resources Pervasive Software strives to ensure that your experience with Pervasive SQL is successful This chapter describes the resources and information available to you as a valued customer of Pervasive Software The following variety of resources can help you get answers to your questions troubleshoot problems and interact with the Pervasive team as well as with other customers Printed Documentation on page 10 2 Developer Center on page 10 3 Pervasive SQL Knowledge Base on page 10 4 FTP Site on page 10 5 Online Documentation on page 10 6 Webinars on page 10 7 Subscription Based E mail Services on page 10 8 DevTalk on page 10 9 Newsgroup on page 10 10 E Mail Contacts on page 10 11 Technical Support on page 10 12 10 1 Pervasive S
188. e you must specify a full path not a mapped drive that makes sense on the server Optionally you may use UNC paths For NetWare systems use the following path server voll1 path For Linux systems when Samba is not used use the following path server SPVSWS path on Linux from root dir For Windows or Linux systems with Samba use the following path server sharename path Optionally you may check the Use advanced settings box to specify more details on how the new database should be created or if you want to create DDFs for existing data files If this option is selected an additional dialog box appears later This option is not required for most database creation tasks For instructions on using the advanced settings see Advanced settings procedure on page 2 28 Click Next when done Now that all of the required information has been gathered the Create Database Wizard presents a screen indicating the actions it is about to take This screen allows you to confirm the settings before they are committed to the engine Click Finish 3 11 Using the Pervasive Control Center Figure 3 7 Create Database Wizard Complete Dialog Box Completing Create Database Wizard You have successfully completed the steps required to create a new database The new database will be created as defined below Database name dz_test Linked to intemal database name dztest Data Source interface type Engine
189. e Also mkded 1 butil 1 Notes To administer the engine from a remote workstation you must supply a user name and password Upon initial installation of Pervasive SQL V8 the supplied default is admin with an empty password Use btadmin to add more administrators btadmin p password a username This utility creates a record in btpasswd for user username with password password if option p is not used then you will be asked Available Utilities to enter a password If a user already exists then his password is changed as specified By default a user is created without administration permissions You can use the a option to give administration rights to the user You can remove this right by using a To remove a user record from the password file enter btadmin r username Every time the btpasswad file is changed the previous version is backed up to btpasswd Linux Supplementary Documentation butil Description The Pervasive SQL Maintenance Utility or but il isa command line utility that performs command file and data manipulations on a MKDE file The maintenance utility performs the following file and data manipulations Starts and stops continuous operations for use in performing server backups m Recovers changes made to a file between the time of the last backup and a system failure Imports and exports ASCII unformatted and SDF sequential data Copies data between data fil
190. e MyTable If you save changes in instance A you must perform a reset in instance B to see those changes Reset causes all of the displayed properties to revert to their last saved values gt To identify open database and table 1 Observe the Table Designer title bar The title bar shows the name of the open database and the name of the open table If Table Designer was started from PCC the title bar also shows the machine on which the database resides 5 31 Table Designer 5 32 For example the following image shows that Billing is the open table DEMODATA is the open database and DOCLAB2 is the machine on which DEMODATA resides Pervasive Table Designer DOCLAB2 DEMODATA Billing Eile Edt View Tools Help gt To work with columns Ensure that Table Designer is in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click View gt Columns or click the Columns tab gt To work with indexes When Table Designer is in unlinked mode index changes affect only the data definition files See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click View gt Indexes or click the Indexes tab gt To display table statistics 1 Click View gt Table Statistics or click the Statistics tab gt To work with Btrieve data Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click View gt Btrieve Data or click the Btrieve tab
191. e SQL Server engine includes a temporary trial license that allocates a fixed user count The trial license expires within a specified period and cannot be deleted The Pervasive SQL Workgroup engine includes a license set to five concurrent users The license for the Workgroup engine cannot be deleted Please contact Pervasive Software or your application vendor to purchase an additional user count Applying a User Count You increase the user count by applying a license key A user count is applied immediately when you use the GUI or the CLI Pervasive SQL 2000i and prior releases use a different type of license License Administrator automatically detects the database engine version to which you want to apply a license For Pervasive SQL 2000i and prior releases you must use the legacy utility User Count Administrator to work with the older license type User Count Administrator is installed as part of the prior release s database engine Refer to the Pervasive SQL documentation of the prior release for instructions on how to use User Count Administrator Pervasive SQL documentation is located on the Web at http www pervasive com support technical online_manuals asp License Administrator GUI Visual Reference License Administrator GUI Visual Reference GUI Dialog This section describes the objects on the License Administrator graphical user interface GUI The following image shows the GUI The table below the image
192. e does not support mapping a drive letter using the Map Root under Novell or using Redirected mapping under Microsoft or using the hidden Admin share C under Windows NT 2000 Make sure that users have appropriate operating system login credentials to access the file server Run Pervasive System Analyzer and choose the Network Communications Test to be sure that you have proper connectivity Basic Troubleshooting 9 20 I am using SQL queries to create a definition for an old table The resulting record size is off Why Starting with Pervasive SQL 2000 fields that allow null values have an additional byte defined at the start of the field This byte is the null indicator byte You can work around this in one of two ways If you are using SQL statements to create a new table definition enter the statement SET TRUENULLCREATE OFF For the remainder of your current session any tables that you create will use the old record structure without the extra byte for each nullable column If you do not wish to use SQL statements you can get the field sizes to align properly by creating all columns as not nullable want to convert my data file version from 8 back to file format version 7 6 or 5 How do do this If the files you wish to convert are serviced by a remote Server or Workgroup engine you must have Administrator permissions on the remote system in order to perform these tasks You must also have a network drive mapped t
193. e grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell ifa b A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click in the Collate grid cell Table Designer Tasks You can set an alternating collating sequence ACS only for applicable data types If collating sequence is not applicable you will be unable to position the cursor in the Collate grid cell Delete the existing value if present use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete Type the path and ACS file name you want Pervasive SQL supplies an ACS file upper alt in the Samples folder To use this file you would type c pvsw samples upper alt Upper alt treats upper and lower case letters the same for sorting For example if a database has values abc ABC DEF and Def inserted in that order the sorting with upper alt returns as abc ABC DEF and Def The values abc and ABC and the values DEF and Def are considered duplicates and are returned in the order in which they were inserted Normal ASCII sorting sequences upper case letters before lower case such that the sorting would return as ABC DEF Def abc gt To set a column default This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell ieia B A
194. e keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired statement gt To move the cursor within Query Pane and run the SQL statement to which it moves The statement indicator the yellow arrow gt in the left margin of Query Pane indicates the statement in which the cursor is located A statement delimiter is used to separate statements See To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 1 Perform one of the following actions to move the cursor in Query Pane a Click W4 to move the cursor to the first statement and run that statement b Click 44 to move the cursor to the previous statement and run that statement c Click p gt to move the cursor to the next statement and run that statement d Click PH to move the cursor to the last statement and run that statement Note SQL DM shows the appropriate results tab as you move through the statements Only SELECT statements send results to the Grid Results tab you may also send SELECT results to the Text Results tab All other statements send results to the Text Results tab For example suppose you have the following lines in Query Pane SELECT FROM Person SELECT FROM Faculty DELETE FROM Person WHERE Person ID 104321686 SELECT FROM Class SQL Data Manager Tasks Assume that the cursor is located on the first line and you click to move to the next line which contains a SELECT statement The results show on the Grid Results tab You click I
195. e name page 7 8 Q What is the local default location for the log file page 7 8 Q What is the remote default location for the log file page 7 8 Q What kind of information is contained in the log file page 7 8 Q What happens to the information in the log file each time the utility is run page 7 8 2 Does PSA detect itself page 7 8 How do run PSA page 7 9 When would want to use PSA page 7 9 Does PSA archive itself page 7 10 Does PSA detect archive or delete my Pervasive Tango page 7 10 Q Q Q Q Q What does components mean page 7 10 Q What is an archive page 7 10 Q What is a backup directory page 7 10 Q Is a backup directory the same as an archive directory page 7 10 Q What is the difference between a local machine and a remote NetWare volume page 7 11 Q If select to remove Pervasive components from my remote NetWare volume what happens to the files on my local machine page 7 11 Where is the PSA readme located The PSA readme file is named readpsa txt and it is located in lt OSdrive gt Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software Shared PSA where lt OSdrive gt is the drive letter where your operating system is installed What is the default log file name The default file name for the log file is PSALog txt 7 7 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA 7 8 Can use a different log file name You can rename the file but because in
196. e options incorrectly or enter incorrect data you could change your files in an irreversible manner Full recovery will be possible if you have performed a backup To create a new table within a database Click on the Tables Namespace node beneath the database in which the new table is to be created Right click on the background in the table list in the right pane of the Control Center window or right click on the Tables icon underneath a given database icon Select New Table from the shortcut menu The following dialog box appears Figure 3 10 Create Table Wizard Dialog Box What do you want to name your table Table name New Table I Use advanced settings Enter the name of the new table Click Next when done Using the Pervasive Control Center 3 16 For advanced users only you may select the Use advanced settings box in order to create a table definition for an existing Btrieve file The steps to use this advanced option are described in Advanced Operations Guide Adding Relational Access to Btrieve Files on page 13 1 4 The columns that are to appear in the new table must now be defined The following dialog box presents a grid display in which columns may be defined Figure 3 11 Create Table Wizard Designer View Dialog Box wu Column definition rn dh A Column name Data type Precision Scale Case Null M a a Create Table Wizard Design Buttons Use the design buttons locat
197. e or click J The save action adds the column gt To change column order Inserting deleting or moving a column on the Columns tab changes the database The database is rebuilt when you save the Table Designer information This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell id 2 br A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected 2 Specify where to move the column a Click Edit Move Up or click to move the column up one grid row Table Designer Tasks b Click Edit Move Down or click to move the column down one grid row gt To delete a column Data is removed from your database if you delete a column The database is rebuilt when you save the Table Designer information This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell isfra b A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click Edit Delete Column or click F gt A red x appears in the gray leftmost grid cell X The x indicates that the column is marked for deletion The column is not deleted until you save the table informatio
198. e to iv ID O First_Nane Last_Name _ Perm_Street All columns 5 33 Drag the ID column to the Faculty ID column J All columns MIR M Degs _Name esignation _ Building_Name C Room_Number _ Rsch_Grant_Amount 6 74 SQL Data Manager Tasks 34 Release the mouse button A join line appears between the two tables _ Building_Name _ Room_Number _ Rsch_Grant_Amount Notice that the JOIN syntax is not used in the SQL statement Instead a WHERE clause is added SELECT Person ID Person First_Name Person Last_Name Faculty ID Faculty Dept_Name Faculty Salary FROM Person Faculty WHERE Person ID Faculty ID 35 Click Tools Query gt Run Current SQL Statement in Grid or click The statement returns 95 records Your manager arrives and reviews the results Your manager tells you to remove the salary information because it is not needed How do you do this 36 In Query Builder Grid click on the Result option for Faculty Salary This action removes the X from the option and also removes the Salary part from the selection list in the SQL statement Column Alias Table Order by Criteria or or F Person D Person Person FirstName Person ie Person Last_Name Person pg Facuty D Faculty Z Faculty Dep
199. eate Database or click Create on the Open Database dialog The Create Database dialog appears Create Database xi Database Name Database Directory fal Cancel 2 Type a name for the database in the Database Name field The name must be unique An error occurs if the database name already exists 3 Type a directory location for the database in the Database Directory field Alternately you may click the browse button _ navigate to a directory location click the location then click OK Table Designer Tasks 4 Click OK The Open Database dialog appears that shows a list of databases oa Click the desired database to open if it is not already selected 6 Click OK The Open Table dialog appears that shows a list of database tables The list is empty unless you specified a directory location that already contains Pervasive SQL database tables If the directory already contains tables those table names appear in the list 7 Ifthe list of tables contains names click the desired table You may click Create to create a new table 8 Click OK Table Designer creates the database If a table was selected in step 7 the table is also opened Y Note When you create a database with Table Designer a pvs file is created in the same directory location as you specified in step 3 See PVS File on page 5 7 for more information gt To delete a database You cannot delete the current database
200. eated a DSN I cannot open the files using ODBC What s wrong If Btrieve files have owner names on them you must use database security for ODBC access Turn on database security in PCC by following these steps right click on the database name choose Properties and click on the Security tab In the screen that appears enter and confirm the master user password x Caution Do not forget the Master user password You cannot turn off security or perform administrative tasks within the database without it You may want to make a backup copy of your DDFs before turning security on in case you forget the password Next you must grant the Master user access to the data files that have owner names defined You can grant the access by issuing this SQL statement for each table that has an owner name GRANT ALL ON my_table ownername TO Master When you enter the statement substitute the actual name of your table and the appropriate owner name for that table as indicated above Remember that each data file corresponds to an ODBC table If you don t know which table corresponds to which data file use 9 25 Basic Troubleshooting 9 26 PCC to find out right click on the table in PCC and choose Tasks Edit Table Design In the Table Designer click on the Statistics tab The Table Location field shows you the file that is referenced by that table definition If security is important then you must create users and as
201. ecent previous release This book provides summary information on new features and directs you to the locations in the documentation where the new features are fully discussed Pervasive SQL User s Guide introduces Pervasive SQL and describes common user tasks The guide discusses the database engine Pervasive SQL utilities and other key components the differences between Server and Workgroup engines and the differences between ODBC and Btrieve access User s Guide provides you with the basics to work with Pervasive SQL successfully Advanced Operations Guide provides detailed information at the administrative level including the steps to perform common procedures and several new ones Topics include m checking database consistency performing periodic backups configuring network protocols and understanding network topologies working with database security m basic configuration guidelines configuration options reference m moving renaming compacting and rebuilding files SQL Engine Reference gives database programmers a complete reference guide to the SQL relational database language It also covers SQL engine parameters and limitations Status Codes and Messages documents all possible status codes and numbered messages that can be received when using Pervasive software The Status Codes and Messages Quick Reference card is also included with your complete documentation set Pervasive Products and Services pro
202. ect and delete multiple rows To select multiple rows press and hold down the Shift or Control key then click the indicator column for the desired rows Once the desired rows are selected right click and click Delete Row s The indicator column is the leftmost column in the grid Grid Results Once a row s is selected you may also press the Delete key to delete the row s 6 59 SQL Data Manager 6 60 Note that you cannot delete a row that contains invalid values in one or more grid columns For example assume that you want to delete a record from the Person table provided with the sample database DEMODATA You run a SELECT FROM person statement in Query Pane You click on an ID cell in the grid and remove the ID value with the Backspace key You then decide that you want to delete the entire record The Delete Row s command does not work because the ID column contains an invalid value it is blank The ID column in the Person table does not allow NULLs You would first need to add a valid value into the ID cell then delete the entire record gt To copy data from Grid Results tab to clipboard Copied data is placed in the clipboard in a tab delimited format Perform one of the following actions to select the desired data a Click the indicator column for the row s that you want to copy The indicator column is the leftmost column in the grid 4
203. ed 3 Click the option box in the Duplicate grid cell A checkmark in the box indicates that the index allows duplicates the values are not unique 5 51 Table Designer 5 52 Lack of a checkmark indicates that the index values are unique duplicate values are not allowed Option Box State Meaning Duplicates allowed O Duplicates not allowed O Duplicates do not apply The default for all SQL data types is that the index column allows duplicates gt To specify index as modifiable For detailed information about modifiability see Modifiability in the Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK When Table Designer is in unlinked mode index changes affect only the data definition files 1 2 Click Edit Indexes or click the Indexes tab Click on the grid indicator cell for the index you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell id i A solid right point triangle indicates that the index is selected Click the option box in the Modifiable grid cell A checkmark in the box indicates that the index value can be modified Lack of a checkmark indicates that the index value cannot be modified Option Box State Meaning Values can be modified O Values cannot be modified O Modifiable does not apply Table Designer Tasks The default for all SQL data types is that the index column is modifiable g
204. ed at the right of the window for ease in creating a table Their functions are described in Table 3 3 Table 3 3 Table Wizard Tools Function Icon Add Column Click this button to add a y column nn Remove Column Highlight the column dh to be removed and click this button Adding a Table Table 3 3 Table Wizard Tools Function Icon Index Window Click this button for a dialog box in which you can specify properties of the index indenes x Indexes definition oy ay ty y Index name Column name Dup m N index_1 unnamed_1 OK Specify properties of the index in this dialog Lx Cancel Index Window Tools Nig Add Index Remove Index Add Segment Remove Segment Create Table Wizard Column Attributes Name Enter an alpha numeric name for the column The limit is 20 characters You can have spaces in the name but if you have spaces you must always enclose the name in quotes whenever you are referring to it in SQL statements Avoiding the use of spaces is recommended Data Type Choose a data type for the column Size For character or binary fields specify how many bytes are permitted in this field 3 17 Using the Pervasive Control Center Precision For floating point values specify the number of significant digits Scale For floating point values specify the number of significant digits that are to the right of
205. ed format by double quotes A column defined as nullable and that contains a NULL is designated in exported format by two commas two field separators together This section describes the procedures used to export or import data from or to Pervasive SQL gt To export data from a Pervasive SQL database table 1 Select the Tables node in the namespace under the database from which you are exporting data 2 Right click on the desired table object in the table list in PCC s right pane 3 Select Tasks then Export Data from the shortcut menu 3 33 Using the Pervasive Control Center 3 34 4 Enter the location of the output file that you want to contain the records exported from the table Figure 3 22 Export Wizard Choose a Destination File Dialog Box C PVS W demodata course out Double Quote t CRHLF This example exports comma delimited records Select the box marked Write column names at first row if you would like the Export Wizard to create a header row at the beginning of the file that includes the name of each column from the DDF This would be particularly useful if you are exporting to another application such as Excel so that the contents will be identified Click Next The Export Wizard now displays a dialog box that allows records to be filtered or processed using SQL The option chosen here is to output the table records unmodified Figure 3 23 Export Wizard Specify Table Copy or Query Dia
206. ee Working with Groups and Users on page 3 23 gt To turn off database security y Caution Turning off database security deletes all users groups and permissions If you turn security back on you must re create all users and groups 1 Right click on the icon for your database in the PCC Namespace and choose Properties in the shortcut menu 2 Select the Security tab in the Database properties dialog box 3 Since security is on the pane includes a check box entry to turn security off Select it and press OK to turn off security Unless you have an open database session Pervasive SQL prompts you for the Master password before turning off security For any data files in your database with Btrieve owner names set you cannot use PCC to grant access to these files You must use the GRANT statement with the appropriate owner name Refer to the SQL Engine Reference for a discussion of the GRANT statement gt To add a new group to the database 1 Select the Namespace node Users under the database in which you would like to add a new group 2 Right click Users Select New Group from the shortcut menu The following dialog box appears 3 23 Using the Pervasive Control Center Figure 3 16 Add New Group Dialog Box New Group 3 Type ina group name 4 Clickon the Permissions tab to select the specific operations that this Group is entitled to perform on the database Figure 3 17 Add New User Group Permissions D
207. een at a time printing on NetWare is ignored under Linux Commands clone outputFile sourceFile Oowner The clone command creates a new empty Pervasive SQL formatted file with the same file specifications as an existing file including any supplemental indexes but excluding the owner name The new data file includes all of the defined key characteristics such as key position key length or duplicate key values contained in the existing file Unless specified the new data file will not have an owner name clrowner sourceFile Oowner The clrowner command clears the owner name of a Pervasive SQL data file commandFile commandOutputFile The Maintenance Utility allows you to specify the but il command options in a commandFile that can be specified to but il An lt end gt keyword must be placed after each command option in the file The following is an example command file create xface btr xface dsc lt end gt Linux Supplementary Documentation 8 10 stat xface btr lt end gt copy sourceFile outputFile Oownerl Oowner2 The copy command copies the contents of one Pervasive SQL formatted file to another Copy retrieves each record in the source data file and inserts it into the output data file The record size must be the same in both files After copying the records copy displays the total number of records inserted into the output data file Copy performs the same function as recover and load in a
208. error is using the wrong operating system user name or password in an attempt to connect to the server Other possible causes include Error Messages from PCC m The operating system may be expecting the user to change his her password on the first logon The Create Database Wizard does not allow this so the connection fails On Windows NT this situation occurs if in the User Manager you have selected the User Must Change Password at Next Logon checkbox m Ifthe user isa member of another group with lesser permissions the lesser permissions will override the greater permissions A user always has the most restrictive permissions of any group to which the user belongs Solution Double check the spelling of the user name and the password Make sure the user and password have been set up on the remote server operating system Inspect the user s account information on the server Make sure the operating system is not expecting the user s password to be changed at the next logon Make sure the user is not also a member of a group that has restricted permissions For Windows NT 2000 be sure that the user is set up as a local user on the system not a network user Network users have a domain name and a backslash preceding the user name such as BOSTON GILBERT Be sure that the user who is a member of the Administrators group or Pervasive_Admin group is a local user When trying to create a stored procedure in PCC I get this err
209. es m Returns MKDE version information Continuous operation is an MKDE feature that enables you to back up files while they are in use by Pervasive SQL based applications Two maintenance commands startbu and endbu begin and end continuous operation on a file or set of files Synopsis butil clone outputFile sourceFile Oowner clrowner sourceFile Oowner commandFile commandOutputFile copy sourceFile outputFile Oownerl Oowner2 create sourceFile descriptionFile Y N drop sourceFile lt keyNumber SYSKEY gt Oowner endbu lt A sourceFile listFile gt index sourceFile indexFile descriptionFile Oowner load unformattedFile outputFile Oowner recover sourceFile unformattedFile Oowner rollfwd sourceFile unformattedFile Oowner save sourceFile unformattedFile Y indexFile N lt keyNumber 1 gt Oowner Available Utilities setowner sourceFile owner level sindex sourceFile lt descriptionFile SYSKEY gt keyNumber Oowner startbu lt sourceFile listFile gt stat sourceFile Oowner VEE Options a Note Maintenance Utility command options are not case sensitive unless the option is a filename If you run butil without specifying a command option or with an invalid command option a usage message is printed The usage message indicates that there is an optional s command line argument to butil This argument which is used to suppress scr
210. espace click the plus signs until the 3 Tables node appears for the database in which you are interested In the PCC data pane right click on a table icon then click Open You may also double click the table icon lt 3 Control Center Root el amp Pervasive SQL Engines Clase Ry DOCLAB2 line Databases S DEMODATA Tables cs Charad Deanne wan gt Tasks gt SQL DM starts and runs a Select From table _name statement where table_name is the name of the table icon The results are placed into the Grid Results tab Note SQL DM opens a separate instance for each table This means that you can open multiple instances of SQL DM from PCC for the same table Changes saved in one instance are reflected in another instance only if you run a query or queries in the other instance For example suppose you open SQL DM twice called instance A and B for table MyTable If you change data in the grid in instance A and save the changes you need to run a SELECT statement in instance B to see those changes gt To identify machine and database currently open 1 Observe the SQL DM title bar 6 43 SQL Data Manager 6 44 3 4 The title bar shows the name of the open database and the name of the machine on which the database resides For example the following image shows that DEMODATA is the open database and DOCLAB2 is the machine on which DEMODATA resides f Pervasive SQL Data Manager
211. etecting non standard 9 22 how to keep safe 9 22 mixing among databases 9 23 must exist for ODBC access 2 24 sharing among data files 9 25 verifying against data files 3 43 Index 3 Definitions cell 1 6 client 1 4 column 1 5 database 1 2 1 6 database engine 1 3 engine 1 3 field 1 5 index 1 6 join 1 8 local 1 7 Namespace 3 2 record 1 5 remote 1 7 requester 1 4 row 1 5 schema 1 6 table 1 6 value 1 5 Delay in Configuration eliminating 3 5 3 6 Delete Database Wizard 3 13 Deleted records re use of disk space 9 30 Deleting atable 3 20 databases 3 13 See Table Designer DSN 2 52 group 3 26 user 3 26 Detecting non standard DDFs 9 22 Determining if DDFs are non standard 9 22 if ODBC interface is used 9 21 network protocol in use 9 18 record length 5 38 service pack level 9 15 DevTalk web forum 10 9 Directory field in Create Database Wizard 2 27 Disk space re use of 9 30 4 Index Documentation 1 17 Advanced Operations Guide 1 18 different formats 9 17 Getting Started 1 17 Online help 1 19 Pervasive Products and Services 1 18 SQL Engine Reference 1 18 Status Codes and Messages 1 18 User s Guide 1 18 What s New 1 18 Drop Database Wizard name of exe 3 8 Drop Table Wizard name of exe 3 8 Dropdb exe 3 8 Dropping a Table See also Table Designer atable 3 20 Droptab exe 3 8 DSN client 2 43 defined 2 21 Linux client 2 45 client DSN needed for many applications 9 6 concept
212. etwork or a 100 Microsoft network then your preferred protocol is TCP IP If you have a NetWare network then you need to find out from your NetWare administrator whether you should be using IPX SPX SPXII or TCP IP Once you know what the protocol should be you should ensure that your server is using this protocol You must have administrative rights on the server operating system or be a member of Pervasive_Admin to perform this task Using PCC connect to the target server Double click Configuration and click Server Communication Protocols Supported Protocols General Troubleshooting Click and ensure that the correct vendor and protocol stack is listed in the Selected column Immediately above that setting choose ODBC Connection Manager Supported Protocol This setting should be set to TCP IP unless you are configuring a NetWare server that does not have TCP IP installed Ensure that your client is using the same protocol Using PCC double click the icon for your local machine Double click Configuration and choose Client Communication Protocols Supported Protocols Click and ensure that the correct vendor and protocol stack is in the Selected column If you have performed all of the above tasks with no success at accessing your data refer to Pervasive SQL Resources and Contacts on page 10 1 for more ways to get help 9 7 Basic Troubleshooting Error Messages from PCC You may receive seve
213. ew Lowest total cost of ownership An independent study conducted by Aberdeen Group concluded that no major database product can match Pervasive SQL s low total cost of ownership No Database Administrator DBA required You can look in the newspaper any day of the week and see classified ads for Oracle Sybase or SQL Server database administrators with sky high salaries Pervasive SQL offers the unique Zero Database Administrator or Z DBA architecture Its easy to use tools bulletproof installation and set it and forget it simplicity make Pervasive SQL the perfect workhorse for desktop workgroup and departmental applications Scalable from the desktop to the Web Pervasive SQL is available in two editions the Ultra light Workgroup database engine supports applications running locally on the same computer as the engine It comes with a 5 user license and scales to 10 users The Server engine starts with a 10 user license and scales to thousands of concurrent users including intranet and extranet applications Upgrading to another configuration requires no changes to the supported application just plug and play with the new database engine Cross platform support Unlike some other products Pervasive SQL does not lock you in to a single platform Pervasive SQL databases are binary compatible and supported across Microsoft Windows Novell NetWare and several varieties of Linux No matter where your data is or where it is
214. ew the previous steps in this task You are finished with the Billing table Remove the Billing table from Query Builder Diagram and add the tables Person and Faculty In Query Builder Diagram click the columns ID First_Name and Last_Name for table Person In Query Builder Diagram click the columns ID Dept_Name and Salary for table Faculty 6 73 SQL Data Manager SQL DM should show something similar to the following _ All columns _ All columns D ID Dept_Name Designation irst_Name _Nane _ Building_Nane _ Room_Number _ Rsch_Grant_Amount o Pern_Coun try xl Order by Criteria C com as ae aesa Person ID Person l Person Bd Person Bd Facuty Bd Facuty Bd Faculty Salary Facuty Bd SELECT Person ID Person First_Name Person Last_Name Faculty ID Faculty Dept_Name Faculty Salary FROM Person Faculty You are now ready to join the two tables with the ID column The join allows you to determine which faculty members are also in the Person table The following steps show you how to join the columns by dragging the column from one table to the corresponding column in the other column 32 In Query Builder Diagram click ID and keep the left mouse button held down The mouse pointer changes shap
215. ew the properties of a table You can view and modify table properties as needed gt To view the properties of an existing table within a database 1 Click on the Tables Namespace node under the database whose table you wish to view 2 Right click on the desired table in the table list in the Control Center s right pane 3 Select Properties in the shortcut menu The properties dialog box appears Figure 3 21 Table Properties Window Table Name Tuition Table Location ASBOLAND3 PVSW usr loca Dictionary Path fusr flocal psql data DEMODA File Version 6 0 Record Length 24 Page Size Number of Records Number of Indexes Number of Duplicate Ptrs Number of Unused Pages Variable Records Var Rec Blank Truncation Data Compression Key Only File Index Balancing Freespace Threshold Uses Alternate Collating Seq System Data Key 3 29 Using the Pervasive Control Center 3 30 The Table Properties dialog box presents the following information Table 3 4 Existing Table Properties Statistic Name Description Table Name Shows the name of the table as it appears in the database schema Table Location Shows the physical location of the data file associated with the table Dictionary Path Displays where the database s DDF files are located File Version Shows the earliest Btrieve engine version that can read the
216. ey If no key is specified information about all installed keys is displayed r key Removes a specified license key See Also butil 1 btadmin 1 syslogd 1 Pervasive SQL User s Guide documents License Administration in detail 8 17 Linux Supplementary Documentation dbmaint Description The dbmaint utility manages named databases gt Note This utility can only be run by user accounts belonging to group pvsw See Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server edition for information on Pervasive SQL Linux utilities and user accounts Synopsis dbmaint a d 1 nDbname a b i e ldictpath ddatapath add new database name a nDbname b i e Idictpath ddatapath delete database name d nDbname list database names 1 a Options Commands add a add dbname del d delete dbname list l list donames Options b create bound database i create database with relational integrity e do not create dictionary files for database nDBName specify database name 1dictpath specify dictionary path 8 18 Available Utilities datapath specify datapath a show detail information about donames in database list Examples To create DBName TEST with relational integrity type dbmaint a i nTEST Note Unless a datapath is specified the new database will be in the default location PVSW_ROOT data Likewise if a dictionary path is not specified the dictionary wi
217. f the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details A copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License is included in your installation of Pervasive SQL at program files common files Pervasive Software Shared doc lesser htm If you cannot find this license write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA You may contact Pervasive Software Inc using the contact information on the back cover of this manual User s Guide November 2002 100 004151 001 Contents About This Manual 2 2 ee ee ee ee xiii Who Should Read This Manual 2 aaa xiv Manual Organization s aa ea ae a waa Ea E eee xv Conventlons N ei sls pe RRP BS eee ete Gai BO Be ae RG BRS a xvii 1 Introducing Pervasive SQL 2000 ee eee 1 1 Understanding Pervasive SQL and its Capabilities Understanding Pervasive SQL ee ee 1 2 Whatisia Database to de hel oe Man A el ae ee 1 2 What is a Database Management System 2 0 2 eee 1 2 Components of Pervasive SQL oe aoea a e eee 1 3 Key Concepts occ Se yr a hoe en SS pdt eg eo eee ae EA 1 5 Basic Database Structures and Terms 0 000000 00 0008 1 5 Unique Benefits of Pervasive SQL 1 eer e e ee ee
218. f you want to insert a new index above an existing one A new index is inserted A blue asterisk appears in the leftmost gray cell The default name of the column is index_n where n is a number that automatically increments by one The first index you insert is index_1 the second index_2 and so forth Table Designer Tasks The following image shows an index inserted Av Sse x Be Index name Column Duplicate Modifiable Student_Trans Student_ID M Ase Transaction_Nu o o Asc Log o o Asc Reaistrar_ID o o Asc gt index_1 Student_ID Asc Click File Save or click J The save action adds the index See also Creating Indexes in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK gt To delete an index When Table Designer is in unlinked mode index changes affect only the data definition files 1 Click on the grid indicator cell for the index you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell ifa i A solid right point triangle indicates that the index is selected Click Edit Delete Index or click C e gt A red x appears in the gray leftmost grid cell X The x indicates that the index is marked for deletion The index is not deleted until you save the table information Click File Save or click J The save action deletes the index gt To insert an index segment F
219. folder for the target server and choose New Database Follow the instructions in Setting Up ODBC Database Access on page 2 21 to set up a DSN for existing data files You can now rule out the server DSN as the source of the problem Note If your application uses pure Btrieve access only without ODBC then skip this step If you have performed all the steps above and you still cannot get to your data the next possibility is lack of a local client DSN for the remote data PCC can access remote server DSNs using connections without client DSNs Many desktop applications such as Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access cannot do this You must create a client DSN on your local computer to provide access to the remote server DSN To create a client DSN follow the instructions in Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 You must first make sure that a server DSN exists on the server you want to access You can now rule out the client DSN as the source of the problem The final task to perform is to ensure that your client and server are communicating on the appropriate network protocols By default Pervasive SQL ships with all network protocols enabled so connection time may be slow as it tries all protocols but it should eventually connect Some application vendors disable the protocols that are not typically used by their application s First determine what protocols ought to be used on your network If you have a Linux n
220. for any database Constraints 1 Right click on the database in the PCC Namespace whose referential constraints are to be viewed 2 Select Properties from the shortcut menu 3 Click on the tab marked Constraints The following dialog box appears Figure 3 32 Database Properties Database properties DEMODATA 12 xi General Security Constrains Foreign Key Parent Table Depend Table Delete Rule Update I myForeignKey _ table table2 Restrict Invalid Click OK to close the window 3 42 Checking Consistency and Referential Integrity Checking gt To check whether the table definitions in your DDFs Consistency match the file structure of the data files 1 Right click on the database in the PCC Namespace whose referential integrity is to be checked 2 Select Tasks then Check Databases from the shortcut menu The following dialog box appears Figure 3 33 Check Database Dialog Box Choose a consistency test to verify the consistency of your database ce Choose referential integrity test to verify referential integrity of your database It can be performed only if the database contains any referential constraints ReferentialIntegrity test 3 Click Consistency test then click Next The select table dialog box allows you to specify which tables of the database are to be checked Figure 3 34 Select Tables for the Referential Integrity Test Dialog Box Select the table s for the consis
221. format CNVDDF is a DOS utility that enables you to convert a database dictionary from Scalable SQL 3 01 to Pervasive SQL V8 format To run the utility make sure that either the Btrieve DOS Box or another DOS requester is loaded on the client workstation The utility is located at http www pervasive com support toolbox asp 9 21 Basic Troubleshooting 9 22 Note Converting database dictionary files in the CNVDDF utility does not modify any non system table Btrieve files it only modifies FILE DDF FIELD DDE and INDEX DDE It is recommended that you back up the original files to another directory before making any changes to the dictionary files using CNVDDE This will enable you to restore your original DDFs What is the best way to ensure that my data dictionaries DDFs are safe Always keep a backup copy of your DDFs Anytime you make changes to the runtime DDFs be sure to make a backup copy of the DDFs before making changes Ifyou are turning on database security for the first time you should make a backup copy of the dictionaries without security and a backup copy with security How can I tell whether I have non standard DDFs If you can edit your DDFs with a Btrieve utility it means that you do not have standard dictionary files A standard dictionary file does not permit direct Btrieve access This lock out is a safety feature that ensures only the SRDE can write to the dictionary DDFs are very special files t
222. formation is appended to the file each time PSA runs we recommend that you consistently use the same file name What is the local default location for the log file The default local location for the log file is lt oSdrive gt Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software Shared PSA where lt OSdrive gt is the drive letter where your operating system is installed What is the remote default location for the log file The default location for the log file is always the directory where psawizrd exe is located on a Windows machine Regardless of whether psawizrd exe is used to delete or analyze a remote NetWare volume psawizrd exe is still local on the Windows machine What kind of information is contained in the log file The log file records any process performed by PSA and includes the associated timestamp For example if the Delete components or archives option is executed the log file will list all files registry settings folders icons and archives that PSA deletes What happens to the information in the log file each time the utility is run New information is appended to the log file each time PSA runs Does PSA detect itself No Pervasive SQL and PSA installations always install PSA to lt OSdrive gt Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software Shared Psa PSA will not detect the copy in lt oSdrive gt Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software Shared PSA Concepts Note We strongly discourage having
223. ft Access Access 2 From the Access dialog box choose Blank Access database as shown below Click OK Note that you may also add Pervasive SQL tables to an existing Access database Figure 2 32 Create a New Database using Microsoft Access Create a new database using Blank Access database C Access database wizards pages and projects amp Open an existing file 3 Next the File New Database dialog box opens and asks you to name the new database Name the database and click Create 4 From the Access menu choose File Get External Data Link Tables Note You have the option to Import data or Link Tables to the new database When you choose Import you break the link to the ODBC data source immediately following the import procedure Essentially Import creates a static copy of the data When you choose Link Tables Microsoft Access keeps the connection open and remains dependent upon the ODBC data source each time the data is accessed This way the data you see reflects any changes to the data at its source 2 48 Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications gt Note If you wish to link to a file on a local area network make sure to use a universal naming convention UNC path instead of relying on the drive letter of a mapped network drive in Windows Explorer A drive letter can vary on a computer or may not always be defined whereas a UNC path is a reliable and consistent
224. g Box 0 0 3 12 Drop Database Wizard Dialog Box 2 2 ee eee 3 13 Completing Drop Database Wizard Dialog Box 04 3 14 Create Table Wizard Dialog BOX ecte a ces we ee eee 3 15 Create Table Wizard Designer View Dialog Box 0 0 3 16 Create Table Wizard Generate SQL Script Dialog Box 4 3 18 Create Table Wizard Complete Dialog Box 000 3 19 Drop Table Wizarda o renane aeae ee Ae ee ea el Heed a 3 20 Database Properties Dialog Box lt s cua toc ee 3 22 Add New Group Dialog Box enses eene e ea a a 3 24 Add New User Group Permissions Dialog Box 04 3 24 Add New User Dialog B s ei hrat ee en 3 25 Add New User Group Permissions Dialog Box 000 3 26 Stopping and Restarting Services in the Pervasive Control Center 3 28 Table Properties Window seier aae Oea ara e e e ee 3 29 Export Wizard Choose a Destination File Dialog Box 3 34 Export Wizard Specify Table Copy or Query Dialog Box 3 34 Export Wizard Use SQL Statement for Export Dialog Box 3 35 Export Wizard Completing the Export to the File Wizard Dialog Box 3 35 Exporting Data Statsion see bed ee se tee as Seal agentes ahah eh dre had ely 3 36 Import Wizard Choose a Source File Dialog Box 0 0 3 36 Import Wizard Specify Table Copy Dialog Box 2 2 0 000 3 37 Import Wizard Use SQL Statemen
225. going to be Pervasive SQL is there for you Big database features at a small price Pervasive SQL offers full security encryption management and monitoring tools and a host of other features you would expect to see in more expensive DBMS products Why Pervasive SQL Legendary stability and reliability Pervasive database engines have been serving the needs of business users for nearly twenty years In fact 70 of the Windows desktop accounting market uses Pervasive SQL as the underlying DBMS of choice When you must manage important data you use the DBMS that will support your needs Multiple access methods Your application vendor can use the transactional interface for blazing performance on bulk data operations while offering the richness of ODBC OLE DB pure Java and JDBC interfaces for data reporting security analysis and standard compatibility No other database management system offers all these access methods Introducing Pervasive SQL Understanding the Product Family Workgroup Pervasive SQL is available in two different packages The major differences between the packages are price and multi user features m The Workgroup engine is least expensive but it provides support only for small workgroup environments m The Server engine is designed for maximum scalability in high volume mission critical database applications where there is a dedicated database server The Server engine quickly becomes most ec
226. grant a user administrative rights follow the instructions for your platform Granting Administrative Rights on a Windows Server on page 2 12 Granting Administrator Rights on NetWare 4 2 5 x or 6 x on page 2 19 Granting Administrator Rights on Linux on page 2 19 Logging in as Administrator on any platform on page 2 20 Using Pervasive SQL Granting Administrative Rights on a Windows Server Users who are members of Pervasive_Admin or of Administrators are permitted to perform administrative tasks on the database engine gt To grant a user database administrator rights on 1 2 3 4 Windows NT Note You must be logged onto the Windows server as a user with full administrator level rights on the server or be a member of the Pervasive_Admin group defined on the server Open the Windows NT User Manager click Start Programs gt Administrative Tools User Manager The graphical user interface for the User Manager appears Click User New Local Group A dialog box appears Type in Pervasive Admin as the group name You may now add users to this list Click Add select user click Add click OK Click OK when finished Note If the Log on as setting for the Pervasive SQL services is not System Account see Services Settings and Log In Authority on page 2 13 gt To grant a user database administrator rights on 1 2 3 Windows 2000 Note You must be
227. hat must remain synchronized with each other and with the data files at all times Standard dictionaries do not have case sensitive table names or field names That is the column definitions for column Xf Name in file ddf and column Xe Name in field ddf have the Case flag set meaning the values are case insensitive DDFs are Btrieve files and thus can be opened and viewed not updated using the Function Executor This is one way to confirm the contents of file ddf or field ddf On some non standard dictionaries the DDFs file ddf field ddf and or index ddf do not exist Such dictionaries do not work with our products For example if you see a file called x file ddf instead of file ddf you can assume your DDFs are non standard Non standard DDFs are unlikely to work properly with Pervasive Control Center or the relational engine Frequently Asked Questions Can mix and match DDFs from different databases A complete set of DDF files must be considered a unit No DDF file from one database may be intermixed with DDFs from a different database What happened to DDF Builder and DDF Sniffer DDF Sniffer and DDF Builder were added to the Pervasive product line with the acquisition of Smithware in 1998 Neither DDF Sniffer nor DDF Builder are available anymore They were replaced by DDF Ease which was part of the Pervasive SQL 7 database engine DDF Ease has since been replaced by Pervasive Control Center in Pervasive SQL V8
228. hat type Each grid contains input columns appropriate for the type of statement being built For an explanation of the input columns for each grid see the following m Query Builder Grid for SELECT Statements on page 6 32 Query Builder Grid for UPDATE Statements on page 6 35 Query Builder Grid for INSERT Statements on page 6 36 Query Builder Grid for DELETE Statements on page 6 37 For an explanation of using each grid to create an SQL statement see the following To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder on page 6 76 6 14 SQL Reference SQL Data Manager Concepts To build an INSERT statement with Query Builder on page 6 79 a To build a DELETE statement with Query Builder on page 6 82 Behavior of Query Builder Grid When Query Builder Diagram Contains No Tables The same behavior occurs as explained in Behavior When Query Builder Diagram Contains No Tables on page 6 12 The SQL statements and key words that you may use with SQL DM are documented in SQL Engine Reference SQL Data Manager SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference Main Window 6 16 This section describes the objects on the SQL DM graphical user interface GUI Main Window on page 6 16 Query Builder Diagram on page 6 31 Query Builder Grid for SELECT Statements on page 6 32 Query Builder Grid for UPD
229. he command line see Figure 3 5 a login screen requires you to specify a Server and Database to use If the database you want to access is secure the login screen also requires you to enter a User Name and Password The login screen also appears when creating a new database The following screen is an example of a wizard invocation using a DOS command line Figure 3 5 DOS Command Line Screen Example 5 MS DOS Prompt Cao Gales ca ef Al Microsoft R gt Windows 98 CO gt Copyright Microsoft Corp 1981 1998 C WINDOWS gt CheckDB exe The following table provides the file names of the wizards if you wish to start them from the command line Table 3 2 File Names of Wizards File Name Wizard createdb exe Create Database checkdb exe Check Database crtblwzd exe Create Table dropdb exe Drop Database droptab exe Drop Table expwizrd exe Data Export impwizrd exe Data Import Pervasive Control Center Wizards Table 3 2 File Names of Wizards continued File Name Wizard nulcnvwz exe Null Conversion psawizrd exe Pervasive System Analyzer 3 9 Using the Pervasive Control Center Adding or Creating a Database To add or create a database use the Create Database Wizard Newly created databases are empty and may be populated with tables using the Add Table Wizard described in Adding a Table on page 3 15 You may also create a database with Table Designer See Table Designer on
230. he limit is 20 characters To set a Btrieve column name on page 5 56 Type Specifies the data type of the Pervasive SQL column Supported Data Types on page A 2 in SQL Engine Reference To set a Btrieve column type Size Specifies how many bytes are To set a Btrieve column permitted for the data type size on page 5 58 Position Shows the byte location within the physical file where the column begins Position is automatically determined by the location of the column and the size of the data type s in the preceding column s Decimal Specifies the number of To set decimal places for significant digits that are to the right of the decimal point for floating point values a Btrieve column on page 5 58 GUI Object Table Designer GUI Visual Reference Description Related Information Null Specifies whether NULL values are allowed for the data type A shaded square indicates that nulls do not apply to the data type A checked square indicates that NULL values are allowed for the data type To set a Btrieve column to allow nulls on page 5 59 Case Specifies whether the database engine uses case sensitive or case insensitive comparisons when searching for character values in the database A checked square M indicates that case insensitive values are used A shaded square indicates that case sensitivity does not ap
231. he statement returns 10 records but the records are not sorted Their order is the sequence in which they were added to the database ID Number First Name Last Last_Name 231813169 James Nickson Nickson 107606655 James Nupp Nupp 104101361 James Ogelvie Ogelvie 190907350 James Pacifico Pacifico 322662943 James Pow Pow 722118776 James Queale Queale 273532268 Lisa Rap Rap 729357252 James Ruvaldt Ruwaldt 25012992 Lisa Simpson Simpson 930516519 James Sinadinos Sinadinos Grid Results Aae Results T You are almost finished with your first goal All you have remaining is to sort the records by the person ID numbers 18 Position the mouse pointer in the Order by cell for me Person ID then press and hold down the left mouse button Column Alias Table Orderby Criteria or or or __ Person ID ID Number Person Person First_Name First Name Person KAR Ascending F James Lisa Person Last_Name Last name Person E P N Person LastName Person Unsorted f SELECT Person ID AS ID Number Person First_Name AS First Name Person Last_Name AS Last name Person Last_Name FROM Person WHERE Person First_Name James OR Person First _Name Lisa AND AND Person Last_Name lt
232. hysical location of the data file associated with the table You may edit this parameter to change the location of a table s data file To change the location of a table s data file on page 5 53 Dictionary Path Shows where the database s DDF files are located File Version Shows the earliest Btrieve engine version that can read the file format GUI Object Table Designer GUI Visual Reference Description Related Information Record Length Shows the length of the data file s records Record Length in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide Page Size Shows the page size in bytes Choosing a Page Size in of the data file The page size Pervasive SQL determines the maximum Programmer s Guide number of index segments that can be defined in a table Number or Shows the number of records Records currently contained in the data file Number of Shows the number of indexes Creating Indexes in Indexes defined for the table Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide Number of Shows the number of linked File Attributes in Duplicate duplicate indexes that can be Pervasive SQL Pointers Ptrs added Programmer s Guide Number of Unused Pages Shows the number of pre allocated pages available If pre allocation is enabled the MicroKernel pre allocates a specified number of pages when it creates the data file Pre allocation guarantees that disk space fo
233. ia b A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click in the Type grid cell Open the list for data types click im Scroll to the data type you want Click the data type you want For a listing of data types see Pervasive SQL Supported Data Types on page A 2 in SQL Engine Reference 5 57 Table Designer 5 58 gt To set a Btrieve column size Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified 1 Click View gt Btrieve Data or click the Btrieve tab 2 Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell Isia A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected 3 Click in the Size grid cell You can set a size only for applicable data types such as CHAR If size is not applicable you will be unable to position the cursor in the Size grid cell 4 Delete the existing size use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete 5 Type the size you want gt To set decimal places for a Btrieve column Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified 1 2 Click View gt Btrieve Data or c
234. ialog Box Tuition Room Person Faculty Enrolls Department Course Class Billing oor00r0000 onoan0000 oo0000000 oono000000 oonpon000 Each check box represents a specific permission for a specific table For example if you want members of this group to be able to perform SELECT operations on the Billing table click the box on the row labeled Billing under the column Select 5 Click OK when done You can also perform the task of creating a group and assigning permissions using the SQL statements CREATE GROUP and GRANT 3 24 Setting Database Security gt To add a new user to the database Note If you wish to use groups you must set up the groups before creating users You cannot add a user to a group after you have already created the user 1 Select the Namespace node Users under the database in which you would like to add a new user 2 Right click Users Select New User from the shortcut menu The following dialog box appears Figure 3 18 Add New User Dialog Box Enter the new user information in the name and password fields and select the group if any to which the new user belongs Note Group members do not have individual permissions Every member of a group has exactly the permissions that have been defined for the group 3 Click on the Permissions tab to select the specific operations that this u
235. ication 6 42 start SQL DM from PCC 6 43 stop running SQL statements 6 57 toggle insert overtype mode 6 56 type a comment into Query Pane 6 52 work with grid results 6 58 work with text results 6 61 wrap text within Query Pane 6 52 SQL DM See SQL Data Manager SQL Engine Reference 1 18 SQL query creating with SQL Data Manager 6 44 SQL Relational Database Engine defined 1 4 early file formats and 9 27 scheduler 9 26 setting up access on NetWare 9 23 SQL requester 9 26 SQL statement timeout period 6 51 SQL statements commenting lines 6 9 use with SQL Data Manager 6 15 Sqlmgr utility 2 37 8 26 bti ini 2 37 2 38 8 26 console mode 8 28 daemon mode 8 27 odbc ini 2 38 8 27 Start up keeping Workgroup engine from autostarting 9 16 Starting database engine 2 2 services with PCC 3 28 Status Codes and Messages 1 18 Stopping database engine 2 2 services with PCC 3 28 Workgroup engine under fast user switching 2 57 Stored procedures error code 4994 when creating 9 11 Support cross platform 1 10 Switching fast user 2 56 Symmetric Multiprocessing see Multiple processors System account rights 2 13 Index 13 T Table changing location of data file 5 53 column attributes 3 17 creating 5 36 See Table Designer defined 1 6 deleting 3 20 5 36 displaying information about 5 54 dropping 3 20 properties modifying 3 29 viewing 3 29 schema verifying against data file structure 3 43 viewing data from Table Designer 5 37 Tab
236. ice pack level 9 15 Foreign key modifying table definition and 5 6 Frequently asked questions 9 12 G Garbage collection on disk 9 30 Getting Started guide 1 17 GRANT 9 25 Granting administrative rights 2 10 for this account 2 13 on Linux 2 19 on NetWare 4 2 5 x or 6 x 2 19 on Windows 2000 2 12 on Windows NT 2 12 Grid Results See SQL Data Manager Group adding a user to 3 27 adding to database 3 23 deleting 3 26 H How to access data via ODBC from other applications 2 46 to add existing user to a group 3 27 new user to the database 3 25 to apply a user count upgrade 9 18 to check for orphan rows 3 44 referential integrity 3 44 whether table definitions match data file structure 3 43 Index 5 to create new database 3 10 new table in a database 3 15 table definition for an existing data file 3 19 to delete existing database 3 13 existing table from a database 3 20 existing user 3 26 to display table properties 3 29 to export data from an existing table 3 33 to find information 1 17 to grant a user administrative rights for this account 2 13 on Linux 2 19 on NetWare 4 2 5 x or 6 x 2 19 on Windows 2000 2 12 on Windows NT 2 12 to import data into an existing table 3 36 to interpret engine status icons in PCC 3 6 to list referential constraints 3 42 to login as administrator 2 20 to obtain more help 10 1 to register a remote server in PCC 3 4 to remove a remote server from PCC 3 4 3 5 to set up a client DSN
237. id cells The display only state also lacks the indicator column By default SQL DM starts with the Results Grid as the active tab and the grid in the active state For tasks that allow you to change the grid state see To set Grid Results to allow changes to database data on page 6 58 and To set default behavior for Grid Results tab on page 6 59 Note If you have a table without primary keys that contains records with duplicate data for a column you will be unable to update the duplicate data on the Grid Results tab SQL DM cannot tell one record from another because of the duplicate data This problem does not occur if your table contains primary keys because they prevent duplicate data Records Affected and Scrolling Regardless of state the grid caches results locally and initially displays as many records as the vertical size of the grid permits The larger you size the main window and the larger the vertical size of the grid within it the more records the grid can initially display As you scroll the vertical scroll bar more records are made available to the grid The number of records retrieved appears in the lower right corner of the main window in the rows fetched indicator SE OVE Rows Fetched 1500 Once you scroll to the bottom the rows fetched indicator reports the total number of records returned by the SQL statement SQL Data Manager Concepts Once scrolled to the bottom and
238. id until you see the records for the Boerner Building Notice that room 100 is no longer listed as one of the classrooms for the Boerner Building Building Name Nurber Capacity Type Billingsley Building 202 2 Office Boerner Building 101 30 Classroom Boerner Building 103 30 Classroom Boerner Building 105 bo classroom E Boerner Building 200 2 office Boerner Building 202 2 Office Boerner Building 206 2 office Budinszky Building 102 50 Classroom gt To add a table to Query Builder Diagram This task requires that Query Builder Diagram be active showing 1 Perform one of the following actions a Click Tools Query Builder Add Table or click E b Right click in the pane of Query Builder Diagram then click Add table A list appears that shows the tables in the active database 2 Click the desired table in the list 3 Click Add See also Behavior When Query Builder Diagram Contains No Tables on page 6 12 SQL Data Manager Tasks gt To remove a table from Query Builder Diagram This task requires that Query Builder Diagram be active showing 1 Right click on the title bar of a table in Query Builder Diagram All columns HSS Add table 2 Click Remove gt To join tables in Query Builder Diagram See steps 32 through 34 in To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 for an example of joining tables gt To insert a ro
239. ient DSNs are used only on client workstations when connecting to a database engine 1 Note If you have not done so already please review Prerequisites to Setting up Database Access on page 2 24 before proceeding 1 Open Pervasive Control Center PCC Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt Control Center 2 Double click on Pervasive SQL Engines The PCC Namespace contains a list of database engines that have been registered If you do not see the name of the database engine you want to connect to you must register the remote engine with PCC To do so right click on Pervasive SQL Engines then click Register New Engine Figure 2 22 Registering a New Engine fg Pervasive SQL Control Center Action View Tools Help je gt Ope e hl a e ay Control Center Root Name E amp Pervasive SQL Enginpe Register New Engine View Refresh A dialog box is displayed that allows you to choose the machine name where the Pervasive SQL engine resides 2 40 Setting Up Client Access Figure 2 23 Choosing a Computer Name Computer name 3 Do one of the following a Type the machine name in the Computer name field and click OK b If you are unsure of the machine name click the button located to the right of the name field and browse from the Network list that appears Click on the desired computer name then click OK Figure 2 24 Choosing a Computer Name from a Network Lis
240. ill print messages to the Linux system log file You can find out more about the system log by running man syslogd Console Mode To start the Pervasive SQL database server in console mode assuming PVSW_ROOT bin is in your path run mkded console After executing this command a gt gt prompt will be displayed allowing you to enter interactive commands The status command prints client and engine status Entering quit will exit the MKDE process Console mode is functionally equal to daemon mode except that MKDE messages are printed to standard out instead of dev console or the system log 8 25 Linux Supplementary Documentation sqimgr Description sqlmgr is the command used to start and stop the Pervasive SQL relational engine as either a daemon process or in console mode To start sqimgr bti ini should be placed into directory usr local psql etc This file contains ODBC settings and description of ODBC DSNs for the server Note that the primary way to start or stop the database engines is with the shell script psq1 See Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on Linux on page 2 9 Port and network protocol in bt i ini should be specified as below SQLManager MgrPort 1583 MgrUseTransport TCP Each DSN should be described in odbc ini as follows DSN name Driver usr local psql lib libsrde so Description Test Pervasive database DBQ DBName To create a DBName see dbmaint on page 8 18
241. indicates that nulls are allowed for the column Lack of a checkmark indicates that the column cannot be blank that is for every record the column must contain a value other than null Option Box State Meaning Nulls allowed O Nulls disallowed O Nulls do not apply 5 59 Table Designer 5 60 Also see Null Values on page 5 6 gt To set case sensitivity for a Btrieve column Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified 1 Click View gt Btrieve Data or click the Btrieve tab 2 Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell kia A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected 3 Click the option box in the Case grid cell You can set a collating sequence only for applicable data types A shaded square indicates that case sensitivity does not apply to the data type A checkmark in the box indicates that column values are case insensitive Lack of a checkmark indicates that column values are case sensitive Option Box State Meaning Case insensitive O Case sensitive O Case does not apply gt To change Btrieve column position on the GUI Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32
242. ing Up Database Access on a NetWare Server Figure 2 20 Advanced Settings Window Pervasive ODBC Engine Interface Ppewooara et In the Advanced Settings window you can type a description for the new database In the DSN Open Mode field choose Normal unless you have reviewed the other options as described in Advanced Operations Guide In the Database name field choose the DBNAME of the database for which you wish to create the Engine DSN If you find the DBNAME you want click Next and return to step If the database you want to access is not listed click the Create button to create an internal DBNAME for the database Click Next and continue with the next step Figure 2 21 Create DBNAME Window WNW32 SY S d2_test MWNW32 SYS dz_test In the Create Database Name window type in the internal name you want to assign to the database This name does not need to be the same as the DSN This name is not displayed in PCC nor is it exposed to users trying to connect to the database during runtime 2 35 Using Pervasive SQL For more information in Integrity enforced and Bound see Bound Databases and Enforced Integrity on page 2 55 2 36 s4 Leave Integrity enforced checked if you plan to enforce the referential integrity rules defined in the database Usually it is a good idea to do so Click Bound DDFs created if you want to prevent any other databases from being associated with these DDFs and dat
243. int the contents of Query Pane Click File Print A dialog appears on which you specify the options for printing Specify any options for printing such as printer name printer range and so forth Click OK To layout the printed page Click File Page Setup A dialog appears on which you specify the layout for the printed page Specify any options for the printed page such as paper size margins and so forth Click OK 6 55 SQL Data Manager 6 56 gt To toggle insert overtype mode 1 Press the Insert key to toggle the text entry mode between insert and overtype Insert mode adds characters between other characters as you type in Query Pane Existing characters are pushed to the right Overtype mode replaces characters as you type The default mode is insert When the Insert Overtype indicator shows OVR in a dimmed typeface SQL DM is in insert mode When OVR is boldface SQL DM is in overtype mode Insert Mode Overtype Mode OVA gt To set the font for Query Pane Setting the font affects the font used in the Query Pane the Grid Results tab and the Text Results tab 1 Click View gt Set Font 2 Specify the desired font characteristics such as style and size 3 Click OK Execution and Results Tasks gt Torun a single SQL statement A database must be open and one or more SQL statements must exist in Query Pane before you can run a statement 1 Move to the SQL state
244. ion driver_description host DSN server host name server port number 1583 server DSN localDSN usr local psql lib HOME 1lib driver description Pervasive ODBC Client interface To add a Client DSN named 1oca1Dsn that references an Engine DSN named remoteDSN on a machine named server12 enter the following command dsnadd dsn localDSN desc any text host serverl12 svr dsn remoteDSN See Also btadmin 1 dbmaint 1 8 21 Linux Supplementary Documentation 8 22 mkded Description mkded 1s the command used to start and stop the Pervasive SQL transactional server including the underlying MKDE as either a daemon process or in console mode Note that the primary way to start or stop the database engines is with the shell script psq1 See Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on Linux on page 2 9 In daemon mode Pervasive SQL runs as a background daemon process As a daemon mkded relinquishes the control terminal and becomes the owner of the process group Informational warning and error messages produced by the MKDE are printed to the console window dev console or to the system log see syslogd 1 if the MKDE cannot write to dev console When Pervasive SQL is started in console mode a gt gt prompt will be displayed allowing you to enter interactive commands Console mode is functionally equivalent to daemon mode except that MKDE messages are printed to standard out instea
245. ions as desired b Click Replace All to change all occurrences of the search string to the replace string 6 Click Cancel to exit the dialog gt To select text in Query Pane 1 Perform one of the following actions a Click Edit Select All right click within Query Pane then click Select All or press Contro1 A Any of these actions selects all of the contents of Query Pane b Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the text you want to select c Press and hold down the Shift key then press a cursor arrow key to move the cursor across the text you want to select gt To copy text from Query Pane 1 Perform one of the following actions a Click Edit Copy or press Control1 C gt SQL Data Manager Tasks b Right click on the selected text then click Copy Copied text is placed in the clipboard To paste within Query Pane Perform one of the following actions a Click Edit Paste or press Control v b Right click within Query Pane then click Paste Text from the clipboard is placed into Query Pane To cut or delete text from Query Pane Text cut from Query Pane is placed in the clipboard and is available for pasting Text deleted from Query Pane is not placed in the clipboard 1 Perform one of the following actions a To cut text click Edit Cut right click within Query Pane then click Cut or press Control x b To delete text press the Delete key To pr
246. ire that you log in to the operating system on the machine where the database engine is running You will receive a message that log in failed if the account specified for This account cannot act as part of the operating system Note that even the Administrator account requires that you set the user rights policy for Act as part of the operating system See Services Settings and Log In Authority on page 2 13 for a complete discussion and the steps to change the user rights policy Why does my computer have a different format of online documentation than my co worker s computer We both installed the same software Starting with Pervasive SQL 20001 Service Pack 3 the type of online documentation that is installed depends on your system Computers that support Microsoft HTML Help also called Windows 98 Help automatically receive that format of online documentation during the Pervasive SQL installation Computers that cannot support 9 17 Basic Troubleshooting User Counts Networking 9 18 Microsoft HTML Help automatically receive Windows 95 Help files The actual content within each format is identical How do apply a User Count Upgrade Refer to the tasks discussed in the chapter License Administrator on page 4 1 How does the Workgroup engine keep track of how many people are accessing the data If people access the data with two engines at the same time what happens The Workgroup engine keeps track of
247. ith the Linux product The chapter contains the following sections m User Manual Exclusions for Linux on page 8 2 m Man Pages on page 8 4 m Available Utilities on page 8 5 8 1 Linux Supplementary Documentation User Manual Exclusions for Linux Utilities Changes and Exclusions 8 2 Because the Linux platform is unique Linux users are advised to look through this section when referring to the Advanced Operations Guide and to the rest of this guide This section contains exclusions and differences that apply only to the Linux release of Pervasive SQL All Win32 utilities must be run from a Windows client If a utility must be run at the server then its Linux equivalent will be found in this manual Security and user account issues relating to Linux utilities are documented in the Linux section of Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server edition The following sections of the Advanced Operations Guide do not apply to Linux Any necessary explanations are given below m The sections Understanding the Pervasive Component Architecture of the Advanced Operations Guide regarding Overview of Smart Components Component Identification or Unique Component Naming do not apply to Pervasive SQL V8 m The section Understanding the Pervasive Component Architecture of the Advanced Operations Guide regarding Pervasive SQL Event Logging is different for Pervasive SQL V
248. ithin the database Generally the only time you would not want this option checked is when doing a large download of data from an existing database A Bound database associates a database name with a single set of Data Dictionary Files DDFs which refer to only one set of data files If DDFs are bound you can t use those DDFs for several databases nor can you refer to the data files by more than one set of DDFs This protects the database from tampering If you delete a bound database the associated DDFs are also deleted Binding a database ensures that the MicroKernel enforces the database s defined security referential integrity RI and triggers regardless of the method you use to access the data Even if you do not bind your database Pervasive SQL automatically stamps a data file as bound if has a trigger has a foreign key or has a primary key that is referenced by a foreign key Thus a data file may be part of an unbound database but be bound In such cases the MicroKernel enforces integrity constraints on the file as if it were part of a bound database When you create a bound database or bind an existing database Pervasive SQL stamps every dictionary and data file with the name of the bound database Also Pervasive SQL stamps every data file with the name of the table associated with that data file In addition when you add new tables or dictionary files to the bound database Pervasive SQL automatically binds them
249. ive SQL components and registry settings Permanently deletes all Pervasive SQL files found in PATH Deletes lt drive gt pvsw and lt drive gt bti folders and all of their contents Deletes product registry settings system environment variables namely CLASSPATH PATH and Pervasive_Path icons and backup bck directories created by the Pervasive installation setup program Note This option does not delete Pervasive Tango or archives created by PSA Delete Pervasive archives Permanently deletes all archives created by PSA 2 Click Next to delete your selections Note Pervasive SQL includes the following products Pervasive SQL SDK Pervasive IDS Pervasive SQL DataExchange e Pervasive SQL Workstation Pervasive SQL Workgroup 7 19 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA Pervasive SQL Server Engine e Pervasive SQL Client Pervasive SQL Install Toolkit gt To specify what to delete on a NetWare machine 1 Select the items you want to delete You can select to delete Pervasive SQL components and registry settings or Pervasive archives Delete Pervasive SQL components and registry settings Permanently deletes all Btrieve and Pervasive SQL files found in the SYSTEM and ODBC folders on the specified NetWare volume Deletes lt mapped drive gt pvsw lt mapped drive gt bti and lt mapped drive gt pvsw7 bck folders and all of their contents Deletes backup bck directories created by the Pervas
250. ive installation setup program Note This option does not delete Pervasive Tango or archives created by PSA sa Caution Some NetWare system modules may not load correctly if the Btrieve or Pervasive SQL components are deleted To correct this you must either reinstall Btrieve or Pervasive SQL after you have deleted these components Delete Pervasive archives Permanently deletes all archives created by PSA 2 Click Next to delete your selections Note Pervasive SQL includes the following products Pervasive SQL SDK e Pervasive IDS Pervasive SQL DataExchange Pervasive SQL Workstation Pervasive SQL Workgroup Pervasive SQL Server Engine Pervasive SQL Client 7 20 View Components Tasks PSA Tasks Pervasive SQL Install Toolkit gt To select options for the View Components module 1 Select View Loaded Pervasive Modules as shown in Figure 7 1 on page 7 12 The selections by default resemble Figure 7 2 on page 7 21 By default PSA displays the following components Pervasive engines and requesters e Winsock DLL networking component Figure 7 2 View Modules Section of PSA Module Types Search Locations IV Pervasive engines and requesters IV PATH P Pervasive utilities J Additional locations Additional modules gl X wsock32 dll 4 J Include subfolders If you want to add components to the search list see To add a component to the search list on p
251. ives on page 7 18 before making your selections Ifyou choose to restore all files in a major release such as Pervasive SQL 2000 then all files and the configuration settings are restored to their original location Ifyou choose to restore a partial set of files from a release then the files are restored but not any configuration settings Click Next to restore your selections If any of the files that are to be restored exist in the target directory PSA displays a confirmation dialog before overwriting the files 7 17 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA Delete Components or Archives Tasks 7 18 Notes on Restoring Archives This section documents rules with regards to restoring archives Restoring When a Windows Server Engine is Present When there is an existing Pervasive SQL server engine of any version currently on your system you cannot restore another product to that system In this scenario PSA displays a message that the current server engine version must be archived or uninstalled before restoring any other version can occur Restoring to a Remote NetWare Server When you restore an archive to a remote NetWare server you overwrite the Pervasive SQL version currently on that server PSA warns you of this before restoring to a NetWare server and allows you to cancel the operation if necessary Restoring Workgroup Engines and Pervasive SQL Clients You can restore an archive of a Workgroup engine or a Per
252. k for bti ini in the current working directory 3 If 1 and 2 do not apply then look for bti ini in the directory where the Pervasive SQL database engine executable mkded resides 4 If 1 2 and 3 do not apply then look for bti ini in all directories contained in the PATH environment variable 5 If 1 2 3 and 4 do not apply then create a default bti ini in the current working directory When the MKDE creates a default bti ini file an informational message is printed by the MKDE The configuration parameters that can be specified in bti ini are described below A sample configuration file can be found in S PVSW_ROOT samples config bti ini where PVSW_ ROOT indicates the directory where Pervasive SQL for Linux is installed The bti ini file may contain several sections denoted by section headings each containing a set of configuration parameters For this release only the MicroKernel section is supported although a Database Names section is created by default in the bti ini file 8 23 Linux Supplementary Documentation 8 24 The MicroKernel performs a case insensitive search for the name and value of each configuration parameter entry in the bti ini file Some entries can have more than one value In such case they are separated by a vertical bar Values that are generic such as pathnames are enclosed in angular brackets lt gt See Also butil 1 btadmin 1 syslogd 1 smb conf 5
253. ked Questions cancel the selected protocols that you do not want to test Click Browse to select the drive that you have mapped to the installation directory C PVSW by default on the server You must have a mapped drive UNC names are not supported Click Next to run the network tests The results window tells you if there are any significant problems with your networking upgraded from Btrieve v6 x or earlier to Pervasive SQL V8 Now I get error messages telling me that a file is inaccessible when everybody else can get to it What s wrong Use Pervasive System Analyzer to be sure that all components from previous versions of Btrieve or Pervasive SQL have been archived Then make sure your configuration settings are correct Find the file pvsw log and check for error messages indicating a status code 8505 or 8517 These status codes indicate that attempts were made to use a local Workgroup engine to read the data files From the Start menu choose Programs Pervasive SQL V8 Control Center Double click Pervasive SQL Engines Double click the icon representing your computer Double click Configuration Double click Client Click Access In the right hand pane make sure the following settings are set Use Local MicroKernel Engine is Off and Use Remote MicroKernel Engine is On have files sitting on the server that are shared and yet Pervasive SQL cannot read them What s wrong Howare the files shared Pervasiv
254. le Designer pvs file 5 7 data types 5 6 graphical user interface 5 2 5 8 Btrieve tab 5 25 columns tab 5 18 indexes tab 5 20 main window 5 8 statistics tab 5 21 linked mode 5 5 modes 5 5 null restrictions for column 5 6 purpose of 5 2 tabbed dialogs 5 3 Btrieve tab 5 4 5 25 columns tab 5 4 5 18 indexes tab 5 4 5 20 statistics tab 5 4 5 21 tasks access help 5 33 allow duplicates in index 5 51 change Btrieve column position 5 60 change column order 5 40 change location of table data file 5 53 change mode 5 32 create a database 5 34 create a table 5 36 delete a database 5 35 5 36 delete Btrieve column 5 56 delete column 5 41 14 Index delete index 5 49 delete index segment 5 50 determine record length 5 38 discard all changes 5 37 display table information 5 54 display table statistics 5 32 identify active database and table 5 31 identify changes that have not been saved 5 37 insert Btrieve column 5 54 5 55 insert column 5 39 insert index 5 48 insert index segment 5 49 open a database 5 33 open a table 5 35 save changes 5 37 set Btrieve column case sensitivity 5 60 set Btrieve column decimal places 5 58 set Btrieve column name 5 56 set Btrieve column size 5 58 set Btrieve column to allow nulls 5 59 set Btrieve column type 5 57 set column case sensitivity 5 45 set column collating sequence 5 46 set column data type 5 42 set column default 5 47 set column name 5 41 set column precision 5 43 se
255. le Properties Statistic Name Description Free Space Threshold Shows a percentage 5 10 20 or 30 if the data file has a free space threshold The MicroKernel stores the variable length portions of records on their own pages called variable pages separate from the fixed length portions which are stored on data pages The MicroKernel uses the threshold to determine whether to add data to an existing variable page or to create a new one A higher free space threshold reduces fragmentation of variable length records across several pages but uses more disk space Use Alternate Collating Shows whether the table uses an alternate Sequence collating sequence for sorting System Data Key Shows whether the data file has system data keys enabled Occasionally a table requires modifications to its list of columns or indexes The Table Information Manager provides a mechanism through which such changes can be made See the Table Designer on page 5 1 3 31 Using the Pervasive Control Center Viewing and Modifying Data 3 32 When you double click a table or right click a table then click Open PCC starts SQL Data Manager SQL DM to allow you to work with the data in the table SQL DM allows you to run Structured Query Language SQL statements against a Pervasive SQL database With SQL statements you may retrieve create change or delete data in a database provided you have the proper data
256. lick Next The resulting dialog box shows the results of the referential integrity check on the tables as the wizard checks each table selected Figure 3 38 Check Database Results Dialog Box table2 Passed When the wizard has finished checking all tables click Next The Check Database Wizard s result dialog box shows a complete list of foreign keys and the results of each test You can save the test results to disk or print them out at this time 3 45 Using the Pervasive Control Center 3 46 Figure 3 39 Referential Integrity Test Results Dialog Box G myForeignKey tablet table2 0 0 PASSED 8 Follow the wizard prompts until the you receive confirmation that the tests are complete To repair inconsistencies the Check Database wizard updates the information stored in the individual data files to match that in the data dictionary chapter License Administrator k Working with License Keys and User Counts This chapter covers the following topics m License Administrator Concepts on page 4 2 m License Administrator GUI Visual Reference on page 4 5 m License Administrator Tasks on page 4 9 4 1 License Administrator License Administrator Concepts Graphical User Interface Command Line Interface 4 2 A Pervasive SQL license key allows a fixed number of computers called a user count to access a Pervasive SQL engine concurrently A licen
257. lick the Btrieve tab Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell ifa b A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click in the Decimal grid cell Table Designer Tasks You can set a decimal value only for applicable data types Delete the existing value use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete Type the decimal value you want Decimal specifies the number of significant digits that are to the right of the decimal point for floating point values gt To set a Btrieve column to allow nulls Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified For detailed information about null values see Null Value in the Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK 1 2 Click View gt Btrieve Data or click the Btrieve tab Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell i 2 i A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click the option box in the Null grid cell You can allow nulls only for applicable data types A shaded square indicates that null values do not apply to the data type A checkmark in the box
258. lied License on page 4 16 m To Apply a License Key on page 4 16 m To Remove a License on page 4 16 a To Display Help on page 4 17 4 9 License Administrator GUI Tasks 4 10 gt To Start License Administrator from Pervasive Control Center PCC In PCC namespace tree click on a computer name or on the word Databases for a specific computer Choose a computer for which you want to administer licenses Click Tools License Administrator License Administrator accesses the selected computer to determine the type of license required One of three actions then occurs Ifthe selected computer is running a Pervasive SQL release issued after Pervasive SQL 2000i and if you are logged in to the computer License Administrator connects to the database engine The computer name appears in the License Administrator title bar and in the Computer Name field Ifthe selected computer is running a Pervasive SQL release issued after Pervasive SQL 20001 and if you are not logged in to the computer a dialog appears from which you log in to the operating system Note that you are logging in to the operating system and not to the database engine On the login dialog type the name of an operating system user for User Name The user must have administrative privileges on the operating system where the database engine is running For Password type the appropriate password for the user name you specified Click
259. ll be created in the default location To delete the same database type dbmaint d nTEST To list all DBNames with full information type dbmaint 1 a See Also dsnadd 1 butil 1 btadmin 1 syslogd 1 smb conf 5 Advanced Operations Guide for more information about database names 8 19 Linux Supplementary Documentation 8 20 dsnadd Description dsnadd simplifies the setup of anew ODBC data source that uses the Pervasive ODBC Client Interface driver It modifies the odbc ini file by adding appropriate information about the new data source For the latest information on dsnadd see the man page Synopsis To add a data source execute the following command dsnadd dsn server_DSN db DB_name ini inifile desc DSN_description drv desc driver_description or dsnadd dsn myDSN desc datasource db db_name host psqlhost sdsn svDSN myDSN is a name you want to assign to the new data source datasource is any string to describe the data source psqlhost is the name of the network host where your Pervasive SQL is installed svDSN is the name of the data source on the Pervasive SQL host Options help odbc ini ini dsn name dsn dsn desc desc stv host host srv port port sdsn drv path drv drv desc Examples Available Utilities gives help on the dsnadd utility ODBC ini file name SHOME odbc ini Data Source Name DSN descript
260. loading database engine 2 2 Pervasive SQL on NetWare 2 9 Updates slower on NetWare NSS volumes 2 8 Upgrading can t get to data after 9 19 user count 9 18 where to find information 9 29 Use advanced settings field in Create Database Wizard 2 27 User adding to a group 3 27 adding to database 3 25 deleting 3 26 User count administering with License Administrator 4 1 applying 4 4 determining total 4 15 how to apply 9 18 license key 4 2 4 3 obtaining 4 4 troubleshooting expired license 9 9 workgroup engine 9 18 User name OS vs DB 9 16 troubleshooting wrong 9 10 User rights policy act as part of the operating system 2 14 for this account 2 14 User switching 2 56 Index 15 ser s Guide 1 18 sers aa files with owner names and 3 23 types of for fast user switching 2 56 Users namespace node cannot use with files that have owner names 3 23 Utilities btadmin 8 6 butil 8 8 clilcadm 8 17 dbmaint 2 37 8 18 dsnadd 2 45 8 20 for Linux 8 5 License Administrator 4 1 mkded 8 22 console mode 8 25 daemon mode 8 24 new 7 1 overview 1 1 2 1 9 1 sqimgr 8 26 bti ini 2 37 2 38 8 26 console mode 8 28 daemon mode 8 27 odbc ini 2 38 8 27 V Value defined 1 5 Version new data files not affected by installing 9 15 old data files not affected by uninstalling 9 15 Viewing data 3 32 table properties 3 29 Viewing and modifying table properties 3 29 See Table Designer Viewing database engines in PCC 3 6 W
261. log Box NewTable Click Use SQL statement for export if you would like to filter the output records using SQL Figure 3 24 Click the Export from table if you want to export the entire table without specifying any filters Data retrieving type Export from table Use SOL statement for export Exporting Importing Data Figure 3 24 Export Wizard Use SQL Statement for Export Dialog Box SQL query statement SELECT FROM Course where Dept_Name Accounting Browse 7 Click Next Now that all of the information has been entered the Export Wizard displays a dialog box listing the actions to be Figure 3 25 Export Wizard Completing the Export to the File Wizard Dialog Box Completing the Export to the File Wizard You have successfully specified information necessary to start Export process Review the selections below and click on EXPORT to execute Summary Server MATTWILLSONLT Database DEMODATA Export type SOL Query SELECT FROM Course where Dept_Name Accc D Fil x file Location c temp course out 8 Click Export A dialog box provides feedback as the records are Ya exported from the table Once all records are processed the Finish button becomes enabled Click it to exit the wizard Tip If the export fails because of invalid data you can troubleshoot the record that contains the invalid data Click Abort on the error message then No
262. logged onto the Windows server as a user with full administrator level rights on the server or be a member of the Pervasive_Admin group defined on the server Click Start Settings Control Panel Users and Passwords Click the Advanced tab In the area Advanced User Management click Advanced Click the Groups folder From the menu click Action New Group Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine 4 Type in Pervasive_Admin as the group name To add users to this group click Add select user name click Add gt OK 5 Click Create to create the group 6 Click Close gt 1 Note If the Log on as setting for the Pervasive SQL services is not System Account see Services Settings and Log In Authority on page 2 13 Services Settings and Log In Authority Certain operating system settings for the Pervasive SQL services must be in effect for you to log in to the machine running the database engine These settings apply whether or not you use a Pervasive _Admin user group The settings apply to the Pervasive SQL Server engine and to the Workgroup engine if you are running the Workgroup engine as a service See Running the Workgroup Engine as a Service on page 10 15 in Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Workgroup edition Default Setting By default installation both the Transactional and Relational services set Log on as to System Account Local System Account on Windows
263. loper Center Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can research information specifically for application developers using Pervasive SQL About Displays the name and version of Table Designer and the Pervasive SQL copyright information gt To open a database These steps apply only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application 1 Click File Open Database The Open Database dialog appears that shows a list of databases You may click Create to create a new database Click the database you want in the list 5 33 Table Designer 5 34 3 Click OK If the database has security enabled a dialog appears on which you must supply a user name and password Key in the user name default is Master and password and click OK The Open Table dialog appears that shows a list of tables in the database You may click Create to create a new table 4 Click the table you want to open if applicable The list may be empty 5 Click OK gt To create a database These steps apply only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application To create a database within PCC see To add or create a database on page 3 10 See also Naming Conventions in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK You may also create a database from the Open Database dialog See To open a database on page 5 33 1 Click File Cr
264. lumn in the To build a SELECT SQL statement Lack of an X statement with Query excludes the column Builder on page 6 63 SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference GUI Object Description Related Information Order by Specifies the priority by which Query Builder Grid on the columns will be sorted in page 6 14 the result The following choices are available To build a SELECT A statement with Query Ascending Builder on page 6 63 Descending Unsorted The default is unsorted Group by Specifies that the column is Query Builder Grid on being used in a GROUP BY clause or as part of an aggregate query The Group By column appears only if you click Tools gt Query Builder gt Group By or click f Group By provides the following aggregate functions Group By the default AVG average COUNT MAX maximum MIN minimum SUM page 6 14 To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 6 33 SQL Data Manager 6 34 GUI Object Description Related Information Criteria Specifies a search condition Query Builder Grid on for the associated column page 6 14 The default operator is equals Text literals are To build a SELECT automatically single quoted statement with Query when you move from the Builder on page 6 63 Criteria cell The criteria acts as a filter to restrict the number of rows a SELE
265. ly in use on your system in preparation for another install PSA runs automatically during the installation of Pervasive SQL 2000 SP3 and higher You wish to permanently delete Pervasive components or archives currently on your machine You wish to view the Pervasive SQL components that are loaded in memory Does PSA archive itself No because PSA resides in a subdirectory of the Program Files folder and PSA searches for files in the pvsw bin folder it does not detect or archive itself See also Does PSA detect itself on page 7 8 Does PSA detect archive or delete my Pervasive Tango No at this time PSA only detects Pervasive SQL Btrieve and Scalable SQL product installations What does components mean Components refers to Pervasive SQL files icons folders program groups engine configuration settings registry settings and licenses What is an archive An archive is any set of Pervasive files that PSA archived What is a backup directory This is the backup directory created by Pervasive installation The backup directory resides in pvsw bin pvsw7 bck These backup directories created by installation are different from archives created by PSA Is a backup directory the same as an archive directory No An archive is any set of Pervasive files that PSA archived A bck backup directory is a directory with bck extension that Pervasive installation programs creates prior to Pervasive SQL 20001 SP3
266. m rights of the first user to start the engine determine access rights to the database files For example a limited user can start the Pervasive SQL engine but cannot create a new database Ifthe Pervasive SQL Workgroup engine is started as a service the operating system rights of the System Account determine access rights to the database files See Running the Workgroup Engine as a Service on page 10 15 in Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Workgroup edition Changes made to a database in one session are available to users of the database in other sessions For example User A adds a record to Database 1 User B fast user switches to her session User B sees the record in Database 1 added by User A A database accessed by one user s session can lock the database from other users sessions For example User A has Database 1 open in the PCC User B fast user switches to her session and attempts to add security to Database 1 User B is prevented from adding security to the database Caution If you run the Workgroup engine as a console application the first user to start the engine should not stop the engine if other users are accessing the engine In addition the first user must not log off because this causes the engine to terminate As an alternative to running the engine as a console application you may run the engine as a service See Running the Workgroup Engine as a Service in Getting Started with Pervasive
267. m the first column in the import file the second named column receives the data from the second column in the import file and so on For example if you want the data in the first column of the import file to go into the third column of your table you must put the name of the third column first in the column list Now that all of the information has been entered click Next The Import Wizard displays a dialog box listing the actions to be taken Figure 3 30 Import Wizard Completing the Import from File Wizard Dialog Box Completing the Import From File Wizard You have successfully specified the information necessary to start the Import process Review the selections below and click on IMPORT to execute Summary Server MATTWILLSONLT Database DEMODATA Import type SQL Query insert into course Name Description Dept_Name s Location C temp course out To stop the import click Cancel or else click Import A dialog box provides immediate feedback as the records are imported into the table Once all records are processed the Finish button becomes enabled Click it to exit the wizard Exporting Importing Data Figure 3 31 Importing Data Dialog Box Importing Data Import Progress Statistic Imported rows 211 Time 8 sec Operation status Import completed successfully gt To import specific columns of an SDF file into a table using the import wizard In some
268. mation Analyze system Scans a computer for Analyze and Archive Pervasive components and Tasks on page 7 16 allows you to archive previous versions of Pervasive SQL software so that you can install a newer version without conflicts Restore archives Allows you to restore files Restore Archive Tasks previously archived by PSA on page 7 17 into their original locations Delete components Allows you to permanently Delete Components or remove files previously Archives Tasks on page archived by PSA as a group 7 18 View loaded Displays all current View Components Tasks Pervasive modules Pervasive SQL components on page 7 21 and version information in a table Also allows you to add additional components to the matrix 7 12 PSA GUI Visual Reference GUI Object Description Related Information Test active This function allows you to test Test Active Installation installation Pervasive SQL installations in Tasks on page 7 24 three ways network connectivity functionality of the transactional Btrieve database engine and functionality of the relational SQL database engine Select the checkboxes that correspond to the tests you wish to perform Note You need one of the following products to run network transactional and relational tests Otherwise these tests will be unavailable Pervasive SQL Client Pervasive SQL Workgroup engine Pervasive
269. me ame a SV Control Center Root View gt Refresh A dialog box is displayed that allows you to choose the machine name where the Pervasive SQL server resides 2 31 Using Pervasive SQL Figure 2 15 Choosing a Computer Name Computer name Test Gk Cancel 3 Do one of the following a Type the server name in the Computer name field and click OK b If you are unsure of the server name click the button located to the right of the name field and browse from the Network list that appears Click on the desired computer name then click OK Figure 2 16 Choosing a Computer Name from a Network List Browse for Computer 2 x Select engine to be connected Dquaglint Dquaglin2k Dtan_2 Dtan2k Dzippe Ebserver Elucke2k Emagee Ememilla_ws Eric laptop Essbase Gbeck Gdillon nt 4 Backin the main screen of PCC double click the icon representing the server you are working with Then double click the Databases folder associated with your server 5 Inspect the databases that are listed to determine whether the database you wish to access has already been set up with an Engine DSN If the database already appears then it already has an Engine DSN and you need only set up the client machines with Client DSNs You are finished with this procedure Go to Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 for instructions on how to set up the client machines with Client DSNs 2 32 Set
270. me examples of a database are m A telephone book Each entry in the phone book consists of four characteristics first name last name address and phone number m A collection of digital photographs Each picture on your hard disk has two characteristics a file name and the data within the file that represents the image m A list of orchards and the fruit grown by each Each entry in the orchard list might consist of three characteristics orchard name address and date founded The related list of fruits might have five characteristics orchard name fruit name fruit type McIntosh Fuji and so on fruit price and a taste rating In the particular context of this product a database is a specific well defined collection of related information You can probably find one or more databases available on your computer or your network For example you may have a database of information related to vendors from whom you purchase supplies or raw materials and you probably also have a database containing customer or member information Each of these is a distinct well defined collection of related information What is a As citizens of the computer age we are surrounded by collections of Database information databases everywhere we go Unfortunately all this Management data is of no use to anyone without methods to sort it search it System analyze it and keep it current 1 2 Components of Pervasive SQL Understandi
271. ment you want to run See To move the cursor within Query Pane without running any SQL statements on page 6 49 Perform one of the following actions a Click Tools Query Run Current SQL statement in grid or click b Click Tools Query Run Current SQL statement in text or click JE gt SQL Data Manager Tasks Note SQL DM automatically uses the Text Results tab for the results of SQL statements that are not SELECT statements Only SELECT statements use the Grid Results tab To run all SQL statements A database must be open and one or more SQL statements must exist in Query Pane before you can run all statements Two or more SQL statements in Query Pane must be delimited See To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 1 gt Click Tools Query Run All SQL Statement or click f To stop running SQL statements Click Tools Query gt Stop or click The statement indicator positions to the statement that was being run when the interruption occurred The indicator is the yellow arrow F If you stop the running of SQL statements or if execution stops because of an error the Text Results tab lists the statement that was last run Knowing the last statement run can help you troubleshoot problems To continue running SQL statements that were stopped Click Tools Query gt Continue Execution of the SQL statements continues with the statement that contains the statement i
272. mns _ Student_ID Transact ion_Number J All columns _ Student_ID Transact ion_Number 25 Click Tools Query Builder gt Group By or click E The Group By column appears on the grid the Group By symbol is added to the Billing table for the Amount_Owed column and the SQL statement now contains a Group By clause E illing LJ All columns _ Student_ID O Transact ion_Number Log Eo Amount_Owed SELECT Billing Amount_Owed FROM Billing GROUP BY Billing Amount_Owed 6 71 SQL Data Manager 26 Position the mouse pointer in the Group by cell for Billing Amount_Owed then press and hold down the left mouse button 27 Click AVG for average from the list then press the Tab key Query Pane now contains a query that determines the average amount owned by students Column Table Result Order by Biling Amount_Owe Biling amp AVG O Criteria SELECT AVG Billing Amount_Owed FROM Billing Notice that the Group By part of the clause went away when an aggregate function AVG was specified for the column If you also want to group by the column position the mouse pointer in the empty cell below Billing Amount_Owed then press and hold down the left mouse button From the list click Billing Amount_Owed The Group by column shows GROUP BY and the statement
273. n Click File Save or click J Click Yes to save the Table Designer information to catalog files The save action deletes the column gt To set a column name See also Naming Conventions in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell ira b A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected 5 41 Table Designer 5 42 Click in the Column Name grid cell Delete the existing column name use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete Type the name you want The name can be alpha numeric 20 characters or less The name can have spaces but if spaces are included you must always enclose the name in quotes whenever using the name in SQL statements For this reason Pervasive recommends avoiding spaces Also avoid using reserved words for column names See Reserved Words in SQL Engine Reference gt To set a column data type The data in your database is converted if you change a column data type For a listing of data types see Pervasive SQL Supported Data Types on page A 2 in SQL Engine Reference This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designe
274. n Related Information Query Shows or hides Query Builder Query Builder Grid on Builder Grid page 6 14 Grid command or fel icon A database must be open to enable this command or icon To show or hide Query Builder Grid on page 6 62 To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder on page 6 76 To build an INSERT statement with Query Builder on page 6 79 To build a DELETE statement with Query Builder on page 6 82 Set Font command Set the font family style size and script The font Query Pane on page 6 8 Or characteristics apply to all text To set the font for Query A icon in Query Pane By default Pane on page 6 56 SQL DM sets the font characteristics to Courier Regular 10 Western script Word Wrap Wraps text within Query Pane To wrap text within Query A checkmark beside the command indicates that word wrap is active Pane on page 6 52 Tools menu Provides the following commands Query Query Builder Active Grid Properties GUI Object SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference Description Related Information Query Provides the following commands Run Current SQL Statement in Grid Run Current SQL Statement in Text Run All SQL Statements Stop Continue Clear Run Current SQL Statement
275. n commands and wizards Table Designer contains the following tabbed dialogs that you use as work areas Columns m Indexes m Statistics Btrieve Figure 5 1 Tabbed Dialogs in Table Designer Pervasive Table Designer DEMODATA Billing Ele Edit View Tools Help Bao RAAT Size Position Decimal Column name Indexes Statistics Btrieve You select a tabbed dialog by clicking on its tab Table Designer 5 4 Columns Tab The Columns tab lets you add and modify columns when Table Designer is in linked mode When Table Designer is in unlinked mode the Columns tab is read only See Modes on page 5 5 The information on the Columns tab directly corresponds to the information on the Btrieve tab This correspondence lets you see the Btrieve equivalents on the Btrieve tab The Btrieve tab appears when Table Designer is in unlinked mode See Columns Tab on page 5 18 for a description of the areas on the Columns tab See Columns Tasks on page 5 29 for the tasks that you perform on the tab Indexes Tab The Indexes tab lets you add and modify indexes and index segments When Table Designer is in unlinked mode the index changes affect only the data definitional files See Modes on page 5 5 See Indexes Tab on page 5 20 for a description of the areas on the tab See Indexes Tasks on page 5 29 for the tasks that you perform on the tab Sta
276. n existing database on the server click the Get DSN List button and select the desired DSN from the drop down list In the Server area Data Source Name refers to an Engine DSN on the server computer 2 44 Setting Up Client Access If no databases appear in the drop down list either you selected the wrong server or you need to have your system administrator name the server databases and create Engine DSNs for each of them before you can access them 10 Click OK 11 You can now set up another Client DSN or click OK to exit the ODBC Administrator gt Setting Up a Client DSN on a Linux Workstation While it is possible to access a database from a Linux server by a Linux client there are no Pervasive SQL utilities except dsnada that can be used on the client A Linux client configuration would be used for independent applications such as web applications To add a client data source execute the following command dsnadd dsn myDSN desc datasource host psqlhost sdsn svDSN myDSN is a name you want to assign to the new Client DSN datasource is any string to describe the data source psqlhost is the name of the network host where your Pervasive SQL database resides svDSN is the name of the Engine DSN on the Pervasive SQL host Note The datasource on the server must be named first For example to create a Client DSN named TEST on host NewDev where the Engine DSN name for the database is NewTest type dsnadd
277. nal and relational interfaces and the equivalent ODBC data types You may use any data types listed in Pervasive SQL Supported Data Types and that appear in the Type selection list on the Columns tab or the Btrieve tab The following data types are supported by the relational interface as read only data types They cannot be created in an SQL statement VAR a NOTE a WSTRING a WZSTRING The ability to modify the null attribute of a column is subject to the following restrictions m The target column cannot have a PRIMARY FOREIGN KEY constraint defined on it If converting the old type to the new type causes an overflow arithmetic or size the ALTER TABLE operation is aborted m Ifa nullable column contains NULL values the column cannot be changed to a non nullable column If you must change the data type of a key column you can do so by deleting the index key changing the data type and re adding the key Keep in mind that you must ensure that all associated index key columns in the database remain synchronized For example if you have a primary index key in table T1 that is referenced by foreign keys in tables T2 and T3 you must first delete the foreign keys Then you delete the primary key and change all three columns to the same data type Finally you must re add the primary key and then the foreign keys For additional information on nulls see the following m Null Conversion on page 15 2 in
278. nal information about nulls see Null Conversion on page 15 2 in Advanced Operations Guide INSERT on page 3 85 in SQL Engine Reference and Null Value in the Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Table Designer Tasks Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell k b A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click the option box in the Null grid cell You can allow nulls only for applicable data types A shaded square indicates that null values do not apply to the data type A checkmark in the box indicates that nulls are allowed for the column Lack of a checkmark indicates that the column cannot be blank that is for every record the column must contain a value other than null Option Box State Meaning Nulls allowed O Nulls disallowed O Nulls do not apply Also see Null Values on page 5 6 gt To set case sensitivity for a column Case sensitivity does not apply if the key uses an alternate collating sequence ACS You cannot specify case sensitivity and use an ACS This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 Click on the grid indicator cell
279. name with data encryption listFile is the name of the text file containing the pathnames of files to be included in either the endbu or startbu operations These pathnames must be separated by a space or end of line marker outputFile is the path name of the data file into which you want to insert records The output file can be empty or have existing data owner is the owner of any specified files if any Can be used more than once in acommand line when more than one file is specified For example copy sourceFile outputFile Oowner1 Oowner2 The MKDE enables you to restrict access to a file by specifying an owner name Since owner names are optional the files you use with this utility may or may not require an owner name Owner names are case sensitive Available Utilities sourceFile is the path_name of an existing data file except when using the create command which creates an empty data file Generally refers to a Pervasive SQL file unformattedFile is the pathname of an ASCII sequential file Examples The following command creates a Pervasive SQL formatted file named patients btr using the description provided in the BUILD dsc description file butil create patients btr BUILD dsc The following command copies the records in patients btr to newpats btr The patients btr input file does not require an owner name but the newpats btr output file uses the owner name Pam o butil copy patients b
280. nd open question and answer periods provided throughout the conferences For more information see http www pervasive com training calendar index asp 10 7 Pervasive SQL Resources and Contacts Subscription Based E mail Services 10 8 TechWire and NewsWire are newsletters on all things Pervasive learn about Beta cycles and releases Service Pack releases current topics FYIs FAQs Pervasive Software Events in your area trade shows where you can find us and much more To subscribe to these free e mail services see the following website http www pervasive com support subscription asp DevTalk DevTalk Pervasive Software s DevTalk discussion forums are a great way to share ideas with other customers get technical questions answered and give feedback directly to Pervasive Software http www pervasive com devtalk 10 9 Pervasive SQL Resources and Contacts Newsgroup 10 10 Many Pervasive SQL customers enjoy participation in a newsgroup a learning environment in which users help users with some participation by Pervasive Software The newsgroup is managed by the end user community posting and answering questions as they wish Pervasive Software is represented in the worldwide network of news discussion groups at news comp databases btrieve E Mail Contacts E Mail Contacts Pervasive Software welcomes your comments suggestions and requests for assistance via e mail Please
281. ndicator Note that you may move to a statement after execution stops For example suppose execution stops at statement 50 in a script that contains 100 statements You could click on statement 60 and continue execution from there Unless you move the statement indicator execution continues with the next statement following the one that last ran To set the font for grid results or text results Setting the font affects the font used in the Query Pane the Grid Results tab and the Text Results tab 6 57 SQL Data Manager 6 58 1 Perform one of the following actions a Click View gt Set Font b Right click within the Grid Results tab or the Text Results tab then click Font 2 Specify the desired font characteristics such as style and size 3 Click OK gt To work with grid results 1 Click the Grid Results tab After the grid has been populated by a SELECT statement you may directly update your database data by changing the values in an active grid You must have the proper table permissions to affect the database data The grid must be active before you can change values in cells See To set Grid Results to allow changes to database data on page 6 58 gt To set Grid Results to allow changes to database data 1 Note A grid that allows changes to database data is referred to as active This means that if you change data in one of the grid cells you change the data in your database provi
282. nding ID number Determine from your database the average amount owed by the students m Find which persons in your database are also on the faculty and determine the department in which the faculty member teaches and the salary of the faculty member The database used for this task is the sample database provided with Pervasive SQL named DEMODATA DEMODATA is located by default in the folder PVSW demodata This task assumes the following m You have reviewed these sections in this chapter SQL Data Manager Concepts on page 6 2 and SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference on page 6 16 SQL DM is running see To start SQL DM as a stand alone application on page 6 42 or To start SQL DM from PCC on page 6 43 m The database DEMODATA is open see To open a database on page 6 44 Both Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid are hidden see To show or hide Query Builder Diagram on page 6 62 and To show or hide Query Builder Grid on page 6 62 Notables are open in Query Builder Diagram see To remove a table from Query Builder Diagram on page 6 87 Your first goal is to obtain the ID number first name and last name of all persons in your database with a first name of James or Lisa 6 63 SQL Data Manager 6 64 and whose last name begins with an N 0 P Q R S or T Once you have the correct records you need to sort them by
283. ner command creates an owner for a Pervasive SQL formatted file and assigns an access restriction level to that owner Available Utilities For more information about owner names see Advanced Operations Guide sindex sourceFile lt descriptionFile SYSKEY gt keyNumber Oowner The sindex command creates an additional index for an existing Pervasive SQL formatted file The key number of the new index is one higher than the previous highest key number of the data file An exception is if a drop command previously removed an index without renumbering the remaining keys thus producing an unused key number In this case the new index receives the first unused number Before you can use the sindex command you must create a description file to key specifications for the index keyNumber is used when you do not want to save records using the default of the lowest key number startbu lt sourceFile listFile gt The startbu command places a file or set of files into continuous operation for backup purposes To back up files using continuous operation first issue the butil startbu command followed by the data file or set of data files Next run your backup program Then issue the butil endbu command to stop continuous operation When you place a data file into continuous operation mode the MKDE creates a temporary file with the same name as the data file but with a extension Therefore do not create multiple da
284. ng Data upgraded from Btrieve v6 x or earlier to Pervasive SQL V8 Now get error messages telling me that a file is inaccessible when everybody else can get to it What s wrong page 9 19 have files sitting on the server that are shared and yet Pervasive SQL cannot read them What s wrong page 9 19 am using SQL queries to create a definition for an old table The resulting record size is off Why page 9 20 want to convert my data file version from 8 back to file format version 7 6 or 5 How do do this page 9 20 ODBC and DDFs How can tell if can use ODBC to access my data files page 9 21 How can a hard coded filepath in a DDF be changed page 9 21 have DDFs from Scalable SQL 3 01 Are they compatible with Pervasive SQL V8 page 9 21 What is the best way to ensure that my data dictionaries DDFs are safe page 9 22 How can tell whether have non standard DDFs page 9 22 Can mix and match DDFs from different databases page 9 23 What happened to DDF Builder and DDF Sniffer page 9 23 Does Pervasive Control Center have the same functions as DDF Sniffer Namely can PCC read a Btrieve data file without DDFs and analyze the file to help me build DDFs page 9 23 How do set up ODBC on a NetWare server so that can perform relational operations page 9 23 have two similar Btrieve files and created a DDF for the first one Since they are similar can
285. ng Pervasive SQL A database management system or DBMS is a computer program designed to manage large amounts of data and to allow other computer programs and people to interact with the data A DBMS can also be referred to informally as a database engine or simply an engine A DBMS performs the following tasks Controls access to the data The DBMS can act as a watchdog to prevent the wrong people from using the data m Structures the data so it can be interpreted by other applications The DBMS ensures that all the data adheres to the database structure so that other computer programs can work with the data using common methods m Keeps the data safe and prevents it from getting garbled or lost The DBMS facilitates backing up the data in case of catastrophic loss and also accesses it in a consistent manner to prevent the data from suffering inadvertent damage a Makes it easy to add new information find it update it and delete it The DBMS readily accepts new data and provides tools that you can use to locate update and remove information as you see fit It verifies that the data inserted fits within defined attributes for the database fields a Allows you to analyze relationships among different sets of data The DBMS stores the data in a way that allows you to examine how any piece of data relates to any other piece of data In summary the DBMS organizes your data keeps it safe and helps you to use it and understand it
286. ngine is accepting remote communication requests In PCC use Configuration to make sure that the remote database engine is configured to accept remote requests If you are having difficulty accessing a Windows NT server engine remotely then you must use Configuration at the server itself You must have administrative permission on the server or membership in the Pervasive_Admin group in order to do so Connect to the server in PCC double click Configuration for the target server then choose Server Access Accept Remote Request Be sure the value is set to On You can now rule out the possibility the server is not accepting remote requests Note If your application uses pure Btrieve access only without ODBC then skip this step If everything checks out so far but you still cannot get to the data you want to access make sure a server DSN has been set up for your target data Using PCC connect to the server open the Databases folder for that server and inspect the databases that are present Make sure one of the databases represents the data you want to access If so then a server DSN has been created for your data If you do not find the data you want to access but you know it is on the server then most likely you need to set up a DSN for the given data You must have administrative rights on the server or be a member of the Pervasive_Admin group to do so Basic Troubleshooting 9 6 Right click on the Databases
287. ngines and clients only if the clients are the same version as or newer than the engines When prompted by this message if you choose not to run PSA and archive your old client components and install a newer client you can expect the product to behave unpredictably until the client version is equal to or greater than the engine version can t get to my data on the server engine If you cannot get to data on the server engine your most likely causes are m The server computer is down or the network has been interrupted You do not have operating system rights to access the server or you are not logged into the correct network m The client requester is not enabled m The database server engine is not installed or not running m The database server is not accepting remote connections m The remote database does not have a DSN set up to advertise on the network m The local client does not have a DSN to access the server m The client or server network configuration is wrong gt To determine the actual cause of the failure Follow the steps below to rule out certain root causes and narrow down the possible sources of failure 1 From a Windows client double click Network Neighborhood and see if you can find the server computer that you want to connect to If you can see the server you can rule out that the server is down or disconnected from the network 2 Next try to map a drive to the file server or open a shared file
288. nistrator This step assumes that License Administrator was installed as part of a Pervasive SQL default installation A vendor application that uses an embedded database engine may require that you start License Administrator with different menu commands The GUI executable is named guilcadm exe The utility connects to the local computer on which the database engine is running If the computer is not the one you want select a different computer as described in To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 gt To Select a Computer for License Administration The database engine must be running on the computer you specify in order for License Administrator to connect to the engine 1 In the Computer Name field type the name of the computer for which you want to administer database licenses As an alternative to typing a computer name you may click Select Engine to display a list of network computers Expand the list of computers as needed click the plus sign Click on the computer for which you want to administer database licenses then click OK 4 1 License Administrator 4 12 2 Click Connect or press Enter License Administrator accesses the specified computer to determine the type of license required One of three actions then occurs If the selected computer is running a Pervasive SQL release issued after Pervasive SQL 2000i and if you are logged in to the computer License Admi
289. nistrator connects to the database engine The computer name appears in the License Administrator title bar and in the Computer Name field If the selected computer is running a Pervasive SQL release issued after Pervasive SQL 2000i and if you are not logged in to the computer a dialog appears from which you log in to the operating system Note that you are logging in to the operating system and not to the database engine On the login dialog type the name of an operating system user for User Name The user must have administrative privileges for the database engine For Password type the appropriate password for the user name you specified Click Login The computer name appears in the License Administrator title bar and in the Computer Name field If the selected computer is running Pervasive SQL 2000i or a prior release a message displays informing you that License Administrator does not support the prior release The message instructs you to use the legacy utility User Count Administrator to work with the older license type User Count Administrator is installed as part of the prior release s database engine License Administrator Tasks Note Pervasive SQL 2000i and prior releases use a different type of license License Administrator automatically detects the license type on the machine being accessed For Pervasive SQL 2000i and prior releases License Administrator gives you the option of starting the legacy utility User C
290. nsactional service gt To stop the database services on Windows NT or 2000 A O N by using PCC Click Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt Control Center In the Namespace click on a registered engine Click Action gt Tasks Do one of the following a Click Stop All Pervasive Services to stop both the relational and transactional services b Click Stop Relational Service to stop the relational service c Click Stop Transactional Service to stop the transactional service To start the Workgroup Engine on Windows Click Start Programs Pervasive SQL V8 Engines Pervasive SQL Workgroup Engine To stop the Workgroup Engine on Windows On the Windows taskbar right click the Pervasive Database icon amp Click Stop Engines and Fxit Note You will receive a warning message when trying to stop the engine if any of the following is true There are active clients No activity took place since the engine loaded 10 seconds has not elapsed since the last operation took place 2 7 Using Pervasive SQL Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on NetWare 2 8 gt To start the Database Engine on NetWare Note You must load AFTER311 NLM before you load the MicroKernel Enter each of the following commands separately from the console window BSTART MGRSTART Pervasive SQL supports NetWare Storage Services NSS volumes on NetWare 5 0 and up NSS volumes must be mou
291. nted before starting the database engine That is before accessing the server with the database engine As an example LOAD NSS MOUNT ALL SYS ETC INITSYS NCF BSTART MGRSTART Also database updates performed against data files on NSS volumes may run more slowly than with earlier versions of NetWare As noted in Novell TID 2952147 http www novell com NSS is optimized for reading files Updates will almost always perform a little faster on the legacy file system Based on this information you may wish to store frequently updated data files on regular NetWare volumes rather than NSS volumes gt To stop the Database Engine on NetWare Enter each of the following commands separately from the console window MGRSTOP BSTOP Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on Linux Starting and Stopping the Database Engine Note Never enter the BSTOP command before the MGRSTOP command Tip If NetWare does not allow you to stop the engines with these commands because of dependencies on other modules first enter the command BTRV UNLINK then perform the commands noted above In Linux the database engine runs as a daemon The daemon is loaded as part of the installation process and is set to be always available if you followed the Typical installation You must be logged in as the root user to start and stop the Pervasive SQL V8 daemon process We recommend that you use the shell script ps
292. o set up the client machines with Client DSNs If you do not see the database you wish to access proceed with step 6 6 Create a New Database for the engine Right click on the database folder underneath the engine name then click New Database 2 26 Setting Up Database Access on Windows If you are working with a Server engine and you are not logged into the server as a user with system administrator permissions you see the login screen shown below Figure 2 10 Create an Engine DSN and Connect to a Server Database To begin with creating database you must specify a Pervasive SQL server and database interface type Server Nwa z Interface Engine is User name Password l If you are using Workgroup engine or you are using the server console or are already logged into the server with system administrator permissions skip to step 8 as shown in Figure 2 11 The Server field should indicate the server that you are currently working with Choose Engine for the Interface type and enter your operating system user name and password for that server in the User name and Password boxes Remember that you must have full administrator level rights on the server operating system to be able to complete this task Click Next In the Name field specify an Engine DSN name for the database This name will appear in the database listing in PCC after you complete this task In the Directory field specif
293. o the remote data files Using Pervasive Control Center double click the icon that represents the server where the data files are located Double click Configuration for that server Double click Server then click Compatibility Click on Create File Version and set the value to the file version to which you want to convert From the menu choose Edit Apply Restart the database engine These changes result in new files created to be in the version selected From the Start menu choose Programs Pervasive SQL V8 Other Utilities Maintenance to start Btrieve Maintenance Utility Within this program choose Options File Information Editor Click Load Information and choose the data file that you want to convert Click Create and specify the name of the new empty data file you want to create with the older version format Click OK to create the file Close the File Information Editor window but do not exit Btrieve Maintenance Utility From the menu select Data Copy Enter the name of the source data file and the name of the target data file your newly created file with the older version file format Click Execute to copy the records into the older version file After the copying has finished if you need the new data file to have the same name as it did previously save your ODBC and DDFs Frequently Asked Questions original data file with a different name then save your new file using the original file name How can
294. om FROM Room Why do you need both the building name and the room number The Room table contains several records for the Boerner Building If your only deletion criteria was building name you would delete records you need to keep Similarly Room contains records for room 100 in other buildings so you would not want to delete all rooms with room number 100 DC 8 Inthe Criteria column for Room Building_Name type Boerner Building and press the Tab key DC 9 Inthe Criteria column for Room Number type 100 and press the Tab key SQL DM should show something similar to the following 1 All columns Building_Name Number Capacity Type Column Table Criteria or or or Room Building_Name Room Boerner Building Room Number Room 100 6 85 SQL Data Manager 6 86 10 Click Tools Query Run Current SQL Statement in Text or click IE The Text Results tab contains the following result SQL statement script has executed successfully 1 row s were affected Now look at the data in the Room table again to verify that you deleted the record 11 Set Query Builder to build a SELECT statement change the query type to Select 12 Click the column All columns then run the SQL statement for output to the Grid Results tab 13 Scroll the results gr
295. on last minute changes may be included in the man pages after this guide has been published Available Utilities Available Utilities The following utilities are available in Pervasive SQL V8 These are specific to the Linux product and are not found in the Advanced Operations Guide btadmin Creates and administers database user names and passwords butil Repairs and manipulates data files clilcadm Applies and administers user licenses dbmaint Creates and administers named databases dsnadd Creates and administers Engine DSNs on the server mkded MicroKernel Database Engine daemon sqlmgr SQL Relational Database Engine daemon 8 5 Linux Supplementary Documentation btadmin Description The btadmin utility is used to create and update the flat file btpasswd which stores user names and passwords for authentication of Pervasive SQL users Users given administrator rights can monitor engine status and configure the engine remotely Synopsis btadmin p password a a r username Options p Specify the password If this option is not specified you will be prompted to enter the password a Gives administrator rights for this user a Removes administrator rights for this user r Remove user name from btpasswd file username Creates or updates the username in the btpasswa file If username does not exist in this file an entry is added If it does exist the password is changed Se
296. on the server If you can successfully connect to the file server and create a file on the mapped drive then you can rule out lack of operating system rights You can also rule out failure to login to the correct network For example if you have both NetWare and Basic Troubleshooting 1 Windows NT servers in your environment it is possible to be logged into the NetWare network but not the Windows NT network or vice versa If yowre not logged into a particular network you can t access the servers on that network at all Note If you are trying to create a new database on the server to use Monitor against the remote server engine or to use Configuration against the remote server engine you must have administrative rights on the server or be a member of Pervasive_Admin A simple drive mapping or shared file read will not tell you whether you have administrative rights This means you may be able to connect to the file server but you still may not be able to connect to the database engine with Configuration Monitor or Create Database Wizard 3 The next possibility is that the client requester is disabled Choose Start Programs Pervasive SQL V8 Control Center to start PCC Using PCC double click the icon that represents your local client computer Double click Configuration and choose Client Access Use Remote MicroKernel Engine Make sure this setting is set to On You can now rule out the requester as the s
297. on a given object right click on the object and choose from the list of actions in the Tasks menu An Overview of Pervasive Control Center Some utilities have not yet been tightly integrated within the PCC framework However they may still be started from within PCC by selecting them through the Tools menu which is available when anything but the Control Center Root is selected The non integrated tools that may be selected this way include Function Executor Pervasive System Analyzer Gateway Locator Workgroup only Maintenance Monitor Rebuild License Administrator Utility Custom third party tools 3 3 Using the Pervasive Control Center Registering or Removing a Server You can use Pervasive Control Center PCC to work with database engines that are on your machine or with remote server engines To work with a remote server engine you must introduce it to PCC This procedure is called registering the server gt To register a remote server with PCC 1 Open PCC Choose Start Programs Pervasive SQL V8 Control Center 2 Within PCC double click on Pervasive SQL Engines to see a list of engines that are already registered 3 Right click on Pervasive SQL Engines and select Register New Engine Type in or choose the server you want to connect to Figure 3 2 Registering a New Engine fa Pervasive SQL Control Center Action View Tools Help jes OlS A me a Control Center Root Name
298. on page 6 50 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 Moves the statement indicator Query Pane on page 6 8 to the last line in Query Pane pl and runs that statement The To move the cursor within statement indicator the yellow Query Pane without arrow in the left margin of running any SQL Query Pane indicates the statements on page 6 49 statement in which the cursor is located To move the cursor within Query Pane and run the SQL statement to which it moves on page 6 50 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 Query Pane Accepts SQL statements Query Pane on page 6 8 typed into the pane or added with Query Builder By default Query Pane is shown it may be shown or hidden To create an SQL query or script on page 6 44 To show or hide Query Pane on page 6 49 6 29 SQL Data Manager 6 30 GUI Object Description Related Information Results Grid Shows in a spreadsheet like format the output of SELECT statements Grid Results Tab on page 6 4 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 To set Grid Results to allow changes to database data on page 6 58 To copy data from Grid Results tab to clipboard on page 6 60 Grid Results tab Displays the Results Grid tabbed dialog Grid Results Tab on page 6 4 To work with grid results on page 6 58 Text Results tab Display
299. onal information might also be required and then click OK Note To define a new data source for any installed ODBC driver click New and then follow the instructions in the Create New Data Source dialog box and the dialog boxes that follow it before proceeding Tip If you are linking a table select the Save The Login ID And Password check box to store the information for the table in the current database so that users will not have to enter it each time If you leave the check box cleared all users must enter the logon ID and password every time they open the table with Microsoft Access in each new session Your network administrator can also choose to disable this check box requiring all users to enter a user name and password each time they connect to the database If the database you want does not appear in the ODBC Source list see Before You Begin on page 2 46 The Access Link Tables dialog box opens Click each table that you want to import or link and then click OK Note Microsoft Access cannot display more than 256 columns in a table If you need to display more than 256 columns you may wish to use a different tool Linking to your Pervasive data is complete As shown in the figure below Access presents you with options for designing the new database View the linked tables by double clicking on the table name Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications Figure 2 35 Using Pervasive Data in
300. onomical as you increase the number of users Both engines are fully compatible with any Pervasive SQL database To upgrade or downgrade from one package to another requires no changes to your application or to your database Simply install the new package and you are ready to go Both engines were designed with a common architecture and offer the same features In addition there are several add on packages that you can use to expand the capabilities of your database This section explains the different packages The Workgroup engine offers a peer to peer network setup designed for stand alone single user installations up to small workgroups The Workgroup engine is the only engine that offers multi user access to Pervasive SQL data located on a computer where no database engine is installed For example you can share data files stored on a NetWare or Windows server where no database server is installed using a Workgroup engine installed on a different computer A major difference between Workgroup and Server is the Gateway feature of Workgroup When there is no database engine running on the computer where the data is located normally the first database engine to connect to that data handles all requests from other engines to access that data This feature can be configured so that the same Workgroup engine always services that data or the Gateway designation can be allowed to float based on which Workgroup engine connects to the da
301. oose the components that you wish to restore to their previous location If there is a version of Pervasive SQL installed at the restore destination directory you should uninstall or archive the active Pervasive SQL product first before restoring the archived component Delete Components or Archives This module allows you to delete files previously archived by PSA or to delete components and registry settings made by Pervasive products You need to have administrative rights on the system in order to delete components and archives PSA Concepts View Components This module allows you to view all Pervasive components and any other files you specify You can add additional components to the search list Their versions usage status file size and location is displayed If duplicate files are found they are highlighted so you can resolve the potential conflict The View Components module allows you to scan a machine for Pervasive components and see which of these components are loaded Testing Active Installations This module allows you to test the network connectivity between a Pervasive SQL client and server the functionality of the transactional engine and the functionality of the relational engine In the case of errors PSA gives you detailed troubleshooting information to help you resolve the problem The following sections discuss the three areas of testing Network The Network Communication tests are performed in or
302. opers using Pervasive SQL for their database applications On the Pervasive FTP site you can find practical resources such as downloadable updates and patches to our product offerings as well as additional debugging tools documentation third party tools and beta releases ftp ftp pervasive com support 10 5 Pervasive SQL Resources and Contacts Online Documentation Pervasive Library 10 6 The latest versions of Pervasive SQL product manuals in CHM HLP and PDF format are available for download from the Pervasive Software web site These titles include Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server or Workgroup edition What s New in Pervasive SQL for current release Pervasive SQL User s Guide SQL Engine Reference Status Codes and Messages Pervasive Products and Services Advanced Operations Guide http www pervasive com support technical online_manuals asp You can also view all the current documentation online along with technical papers discussion forums and other resources http www pervasive com library Webinars Webinars Pervasive Software offers a series of Webinars web based seminars that are focused on singular subjects and have been designed to maximize the transfer of knowledge to our partners and developers without expense of travel This forum also offers opportunities for live contact with subject matter experts from Pervasive Software in lively discussions during informal a
303. or ODBC Error SQLSTATE S1000 Native error code 4994 The record has a key field containing a duplicate value Btrieve Error 5 A stored procedure already exists with the same name as the one you are trying to create Solution Change the name of the stored procedure Sometimes when you create a procedure with a SQL statement you may not get a message from PCC confirming that the statement was successful Then when you run the statement again thinking that it was not created you receive this error code To find out whether or not the procedure was actually created you can get a list of the defined stored procedures by running this statement select from XSproc 9 11 Basic Troubleshooting Frequently Asked Questions 9 12 This section answers some of the questions that customers ask most frequently A list of the questions is provided below Installation Will lose my data files if uninstall my existing version of the product or install a new version page 9 15 What type of client install should do typical custom or network page 9 15 How can I be sure what service pack level of client am running page 9 15 Is Pervasive SQL supported on a Terminal Server page 9 15 Can install Pervasive SQL in a Failover environment or page 9 15 Can install Pervasive SQL in a Clustering environment page 9 15 Can install Pervasive SQL in a Load Balancing environment page 9 16 0 gt
304. or detailed information about segments see Segmentation in the Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK When Table Designer is in unlinked mode index changes affect only the data definition files 1 Click View gt Indexes or click the Indexes tab 5 49 Table Designer 5 50 4 Click on the leftmost cell of an existing index or an existing index segment Click Edit gt Insert Segment or click A new index segment is inserted below the existing index or segment A blue asterisk appears in the leftmost cell The new segment is not added until you save the database The following image shows an index segment inserted Ele Edit View Tools Help Dv se xs Be Index name Column Student_Trans Student_ID Transaction_Number Log Registrar_ID Student_ID Duplicate Modifiable Sort Asc Asc Asc Asc Ase ooo000 O00008 Click File Save or click A The save action adds the index segment gt To delete an index segment When Table Designer is in unlinked mode index changes affect only the data definition files 1 2 Click Edit Indexes or click the Indexes tab Click on the grid indicator cell for the index segment you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell ifa TE A solid right point triangle indicates that the index segment is selected Click Edit Delete Segment
305. or install a new version When you uninstall Pervasive SQL or install a new version of Pervasive SQL your data files and DDFs are never affected Even when Pervasive System Analyzer archives Pervasive SQL files or even if you have your data files in the same directory as Pervasive SQL files your data files are not affected What type of client install should do typical custom or network If you are not sure always select typical This option performs a standardized installation which makes it easier to troubleshoot if problems occur How can I be sure what service pack level of client am running If you are using Pervasive SQL V8 start Monitor or Maintenance choose Help About from the menu and check the Build Level Is Pervasive SQL supported on a Terminal Server Support for both the Server and Workgroup engines on Terminal Server has been available since Pervasive SQL 2000i SP 4 Pervasive SQL 2000i SP 3 provided support for the Server engine Pervasive SQL 2000i SP 2 provided supports only for the client software Can install Pervasive SQL in a Failover environment or Can install Pervasive SQL in a Clustering environment Pervasive SQL 2000i SP3 or later can be installed into a Windows 2000 Advanced Server Cluster or into a Novell NetWare 5 1 Cluster Earlier versions of Pervasive SQL are not supported in a Failover or Clustered environment Linux clusters are not supported at this time Basic Tro
306. ore than one DSN that refers to the same DBNAME If the physical location of the data files on the server is changed only the DBNAME needs to be updated All DSNs remain unchanged Btrieve application users Applications that only use Btrieve do not require you to follow the procedures in this section However you must follow these procedures to access Pervasive SQL through ODBC This includes the SQL Data Manager utility and all Microsoft applications If you are not sure whether your application uses ODBC check with your network administrator Pervasive SQL v7 users You must recreate all DSNs created with Pervasive SQL 7 to access them in Pervasive SQL V8 However you do not need to rename existing database names To re create DSNs follow the instructions provides in Deleting DSNs on page 2 52 2 23 Using Pervasive SQL Prerequisitesto Before you begin verify the following Setting up Database Access 2 24 The data files and DDFs already exist If these do not exist ask your network or systems administrator to create them or refer to Advanced Operations Guide for information on creating a database If the data files are located on a remote server you must know the name of the server You must also know the location of the data files on the server If the database already has a DBNAME this information can be used instead of the location of the data files If you do not have this information see your network o
307. ose Get External Data New Database Query as shown below Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications Figure 2 30 Accessing Pervasive Data using Microsoft Excel I aL Eile Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help DSE SRY Ss Ttt s Eiter Subtotals Boon ioo A c B Text to Columns PivotTable and PiyotChart Report Get External Data t Refresh Data ORGCRANA 4 The Choose Data Source box lists the defined data sources for any ODBC drivers that are installed on your computer From this list click on the Client or Server DSN for the Pervasive database you wish to access as shown in the example below Figure 2 31 Excel Display of ODBC Source List Databases Queries OLAP Cubes lt New Data Source gt dBase Files Word If the database you want does not appear in the ODBC Source list see Before You Begin on page 2 46 5 Click OK You may be prompted to login to the Pervasive SQL database If the database is not secure leave the User and Password fields empty Otherwise enter your assigned user name and password 6 The Query Wizard opens Simply follow the wizard to select your options such as which tables to query how to filter and sort the data and how you would like Excel to return the Pervasive data to you for your use 2 47 Using Pervasive SQL Accessing Data gt To access data from Microsoft Access Using Microsoft Open Microso
308. ote z I Column names in first row Line separator CRHLF 7 3 36 Exporting Importing Data Select the box marked Column names at first row if you selected the option Write column names at first row when exported the file Figure 3 24 Click Next when done Indicate what should be done to the data as it is imported The options are to import all of the data and insert it into the table or to specify an SQL statement which gives you control over how the import data fields correspond to the columns in the table Figure 3 28 Import Wizard Specify Table Copy Dialog Box NewT able Alternatively you can click Use SQL statement for import if you would like to use a SQL statement to control how the import file columns correspond to the table columns In the example shown in Figure 3 29 the question marks represent the fields from the source file Select Import into table if you selected the option Export from table Figure 3 25 to import the entire table without filters Figure 3 29 Import Wizard Use SQL Statement for Import Dialog Box 3 37 Using the Pervasive Control Center 3 38 You cannot import fewer fields than exist in the table or in the import file Both the import file and the table must have the same number of columns The only factor you can control with the INSERT statement is how the import file columns correspond to the table columns The first named column receives the data fro
309. ou want to overwrite the archive If you choose to overwrite the newer archive will replace the older one PSA does not differentiate between service pack levels Only one version of each major release 7 3 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA can be archived at one time For example you can archive both Pervasive SQL 7 and Pervasive SQL 2000i SP3 but you could not archive both Pervasive SQL 2000i SP3 and Pervasive SQL 2000i SP4 If you archive an entire product then the configuration settings in the Windows registry are saved as well and can be restored with the whole product Configuration settings are not saved if you archive a portion of a product Note When configuration settings are archived from the Windows registry they are copied and not deleted Restore Archives If the Pervasive System Analyzer PSA found Pervasive archives on your system you can select and restore these archives using this option You need to have administrative rights on the system in order to restore archives All archived files are written to the pvswarch subdirectory of the drive that was selected when the archive was performed For example if the archive was performed to drive D then Pervasive archived files are stored at D PVSWARCH PSA scans this directory and displays the components available for restoration as shown in the following screen If you do not wish to restore all components then select Restore selected files and ch
310. ount Administrator to work with the older license type Refer to the Pervasive SQL documentation of the prior version for how to use User Count Administrator Pervasive SQL documentation is located on the Web at http www pervasive com support technical online_manuals asp To Apply a License Key Ensure that the computer name in the title bar is the computer for which you want to add a database license If not select a different computer as described in To Select a Computer for License Administration on page 4 11 Type or paste the license key into the License Key field Lowercase letters are automatically converted to uppercase Paste the key into the first the left field License Administrator Utility Computer Name fs Connect ji Applied Licenses The key is distributed across the remaining fields License Key fi 2824 faskcL4 fasor2 zzo 334 Press Enter or click Apply License Key The License Key field is cleared if the license key is successfully applied Verify the new license information that appears in the Applied Licenses list If necessary click Refresh to refresh the list 4 13 License Administrator 4 14 The license is now active You do not have to restart the database engine gt To Remove a License 1 1 Note Temporary licenses cannot be removed They expire at the end of their activation period The trial license included with the
311. ource of the problem 4 Next verify that Pervasive SQL is installed and running on the target server On Windows NT go to the server console and open the Services Control Panel and verify that Pervasive SQL relational and Pervasive SQL transactional have been started If not start these services On Windows 2000 go to the server console and open the Administrative Tools Control Panel and then double click on the Services icon Verify that Pervasive SQL relational and Pervasive SQL transactional have been started If not start these services On NetWare enter the command BSTART or MGRSTART at the NetWare prompt If Pervasive SQL is not loaded these commands load Btrieve and the SRDE respectively If Pervasive SQL is already running you receive the message Modules already loaded General Troubleshooting On Linux type the following command at the Linux prompt on the server where the database engine is installed ps e egrep mkded sqlmgr If the output from the command returns at least one line containing the text mkde and at least one line containing the text sqlmgr then Pervasive SQL is running If you do not see these lines then you need to be logged into the root account and start the database engine by entering etc rce d init d psql start You can now be certain that the server engine is installed and running The next step is to ensure that the server e
312. out Pervasive SQL Developer Center Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can research information specifically for application developers using Pervasive SQL About Displays the name and version of SQL DM and the Pervasive SQL copyright information gt To exit SQL DM 1 Click File gt Exit You may also click the X close button in the upper right corner of the GUI If Query Pane contains statements that have not been saved you are prompted to save them Click Yes to save the existing statements specify a file name and location then click Save Click No to discard the existing statements Query Pane Tasks gt To show or hide Query Pane 1 Perform one of the following actions a Click View gt Query Pane b Click A These actions function as a toggle That is if Query Pane is hidden the action shows it and vice versa A database must be open to enable the command or icon gt To move the cursor within Query Pane without running any SQL statements The statement indicator the yellow arrow gt in the left margin of Query Pane indicates the statement in which the cursor is located A statement delimiter is used to separate statements See To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 6 49 SQL Data Manager 6 50 1 Perform one of the following actions to move the cursor in Query Pane a Click on the statement you to which you want to move the cursor b Use th
313. page 5 1 You also use the Create Database Wizard to create Engine and Client DSNs for pre existing databases This allows a database to be accessed using ODBC For information on how to do this see Setting Up ODBC Database Access on page 2 21 Note If you wish to add a database to a Server engine you must have administrative rights on the server operating system If you do not have administrative rights you will not be permitted to add the database gt To add or create a database 1 Within PCC right click on Databases under the machine on which you want to create the database If you do not see the name of the machine where you want to create the database see Registering or Removing a Server on page 3 4 2 Select New Database from the shortcut menu 3 Ona Server engine you may be prompted to login If so supply a user name and password for the server operating system The Create Database Wizard starts with the following dialog box Figure 3 6 Create Database Wizard Dialog Box Name DEMODATA Directory _ E PVSW demodata Bi J Use OEM ANSI Conversion I Use advanced settings Enter the name of the new database and the location where its files will reside 3 10 Adding or Creating a Database Note When creating a database on a remote machine remember that the directory entered in this dialog box must be valid as if it was entered on the remote machine If you are working with a Server engin
314. page 6 88 To remove a table from Query Builder Diagram on page 6 87 6 25 SQL Data Manager 6 26 GUI Object Description Related Information Active Grid Sets the Grid Results grid to active or display only An active grid allows you to change values in the cells which changes the data values in the database provided you have the proper database permissions By default the grid is active To set default behavior for Grid Results tab on page 6 59 Properties Sets the default behavior of the Grid Results grid the SQL statement delimiter and the query time out value To set default behavior for Grid Results tab on page 6 59 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 To set a query time out period on page 6 51 Help menu Provides the following commands How Do Topics SQL Reference Search Documentation What s This Glossary Online Manuals Web Knowledge Base Web Developer Center Web gt gt gt 2 About Pervasive SQL Data Manager How Do I Lists the tasks that you can perform with SQL DM SQL Data Manager Tasks on page 6 40 To display help on page 6 48 SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference GUI Object Description Related Information Topics Lists the documentation topics To display help on page pertaining to SQL DM 6 48 SQL Display
315. pics Table Designer Tasks on for Table Designer page 5 28 To display help on page 5 33 Search Searches for a string To display help on page Documentation throughout the installed set of 5 33 Pervasive SQL documentation What s This Identifies objects in the Table Table Designer GUI Designer GUI Visual Reference on page 5 8 To display help on page 5 33 Glossary Defines terms used in the To display help on page Pervasive SQL documentation and products 5 33 GUI Object Table Designer GUI Visual Reference Description Related Information Online Manuals Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can reference the online manuals To display help on page 5 33 Knowledge Base Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can query the Pervasive SQL Knowledge Base for additional information about Pervasive SQL To display help on page 5 33 Developer Center Directs your browser to To display help on page Web www pervasive com where 5 33 you can research information specifically for application developers using Pervasive SQL About Displays the name and To display help on page version of Table Designer and 5 33 the Pervasive SQL copyright information Columns tab Displays the Columns tab Modes on page 5 5 This tab is read only if Table Designer i
316. ple Pervasive SQL 2000 then all the existing Pervasive components for that release and its configuration settings are archived If you select a partial set of files from a release then those files are archived but the configuration settings for that release are not copied with that archive Restore Archive Tasks ool PSA Tasks Note During an install of a Pervasive SQL engine previous versions of the product are automatically archived for you so that your install can complete without component conflicts After selecting what files to archive select a local drive where you would like to store the archive and click Next to start the archival process To select the drive that contains archives Using the drop down list select the archive drive that contains the archives you would like to restore Click Next to display the archives list See To restore archived files on page 7 17 To restore archived files PSA displays the archived Pervasive components found on your selected archive drive that are available for restoration See To select the drive that contains archives on page 7 17 The archives are grouped by major release on the results screen Choose which archives you want to restore by selecting the appropriate entries in the results list Clear the selection of any archive that you do not want to be restored To understand the restrictions on restoring archives review Notes on Restoring Arch
317. ply to the data type To set case sensitivity for a Btrieve column on page 5 60 5 27 Table Designer Table Designer Tasks This section explains the tasks that you perform with Table Designer The tasks are divided into the following categories Category Description General Tasks Orient you to the overall use of Table Designer Columns Tasks Apply to using the Columns tab Indexes Tasks Apply to using the Indexes tab Statistics Tasks Apply to using the Statistic tab Btrieve Tasks Apply to using the Btrieve tab General Tasks General tasks apply to the overall use of the tool The following table helps you locate a task by category Category Getting Started Databases Tables 5 28 Task To start Table Designer as a stand alone application on page 5 30 To start Table Designer from PCC on page 5 31 To identify open database and table on page 5 31 To work with columns on page 5 32 To work with indexes on page 5 32 To display table statistics on page 5 32 To work with Btrieve data on page 5 32 To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 To display help on page 5 33 To open a database on page 5 33 To create a database on page 5 34 To delete a database on page 5 35 To open a table on page 5 35 To create a table on page 5 36 Columns Tasks Indexes Task
318. ppearing in PCC on your computer Open PCC Choose Start Programs Pervasive SQL V8 Control Center 2 Within PCC double click on Pervasive SQL Engines 3 Right click on the server you want to remove and select Delete PCC disconnects from the server and it is removed from the Namespace Using the Pervasive Control Center Viewing Database Engines Interpreting Engine Status Icons 3 6 Pervasive Control Center PCC provides a unique view of available database engines databases and actual data This section explains how to view these objects in PCC gt To view registered database engines 1 Open PCC Choose Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 Control Center 2 You can view the database engines that you have registered in PCC by double clicking Pervasive SQL Engines in the left hand pane the Namespace of PCC If you want to add more database engines to the list follow the instructions provided in Registering or Removing a Server on page 3 4 By right clicking on a particular database engine you can choose to view its properties refresh its database list or delete it Note If you have engines registered that are not running you may encounter delays in PCC as it periodically attempts to contact these engines To eliminate the delay unregister the dead engines You can minimize the delay by performing the following procedure In PCC right click Pervasive SQL Engines and
319. q1 to start and stop the process However you may start and stop individual daemons by using mkded and sqlmgr gt To start the Database Engine on Linux Enter the following at the command line etc re d init d psql start gt To stop the Database Engine on Linux Enter the following at the command line etc re d init d psql stop 2 9 Using Pervasive SQL Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine Tasks Requiring Administrative Rights How Administrative Rights are Granted This section begins by outlining those Pervasive SQL V8 tasks that require administrative level access at the operating system level and those that do not The section then walks you through the steps to grant a user administrative level access for each of the supported operating systems Note This section only applies to the Server engine unless otherwise noted Administrative level rights are required to m create and configure named databases and tables m view or modify a table design with Table Designer m set engine configuration options view and set engine monitoring values m view certain engine configuration settings To have administrator level access you must possess full administrator level rights on the machine on which the database engine is running a domain administrator for example may lack full permissions on certain local machines or beamember of the operating system group Pervasive_Admin
320. r Action View Tools Help 5 8 s e2 m 2 a 29 Control Center Root Name Pervasive SQL Engings Register New Engine View gt Refresh A dialog is displayed that allows you to choose the machine name where the Pervasive SQL engine resides Figure 2 8 Choosing a Computer Name Computer name 3 Do one of the following 2 25 Using Pervasive SQL a Type a computer name in the Computer name field and click OK b If you are unsure of the computer name click the button located to the right of the name field and browse from the Network list that appears Click on the desired computer name then click OK Figure 2 9 Choosing a Computer Name from a Network List Browse for Computer 2 x Select engine to be connected Dquagiin1 Dquaglin2k Sf Dtan_2 A Dtan2k Dzippe D Ebserver DE Elucke2k Emagee BE Emcmilla_ws Eric laptop Essbase Gbeck Gdillan nt 4 Backin the main screen of PCC double click the icon representing the engine you are working with Then double click the Databases folder associated with the selected engine 5 Inspect the databases that are listed to determine whether the database you wish to access has already been set up with an Engine DSN If the database you wish to access is visible then it already has an Engine DSN You are finished with this procedure Go to Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 for instructions on how t
321. r the yellow arrow in the left margin of Query Pane indicates the statement in which the cursor is located Query Pane on page 6 8 To move the cursor within Query Pane without running any SQL statements on page 6 49 To move the cursor within Query Pane and run the SQL statement to which it moves on page 6 50 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 Moves the statement indicator to the previous line in Query Pane and runs that statement The statement indicator the yellow arrow 5 in the left margin of Query Pane indicates the statement in which the cursor is located Query Pane on page 6 8 To move the cursor within Query Pane without running any SQL statements on page 6 49 To move the cursor within Query Pane and run the SQL statement to which it moves on page 6 50 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference GUI Object Description Related Information Moves the statement indicator Query Pane on page 6 8 to the next line in Query Pane and runs that statement The To move the cursor within statement indicator the yellow Query Pane without arrow in the left margin of running any SQL Query Pane indicates the statements on page 6 49 statement in which the cursor is located To move the cursor within Query Pane and run the SQL statement to which it moves
322. r component Usage Whether the component is currently loaded Version File version of the component Size Size of the component in bytes Date Date on which the component was last modified Location Path of the component on your system 3 If files of the same name are detected the multiple occurrences will be marked with an icon on the left side and highlighted in the list as shown in Figure 7 4 If multiple occurrences of a file are found it does not necessarily represent a problem with your configuration It is an informational message that you can use if you are troubleshooting an issue with components 7 23 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA Test Active Installation Tasks 7 24 Figure 7 4 Multiple Occurrences of a Component Found Module Usage Version Size Date WSOCK32 DLL Loaded 5 0 2195 2871 21KB O8 May 01 C SWINNTSSyst pscl dll Loaded 1 0 100 0 434KB 14 0ct 02 C Program Files pscore dil Loaded 1 0 100 0 106KB 14 0ct 02 C Program Files w3dbav80 dll Not loaded 8 0 100 0 36KB 14 0ct 02 C Program Files PPEOK awa hloat laadad 2 s A A s Multiple copies of this module have been Found Click Help for more information BREW P Tor loaded 6 RE OCTU PY 4 When you see multiple occurrences of a component you may want to adjust the display so that the occurrences sort together in the list To do this click Module at the top of the display and then scroll the resulting list until the modules with the icon
323. r mode on page 5 32 1 a A O N Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell i 2 i A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click in the Type grid cell Open the list for data types click f Scroll to the data type you want Click the data type you want You may also type the first letter of the desired data type to select a data type gt To set a column size Data in your database is truncated if you change the column to a smaller size for the following data types CHAR NUMERIC Table Designer Tasks VARCHAR This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 4 gt Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell aa i A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected Click in the Size grid cell You can set a size only for applicable data types such as CHAR If size is not applicable you will be unable to position the cursor in the Size grid cell Delete the existing size use the Backspace key or select the name and press Delete Type the size you want To set column precision This task requires that Table Designer be in linked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 1 4 Click on the grid indicator cell for the
324. r systems administrator If the data files are located on a remote server and an Engine DSN has not been created on the server you must possess administrator rights on the remote machine that houses the database you wish to access to set up an Engine DSN Setting up local access requires OS system rights to create a System DSN The sections that follow allow you to set up database access as long as the conditions above are met The following topics are provided Setting Up Database Access on Windows on page 2 25 Setting Up Database Access on a NetWare Server on page 2 31 Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server on page 2 37 Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 Setting Up Database Access on Windows Setting Up Database Access on Windows gt To Set Up Database Access on Windows Note If you have not done so already review Prerequisites to Setting up Database Access on page 2 24 before proceeding 1 Open Pervasive Control Center PCC Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt Control Center 2 Double click on Pervasive SQL Engines The PCC Namespace contains a list of database engines that have been registered If you do not see the name of the database engine to which you want to connect you must register the remote engine with PCC To do so right click Pervasive SQL Engines then click Register New Engine Figure 2 7 Registering a New Engine fa Pervasive SQL Control Cente
325. r the data file is available when the MicroKernel needs it Variable Records Shows whether the data file contains variable length records Record Length in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide 5 23 Table Designer 5 24 GUI Object Description Related Information Variable Record Blank Truncation Shows whether blank truncation is enabled If it is the MicroKernel truncates the blanks in variable length records Blank truncation is applicable only if the Variable Records statistic is Yes and Data Compression is set to No Blank Truncation in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide Data Compression Shows whether data compression is enabled If it is the MicroKernel compresses each record it inserts into the data file Data Compression in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide Key Only File Shows the name of the key only file for the table if any A key only file contains no data records but serves as an index to other Btrieve files Key Only Files in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide Index Balancing Shows whether balanced indexing is enabled Index Balancing in Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide FreesSpace Threshold Shows a percentage 5 10 20 or 30 if the data file has a free space threshold The MicroKernel stores the variable length portions of records on their own pages called variable pages separate from the fixed length portions whi
326. ral different messages when attempting to create or connect to databases in PCC This section explains the likely causes for some of the most common error messages This section explains the following messages Cant retrieve database names You don t have access rights for the operation on page 9 8 Unable to connect to the specified remote server Verify that all of the communication components are loaded on the remote server and that there are available sessions and try again on page 9 9 m An error was encountered while connecting to the server on page 9 10 Can t retrieve database names You don t have access rights for the operation This error may occur when you are attempting to create a new database on the server The most likely cause is that you are logged in as an operating system user that has neither administrative rights in the server operating system nor membership in the Pervasive_Admin group on the server Another likely cause is that you forgot to enter a user name and password Solution Be sure to enter a user name and password for the remote operating system You must have administrative rights on the server or be a member of the Pervasive_Admin group in order to create a new database on the server Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine on page 2 10 explains how to set up the Pervasive_Admin group For Windows NT 2000 be sure that you are set up as a local user on the system not a net
327. rchive Tasks 7 16 Other Tasks To specify a different location for the PSA log file page 7 28 To view the log file at the completion of Pervasive System Analyzer tests page 7 29 To determine what version of PSA you are running page 7 29 To choose the search method for PSA Select Analyze System or Archive Components as shown in Figure 7 1 on page 7 12 Select the search method you want the Pervasive System Analyzer PSA to use e Quick Search This method searches the path names included in your user and system s PATH environment variable Advanced Search This method searches locations you specify in the Look in drop down list box Use the button to accurately select the directory location you want PSA to search Select the Include subfolders check box to search each subfolder in the chosen directory Click Next to start the analysis The analysis may take several minutes When it is complete see To archive components found by PSA on page 7 16 To archive components found by PSA PSA displays the results of your search method To choose the search method for PSA on page 7 16 If Pervasive components were found on your system they are displayed on the results screen and are grouped by major release If you choose to archive components the archives can be restored at a later time if needed using the Restore Archives option in PSA If you archive all files under a major release for exam
328. re 2 8 Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on Linux 2 9 iii Contents Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine 0 0 2 10 Tasks Requiring Administrative Rights 2 2 0 ee eee eee 2 10 How Administrative Rights are Granted 2 2 0 ee eee ee 2 10 Rights Within an Active Directory Environment 0 0 2 11 Rights Provided to non Administrative Users 2 0000 4 2 11 Tasks for Granting Administrative Rights 2 0 0 20 2 000 2 11 Granting Administrative Rights on a Windows Server nossas 2 12 Granting Administrator Rights on NetWare 4 2 5 xor6 x 2 19 Granting Administrator Rights on Linux 000 2 19 Logging in as Administrator on any platform 1 2 2 0 000 2 20 Setting Up ODBC Database Access 2 ee 2 21 Basic CONCEPIS n Bee eB RR eos So he A ROE ee we BER ek a PS 2 21 What to Know if You are Recreating DSNs 2 0 ee ee ee 2 23 Prerequisites to Setting up Database Access 2 ee ee ee 2 24 Setting Up Database Access on Windows 1 2 ee es 2 25 Setting Up Database Access on a NetWare Server 0 0 ee eee eee 2 31 Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server 2 0 ee eee 2 37 Setting UP CHET ACCESS e ace cca win e Nolan Me Wg Ee ee Ay a ose tee 4G 2 40 Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications 000 2 46 Before You Begin mae og AG ne ein an Ek a Re BE Ve Rea
329. re 4 x requires the word load load clilcadm 4 17 License Administrator 4 18 chapter Table Designer A Tour of Pervasive Table Designer The topics in this chapter include m Table Designer Concepts on page 5 2 m Table Designer GUI Visual Reference on page 5 8 m Table Designer Tasks on page 5 28 5 1 Table Designer Table Designer Concepts Overview 5 2 This section contains the following topics m Overview on page 5 2 Tabbed Dialogs on page 5 3 m Modes on page 5 5 Data Types on page 5 6 Null Values on page 5 6 The Pervasive SQL Table Designer allows you to add delete or change the characteristics of columns within a table You may apply these changes only to the data definition files files ddf field ddf and index ddf or also to the actual data in the data file such as mkd files In addition Table Designer allows you create a database or a table To create or modify a database with Table Designer Btrieve database security must be turned off In addition you must have full administrator rights on the machine on which the database engine is running even if you are a member of the Pervasive_Admin group See Database Security on page 1 8 in Advanced Operations Guide for more about Btrieve database security and operating system access rights and Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine on page 2 10
330. re the steps in more detail 1 Load the relational module on the NetWare server by issuing the command mgrstart At a Windows computer with Pervasive SQL client installed start PCC by choosing Start Programs Pervasive SQL V8 Control Center Double click Pervasive SQL Engines If you do not see the NetWare server name listed then right click and choose Register New Engine In the window that appears type in or browse to the NetWare server where the database engine is located Click OK After the server icon is displayed in PCC double click on the icon that represents the server Then double click on the Databases folder If you do not see the database you want to connect to right click on the Databases folder and choose New Database In the screen that appears choose Engine interface and enter a NetWare user name and password with administrative permissions on the NetWare server Click Next In the following screen enter the name of the database and the directory where the data files are or will be located This directory cannot be a mapped drive or relative to the client It must be a full path name on the server as if you were seated at the server console If you want to make existing DDFs and data files available for remote access check Use Advanced Settings If you are creating a brand new database from scratch do not check this box Follow the prompts provided For detailed procedures and options see Chapter
331. reate or butil clone Records in the input sequential file must be in the following format a The first field must be a left adjusted integer in ASCII that provides the length of the record This field does not include the end of line markers For files with fixed length records the length you specify should equal the record length of the data file For files with variable length records the length you specify must be at least as long as the minimum fixed length of the data file A separator either a comma or a blank must follow the length field m The record data follows the separator The length of the data must be the exact number of bytes specified by the length field Anend of line marker must terminate each line The end of line marker is not included in the length value at the beginning of the line recover sourceFile unformattedFile Oowner Linux Supplementary Documentation 8 12 The recover command extracts data from a Pervasive SQL formatted file and places it in a sequential file that has the same format as the input sequential file used by the load command This command is often useful for extracting some or all of the data from a damaged Pervasive SQL formatted file The recover command may be able to retrieve many if not all of the file s records You can then use the load command to insert the recovered records into a new undamaged Pervasive SQL formatted file rollfwd sourceFile Ldumpfile Wd
332. released the scroll box then displays a tool tip for all subsequent scrolling The tool tip tells you which record is positioned at the top of the visible grid For example the following figure shows that record 570 in the current table is the top line of the visible grid Figure 6 4 Scroll Box Tool Tip Indicating Row at Top of Grid ID First_Namne Last_Nane Perm_Street 208951629 Gary Fake 519 Plantation Dr 209181955 John Mokay 44 Rose Way 209273100 Nadya Elaafandi 310 S Main 209491490 Edward Madachik 312 S 3rd Ave 209724741 Brent Ruud 9520 W Cottonwood Dr 209947993 Ronald Cabbibo 10 25 166 Wtstn 210262270 Hubert Baab 6333 N Denmark St 210482595 Toni Gubac 2164 Fickle Hill Rd 210702920 Andre Rivard 6800 Fleetwd Rd 210933245 Pearl Ximines 13 W Euclid Grid Results OVR Rows Fetched 1500 Text Results Tab The Text Results tab shows in a text format the result of running SQL statements You cannot change the data values in the database by changing the text The Text Results tab is automatically used for the results of any SQL statement that is not a SELECT statement For example suppose you want to delete some records and have typed a DELETE statement into Query Pane Ifyou select the menu command Run Current SQL Statement in Grid SQL DM returns the results to the Text Results tab not to the Grid Results tab You may also use the Text Results tab
333. remote Pervasive SQL Server Engine is communicating properly 7 27 Pervasive System Analyzer PSA 2 Enter the Server Name where the DSN resides You can browse to find the server name by clicking the button to the right of the server name field 3 Enter the Server Data Source Name DSN for the data source you would like to test 4 Select the operations you want to perform against the relational engine Create Table Read Data Update Data Insert Data If these steps are successful you have a working Relational Interface requester that has connectivity to the server gt To understand your relational database engine test results A dialog box displays during the tests to show progress This dialog box displays the Relational Engine Test results Note The progress bar completes for each relational operation that runs PSA displays a check mark if the operation is successful and an Wow x for every operation that fails Other Tasks gt To specify a different location for the PSA log file 1 On the main dialog page enter the path to your PSA log file in the provided box Figure 7 10 Specifying the PSA Log File Name and Location C Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software PSALog txt 2 Ifyou want to search for the directory instead click to the right of the dialog box 7 28 a A Q N PSA Tasks Figure 7 11 Searching for PSA Log File Path Click Next to continue with the tests you
334. ripts for automatically starting and stopping the database server as part of the system boot sequence 8 27 Linux Supplementary Documentation 8 28 Sqimgr Console Mode To start the SQL database server in console mode assuming PVSW_ROOT bin is in your path run o sqlmgr console Console mode is functionally equal to daemon mode except that system messages are printed to standard out instead of dev console or the system log Press c to exit sqlmgr console mode chapter Basic Troubleshooting E How to Identify and Solve Common Problems This chapter provides information for troubleshooting and resolving the most commonly encountered problems m General Troubleshooting on page 9 2 m Error Messages from PCC on page 9 8 m Frequently Asked Questions on page 9 12 9 1 Basic Troubleshooting General Troubleshooting This section provides some basic troubleshooting procedures to help you rule out possible causes for situations you may encounter This section covers the following topics m get Error 1114 when trying to access my data on page 9 2 m I get an error saying ServerDSN or DBQ was not found in the connection string on page 9 2 m I get a message saying my Engine components version is different than my client components version on page 9 2 Ican t get to my data on the server engine on page 9 3 m Error Messages from PCC on page 9 8 get
335. rity reporting stored procedures and universal application access without requiring any application programming Databases that are ODBC enabled can be accessed by any ODBC standard software program As an end user of an application based on Pervasive SQL you may not be able to choose which access method your application uses but your application vendor has most certainly taken this into account Key Concepts No other DBMS available today offers this combination of flexible relational access and high speed transaction throughput Additional Access Methods In addition to the Transactional and Relational interfaces Pervasive SQL provides methods to access data through OLE DB Java ActiveX ADO and Pervasive Direct Access Components PDAC for Delphi and C Builder Terminology Revisited When using the Btrieve interface the terms table and database are generally not used and data files are referred to directly as such In addition Btrieve users normally use the terms records and fields rather than rows and columns 1 9 Introducing Pervasive SQL Why Pervasive SQL You or your application vendor have chosen wisely in selecting Pervasive SQL as the database of choice Within the realm of small to mid sized enterprises Pervasive SQL provides the lowest maintenance highest performance best overall DBMS value on the market today Pervasive SQL provides a number of advantages over other products Here are just a f
336. rs in the cell indicating the selected column H 3 Click Edit Insert Columns or click AL A new column is inserted A blue asterisk appears in the leftmost cell The default name of the column is col_n where n is a number that automatically increments by one The first column you insert is col_1 the second col_2 and so forth The column is not added to the definition files until you save the database 5 55 Table Designer 5 56 The following image shows a column inserted before the column named Head_of_Dept Column name Type Size Precision Scale Null Case Collate Default Name char 20 Oo M Phone_Number decimal 11 0 mM Oo E Building Name char 25 M Room Number uinteger O o gt ca aaa am a i a aa Head_Of Dept ubigint Oo Oo Click File Save or click J The save action adds the column to the definition files gt To delete a Btrieve column Ensure that Table Designer is in unlinked mode See To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 Tasks performed on the Btrieve tab affect only the table definition files The data files are not modified 1 Click View gt Btrieve Data or click the Btrieve tab 2 Click on the grid indicator cell for the column you want The indicator cell is the gray leftmost grid cell id 2 A solid right point triangle indicates that the column is selected 3 Click Edit Delete Column or click JRL
337. s Table Designer Tasks Category Task To delete a table on page 5 36 Data To view table data on page 5 37 To identify insertions or deletions that have not been saved on page 5 37 To save changes on page 5 37 To discard all changes Reset on page 5 37 To determine the length of a record on page 5 38 Copy Paste To copy data from a grid cell on page 5 38 To paste data into a grid cell on page 5 38 Column tasks apply to the Columns tab Note Inserting deleting or moving a column on the Columns tab changes the database The database is rebuilt when you save the Table Designer information To insert a column at end of column definitions on page 5 39 To insert a column between columns on page 5 39 To change column order on page 5 40 To delete a column on page 5 41 To set a column name on page 5 41 To set a column data type on page 5 42 To set a column size on page 5 42 To set column precision on page 5 43 To set a column scale on page 5 44 To set a column to allow or disallow nulls on page 5 44 To set case sensitivity for a column on page 5 45 To set a column collating sequence on page 5 46 To set a column default on page 5 47 To change column order on page 5 40 Index tasks apply to the Indexes tab 5 29 Table Designer Statistics Tasks Btrieve Tasks 5 30 To
338. s Restrictions options pages appear in the right hand panel of the dialog box these may be reviewed to ensure no violations are occurring gt To grant a user administrator rights on Linux A user cannot remotely administer a server engine on Linux unless the user has first been set up as a database user with administrative rights You can perform this task by using the btadmin utility at the server command line See also Pervasive SQL Account Management on Linux on page 14 2 in Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server edition for a complete discussion of configuring the environment for administrative rights Using Pervasive SQL 1 2 T Login to the Linux server as psql or as root if the PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH variables have been set and exported No other user is permitted to run btadmin Create a new user with administrative rights by running btadmin btadmin p passwd a user_name For example if you wanted to create an administrative user tim with password tim56 you would enter the following command btadmin p tim56 a tim Note Users created with btadmin are not related to Linux system users These users are known only to the database engine Logging inas gt To connect to a remote Pervasive SQL V8 server Administrator on any platform 1 2 20 Use the Monitor or Configuration utility to connect to a remote server Refer to the Advanced Operations Guide for a discussion
339. s designed to access and affect data The SRDE does not have a scheduler Frequently Asked Questions Upgrading from After upgrade the database engine on NetWare is the Btrieve 6 15 SQL engine SRDE going to interpret Btrieve calls or is it necessary to continue running the Btrieve nlm Pervasive SQL includes a new version of Btrieve nlm It also includes anew module named nwmkde nlm In the new architecture Btrieve nlm is a stub that calls nwmkde nlm to perform operations You must have both of these modules running On NetWare will the 6 15 Btrieve NLM interface with the new MicroKernel engine or will the 8 x version of Btrieve NLM have to be loaded to continue accessing the current Btrieve files You cannot use the 6 15 version of Btrieve NLM with Pervasive SQL You must load all NLMs from the same product version My current files are in a 5 x format Will they have to be converted to be accessed by the SQL engine SRDE The SRDE accesses 5 x format files through the MicroKernel No file conversion is needed You must convert the files to 8 x format to take advantage of new features offered by the 8 x MicroKernel However the SRDE requires DDFs for your data files Ifyou do not have DDFs in some cases you may be required to modify your file indexes before you can create valid DDFs The steps required to create DDFs for Btrieve files are explained in Advanced Operations Guide Chapter 13 have DDF files today
340. s 2 21 creating on NetWare 9 24 engine defined 2 21 on a Linux server 2 37 File DSN not supported 2 21 2 43 recreating 2 23 2 52 removing 2 52 Dsnadd utility 2 45 8 20 Dump file cannot read it 9 29 E Elements of Pervasive SQL 1 3 E mail Pervasive newsletter 10 8 Enforcing Referential Integrity 2 55 Engine components different version than client 9 2 defined 1 3 DSN 2 22 defined 2 21 stopping Workgroup under fast user switching 2 57 tray icon with fast user switching 2 57 Error ServerDSN or DBQ not found 9 2 4994 9 11 error 1114 9 2 Error was encountered message troubleshooting 9 10 Excel pasting data from SQL Data Manager 6 60 Existing data file creating DDFs for 9 23 too few columns when creating table for 9 28 Export files cannot read file 9 29 Export Wizard See Data Export Wizard Exporting data 3 33 expwizrd exe 3 8 F Failover 9 15 FAQ see Frequently asked questions Fast user switching 2 56 running Workgroup engine 2 57 tray icon with 2 57 types of users for 2 56 Features of Pervasive SQL 1 10 Field defined 1 5 Field ddf 9 22 File format converting data to older 9 20 version upgrade not needed for SQL access 9 27 path changing hard coded in DDF 9 21 where data and metadata stored 9 26 File DSN not supported 2 21 2 43 File system security 1 20 2 46 File ddf 9 22 Files explanation of required 9 26 Finding information on upgrading 9 29 non standard DDFs 9 22 serv
341. s NT 1 Click Start Programs Administrative Tools User Manager 2 Click Policies User Rights User BAE Options Help User Account Full Name User Rights s Audit amp SMSCliToknAcct amp SMSCliSvcAcct SMSCliToknAcct amp Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine 3 Click the option Show Advanced User Rights Computer TS_NT Right Access this computer from network 7 Cancel Grant To Account Deleted Administrators Add Everyone Power Users _Bemove 4 In the Right selection list click Act as part of the operating system User Rights Policy xi Computer TS_NT M Show Advanced User Rights 5 Click Add The Add Users and Groups dialog appears 6 Inthe Names list click on the user or group for whose account you want to grant the user policy For example you could grant the policy to the Pervasive_Admin group 7 Click Add 2 15 Using Pervasive SQL The user name is added to the Add Names list For example the following image shows that the Administrator has been added et Backup Operators Members can bypass file security to bac Everyone All Users Guests Users granted guest access to the comp a Add Show Users Members Search Add Names Administrator a i 8 Click OK The user account is added to the Grant to list User Rights Policy x Computer TS_NT OK Right fact as part of the operating system x C
342. s an alphabetical list of Reference SQL statements and keywords that are links to the SQL Engine Reference Search Searches for a string To display help on page Documentation throughout the installed set of 6 48 Pervasive SQL documentation What s This Identifies objects in the SQL SQL Data Manager GUI DM GUI Visual Reference on page 6 16 To display help on page 6 48 Glossary Defines terms used in the To display help on page Pervasive SQL documentation 6 48 Online Manuals Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can reference the online manuals To display help on page 6 48 Knowledge Base Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can query the Pervasive SQL Knowledge Base for additional information about Pervasive SQL To display help on page 6 48 Developer Center Web Directs your browser to www pervasive com where you can research information specifically for application developers using Pervasive SQL To display help on page 6 48 6 27 SQL Data Manager 6 28 GUI Object Description Related Information About Pervasive SQL Data Manager Displays the name and version of SQL DM and the Pervasive SQL copyright information To display help on page 6 48 Moves the cursor to the first line in Query Pane and runs that statement The statement indicato
343. s in unlinked mode Columns Tab on page 5 18 To work with columns on page 5 32 Indexes tab Displays the Indexes tab Modes on page 5 5 Indexes Tab on page 5 20 To work with indexes on page 5 32 5 17 Table Designer Columns Tab 5 18 GUI Object Description Related Information Statistics tab Displays the Statistics tab Modes on page 5 5 Statistics Tab on page 5 21 To display table statistics on page 5 32 Btrieve tab Displays the Btrieve tab This tab appears only if Table Designer is in unlinked mode Modes on page 5 5 Btrieve Tab on page 5 25 To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 To work with Btrieve data on page 5 32 Record length indicator Shows the number of byes in the current record To determine the length of a record on page 5 38 Mode indicator Shows the current mode of Table Designer linked or unlinked The mode determines which of the four tabbed dialogs appears Modes on page 5 5 To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 The following image shows the Columns tab of the GUI The table below the image describes the GUI objects The menu items and icons are explained in Main Window on page 5 8 Table Designer GUI Visual Reference Figure 5 4 Columns Tab Pervasive Table Designer Eile Edit View Tools
344. s is because in most cases slowness occurs from disk I O and not from CPU use 9 29 Basic Troubleshooting 9 30 How do I run Pervasive SQL in trace mode Server You must have administrator privileges on the machine where the engine is located that you want to run in debug mode Using PCC double click Configuration for the desired Server engine Choose Server Debugging Trace Operation and set the value to On Click Edit Apply You do not need to restart the engine See also Trace Operation on page 4 17 in Advanced Operations Guide Note After tracing operations you should turn off Trace Operation making sure to click Edit Apply when finished You will notice slower performance if you run Pervasive SQL in trace mode Win32 Client and Btrieve Win16 Client Run the PSA network connectivity tests to verify network connectivity See Test Active Installation Tasks on page 7 24 Also refer to the Pervasive Knowledge Base http support pervasive com eSupport for information about particular issues In addition client tracing is available for troubleshooting certain types of low level problems Generally low level tracing is not required so this type of tracing is intended for use by trained support staff Your product vendor or Pervasive Software Support will explain how to conduct low level client tracing Does garbage collection occur in the data files and indexes For example is space from
345. s of any table in the database then you must close that window before proceeding To set database security from within the PCC Right click on a database icon in PCC Namespace Select the Properties menu item Select the Security tab in the Database properties dialog box Figure 3 15 Database Properties Dialog Box Database properties demodata 2 x General Security Constraints Database security Disabled You can make your data safer if you protect your database with security To enable security features enter Master user password below Password Confirm password Cancel Enter a password for the Master user Caution Be sure to specify a password with significant length at least five characters Do not leave the password field blank because doing so creates a major security risk for your database Working with Groups and Users Setting Database Security Click OK when done The database is now secured and a single user named Master has been created with the password you specified Until additional users are created and assigned permissions in the database only the Master user is permitted to view or update data A secure database supports individual users and groups of users who have the same set of permissions Additional users and groups may be added to the database through the Users namespace node under the database For more information about adding users and groups s
346. s the Text Results tabbed dialog Text Results Tab on page 6 7 To work with text results on page 6 61 Progress indicator Displays a progress bar a series of moving blue squares to indicate that SQL DM is currently processing an action The progress bar stops displaying after an action completes Query Builder Diagram SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference GUI Object Description Related Information Insert Overtype Shows whether Query Pane Query Pane on page 6 8 indicator and the grid on the Grid Results tab are in insert or To toggle insert overtype overtype mode Insert mode mode on page 6 56 adds characters between other characters as you type Existing characters are pushed to the right Overtype mode replaces characters as you type The default mode is insert When this field shows OVR in boldface SQL DM is in overtype mode When OVR shows in a dimmed typeface SQL DM is in insert mode Rows fetched Displays the number of rows Records Affected and indicator returned for a SELECT Scrolling on page 6 6 statement The following image shows the pane for Query Builder Diagram Two tables Person and Billing are open in the pane When shown Query Builder Diagram always appears as the first pane below the main window toolbar SQL Data Manager DOCLAB2 DEMODATA ioj x Eile Edit View Tools Help D SHl A Re a
347. se actions function as a toggle That is if Query Builder Grid is hidden the action shows it and vice versa See also Behavior of Query Builder Grid When Query Builder Diagram Contains No Tables on page 6 15 gt To set query type for Query Builder This task requires that Query Builder Diagram or Query Builder Grid be active showing 1 Click Tools Query Builder Change Query Type or click A dialog appears on which you may choose the type of query 2 Perform one of the following actions a Click Select to build a SELECT statement b Click Update to build an UPDATE statement c Click Insert to build an INSERT statement d Click Delete to build a DELETE statement 3 Click OK SQL Data Manager Tasks gt To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder This task serves as a mini tutorial on how to build an SQL statement with Query Builder This task addresses building a SELECT statement but many of the actions also apply to building an UPDATE INSERT or a DELETE statement For this reason we suggest that you complete this task before attempting to build one of the other statement types This task presents the steps to accomplish the following Obtain the ID number first name and last name of all persons in your database with a first name of James or Lisa and whose last name begins with an N 0 P Q R S or T Once obtained the records need to be sorted by asce
348. se key is human readable text a string of letters and numbers You can cut and paste the text for example to speed the entry of a key during installation of a Pervasive SQL product The License Administrator utility allows you to apply license keys remove licenses and view license information The utility includes a graphical user interface GUI and a command line interface CLI The GUI runs only on Windows 32 bit platforms and allows you to apply license keys remove licenses and view license information You can start the GUI as a stand alone application or from within Pervasive Control Center PCC You may administer licenses for local or remote database engines with the GUI See License Administrator GUI Visual Reference on page 4 5 for an explanation of the objects on the GUI See GUI Tasks on page 4 10 for the tasks specific to the graphical user interface The CLI runs on all platforms supported by Pervasive SQL The CLI is functionally equivalent to the GUI with two exceptions You may administer licenses only for local database engines with the CLI In addition the CLI requires that you know a license key the string of letters and numbers to remove the license The GUI by contrast lists all applied licenses and allows you to select a license to remove The GUI does not list the license keys just the information about the applied licenses such as the type of license user count expiration date and so for
349. ser is entitled to perform on the database 3 25 Using the Pervasive Control Center 3 26 Figure 3 19 Add New User Group Permissions Dialog Box New User xi General Permissions JOOOOoOo000 m oO m o m oO m O m O m O m O m O Oo O oo0000000 oo0000000 Corea ew Each check box represents a specific permission for a specific table For example if you want members of this group to be able to perform SELECT operations on the Billing table click the box on the row labeled Billing under the column Select Click OK when done You can also perform the task of creating a user and assigning permissions using the SQL statement GRANT gt To delete a user or group Note To delete a group you must first delete all users in the group You cannot delete a group that contains users Double click the Users node in PCC Right click on the icon representing the user or group you want to delete From the pop up menu click Delete You can also perform this task using the SQL statement REVOKE LOGIN FROM user Setting Database Security gt To add an existing user to a group Existing users cannot be directly added to a group Follow these steps 1 Delete the user by following the steps provided in To delete a user or group on page 3 26 2 Re create the user by following the steps provided in To add a new user to the dat
350. sfully completed the steps necessary to create the table When you click the Finish button the table will be created To create the table click Finish 8 The wizard displays a final dialog box not shown indicating that the operation was a success Click Close Creating Tables for Existing Data Files Sometimes a data file already exists but it has no table definition allowing it to be accessed with ODBC The advanced settings of the Create Table Wizard allow for adding table definitions for existing data files For detailed instructions on how to perform this complex procedure see Advanced Operations Guide 3 19 Using the Pervasive Control Center Dropping a Table 3 20 Dropping a table using the PCC s Drop Table Wizard is very similar to dropping a database You may also delete a table with Table Designer See Table Designer on page 5 1 lt gt 1 Note To delete a table from a database database security must be turned off or you must have access rights to delete tables See Chapter 2 Using the Pervasive Control Center for information on access rights Caution This procedure may permanently delete data files and DDFs To delete an existing table from a database Click on the Tables Namespace node under the database whose table you want to drop Right click on the table to be dropped in the table list pane on the right side of the Control Center window Select Delete from
351. sign permissions for all users expected to access the database You do this by using CREATE USER CREATE GROUP and GRANT statements in SQL You can also use the Users and Groups feature of PCC If security is not important to you you can avoid creating many users and assigning privileges by granting access to PUBLIC which means anyone on your network can access the data You can use this statement GRANT ALL ON my_table ownername TO PUBLIC Is there a client side requester for the SRDE There is no DOS requester support for SQL applications but the Pervasive SQL client software for Windows includes ODBC client components allowing you to connect to a remote SRDE server engine Is ODBC the only method of access for Pervasive SQL Definitely not In addition to ODBC and the time tested Btrieve API you can also develop applications using our OLE DB provider our JDBC driver our pure Java interface or our ActiveX controls Is there a single database file housing all the data data definitions stored procedures security table relationships and so on as in some other products No Pervasive SQL stores data in separate files one file per relational table definition The meta data such as data definitions user group definitions and so on are stored in a set of DDF files where each file ends in the extension ddf Does the SQL engine SRDE have scheduler capabilities to run stored procedures or other types of script
352. sing the Pervasive Control Center Utilities A variety of graphical and command line tools provide support for testing configuring and manipulating the many features and options provided by Pervasive SQL These tools are covered in depth in Advanced Operations Guide but a brief introduction to them is provided in Helpful Utilities on page 1 15 Documentation Pervasive SQL comes with a printed copy of Getting Started with Pervasive SQL and with a complete set of online documentation For more information about the documentation see Using Pervasive SQL Documentation on page 1 17 Key Concepts Key Concepts Basic Database Structures and Terms This section explains some basic concepts of databases and some of the key concepts that distinguish Pervasive SQL from other database products Most database management systems in use today share a common set of basic structures This section briefly explains those structures The descriptions that follow refer to the diagram below Phone Book Table Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Col Names Name Address Zip Phone Row 1 Fred Black 643 Oak 12346 555 2345 Row 2 Jane Doe 112 Elm 12345 555 1212 Row 3 John Doe 112 Elm 12345 555 1212 Value The most basic element of a database is a value A value is one piece of data one characteristic for a specific entity For example in the diagram the name John Doe or the phone n
353. sk To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder explains how to construct a logical AND Query Builder Grid on page 6 14 To build a DELETE statement with Query Builder on page 6 82 To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 6 39 SQL Data Manager SQL Data Manager Tasks General Tasks Query Pane Tasks 6 40 This section explains the tasks that you perform with SQL DM The tasks are divided into the following categories Category Description General Tasks Orient you to the overall use of SQL DM Query Pane Tasks Help you use Query Pane Execution and Results Tasks Apply to the running of SQL statements and working with the results Query Builder Tasks Orient you to the use of Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid What to do first If you are new to SQL DM begin with the general tasks If you are new to SQL programming begin with the tasks for Query Builder If you are experienced with SQL programming begin with the tasks for Query Pane General tasks orient you to the overall use of SQL DM a To start SQL DM as a stand alone application on page 6 42 a To start SQL DM from PCC on page 6 43 To identify machine and database currently open on page 6 43 To open a database on page 6 44 To create an SQL query or script on page 6 44 m To close a database on page 6 45 To change data with
354. sks gt To test the transactional database engine 1 Select whether or not you wish to run the Transactional Engine Test Accepting the default response runs the test This test runs a series of Btrieve operations to simulate your requester performing actual Btrieve database work 2 Select or enter the path name for the samples directory on the database engine server You can browse to the samples directory by clicking the button to the right of the text field 3 Select the operations you want to perform against the transactional engine Create Data File write access required If the data file cannot be created PSA attempts to load the sample database SAMPLE BTR Read Data File Update Data write access required Insert Data write access required If these steps are successful you have a working Btrieve requester that has connectivity to the server gt To understand your transactional database engine test results A dialog box displays during the tests to show progress The dialog box displays the Transactional Engine test results Note The progress bar completes for each transactional operation that runs PSA displays a check mark if the operation is successful and an x for every operation that fails gt To test the relational database engine 1 Select whether or not you wish to run the Relational Engine Test Accepting the default response runs the tests This verifies that the SQL Connection Manager on the
355. spectively ID Number First Name 6 65 SQL Data Manager 6 66 Last Name Column Alias Table Result Order by Criteria or ote or Person ID ID Number Person Perso First_Name First Name Person Person Last_Name Last Name Person Z O m 8 9 SELECT Person ID AS ID Number Person First_Name AS First Name Person Last Name AS Last Name FROM Person Notice that as you move the cursor from each cell the AS clauses are added to the statement and that double quotes are automatically placed around what you typed Note You must indicate to Query Pane that you are finished typing into a grid cell You do this by moving the cursor from the cell once you have finished typing For example after you type Last Name move the cursor from that cell with the Tab key cursor arrows or mouse DC In the Criteria column for Person First_Name type James Press the Tab key Notice that Query Builder automatically adds an equals sign and single quotes around James because James is a string data type Non string data types are not enclosed by quotes Alias Table Result Orderby Criteria or or or ID Number Person First Name Person Person Last_Name Last Name Person James JOR
356. stopped on page 6 57 SQL DM contains three panes that you use as the primary work areas see Figure 6 1 Query Pane m Query Builder Diagram Query Builder Grid Unlike the tabbed dialogs each pane may be individually shown or hidden Each pane may be sized vertically within the SQL DM main window Together Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid compose what is called Query Builder Query Pane Query Pane is a text entry area for SQL statements You may type directly in the pane add SQL statements to the pane from Query Builder or combine both methods By default text does not wrap within Query Pane You may turn on word wrap if you choose See To wrap text within Query Pane on page 6 52 If you add more than one SQL statement in Query Pane you must separate each statement with a delimiter By default SQL DM uses SQL Data Manager Concepts the pound sign You may change this delimiter character to the semicolon See To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 Note that you must use the pound sign as the statement delimiter in Query Pane if you create stored procedures Stored procedures use the semicolon as a statement delimiter within the procedure itself You may run the current statement or all statements in Query Pane See To run a single SQL statement on page 6 56 and To run all SQL statements on page 6 57 The statement in which the cursor is located is the current sta
357. t Browse for Computer 2 x Select engine to be connected Dquaglint Dquaglin2k Dtan_2 Dtan2k Dzippe Ebserver Elucke2k Emagee Ememilla_ws Eric laptop Essbase Gbeck Gdillon nt z 4 Backin the main screen of PCC double click the icon representing the machine you are working with Right click the Databases folder associated with the machine you have selected Click New Database to start the Create Database Wizard Figure 2 25 Create Database Wizard Client DSN Server DSN demodata z T Use OEM ANSI Conversion T Use advanced settings 2 4 Using Pervasive SQL 2 42 5 In the Name field type a descriptive name for the DSN This name will be displayed in the ODBC Administrator and to users attempting to connect to ODBC data sources The maximum length is 32 characters In the Server DSN field select the Engine DSN on the machine that you want to associate with the Client DSN you are creating If you click Use advanced settings see Client DSN Options on page 5 7 in Advanced Operations Guide for a discussion of the settings 6 Click Next to display the final confirmation screen Figure 2 26 Create Database Wizard Client DSN Confirmation Completing Create Database Wizard You have successfully completed the steps required to create a new database The new database will be created as defined below Linked to internal database name Server_demodata Data Source interface type Clien
358. t Data Source type System Database options Transport hint Try TCPIP first then SPX Enable Array Fetch on Array Fetch Buffer 8 KB TCP IP Port Number 1583 Enable OEM ANSI Conversion off gt 7 Click Finish to complete the wizard T A Note The Client DSN you have just created does not appear in PCC It appears only in the ODBC Administrator as a System DSN It also appears in the DSN list presented when local applications attempt to connect to ODBC data sources Once you have created a Client DSN you can remove or rename it from the ODBC Administrator using the Remove or Configure buttons Tip You can set the option to have Client DSNs appear in PCC by right clicking on the database engine is the list and selecting View gt Show Client Databases Once you have set this option you can remove or configure it using PCC Setting Up Client Access gt Setting Up a Client DSN Using the ODBC 1 2 3 4 5 6 Administrator Open the ODBC Administrator from the Start menu select Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt Other Utilities ODBC Administrator Click on the System DSN tab then on Add Note Pervasive SQL does not support File DSNs You must use User or System DSNs System DSNs are generally preferred because they are available to all users on a given computer In the Drivers window select Pervasive ODBC Client Interface The following dialog box
359. t To specify index sort sequence For detailed information about sort order see Sort Order in the Pervasive SQL Programmer s Guide which is part of the Pervasive SQL Software Developer s Kit SDK When Table Designer is in unlinked mode index changes affect only the data definition files 1 Click Edit Indexes or click the Indexes tab 2 Click in the Sort grid cell Ifa sort sequence is not applicable you will be unable to position the cursor in the Sort grid cell 3 Open the list for sort click F 4 Click the type of sort you want ascending asc or descending des The default value is ascending Statistics Tasks gt To change the location of a table s data file Changing the Table Location parameter does not move the table s data file The change only instructs the database engine where to find the data file If you wish to have your existing data still available you must move the data file to the newly specified location A database also must be unbound for you to change the location of a data file or move the data file When you create a database in PCC you are offered the option of creating a bound database Pervasive SQL automatically binds a data file to a named database if the file meets any of the following criteria Is part of a bound database m Has a trigger 5 53 Table Designer 5 54 Has a foreign key Has a primary key that is referenced by a foreign key See also the tool M
360. t a mapped drive that makes sense on the server For example if you have a mapped drive S data1 datafiles on your client referring to the folder SYS servers data1 datafiles on the server you must enter the server based directory servname SYS servers data1 datafiles If you wish to use any advanced features such as specifying that the DDFs and data files are not located in the same directory that the DDFs and data files are located in multiple directories or modifying the default DBNAME settings you must click the Use advanced settings option 9 Click Next If you clicked the Use advanced settings option proceed to step 11 The final wizard step verifies the successful creation of the database Figure 2 19 Create Database Wizard Complete Completing Create Database Wizard You have successfully completed the steps required to create a new database The new database will be created as defined below Database name dz_test Linked to internal database name dztest Data Source interface type Engine Data Source type System Data Source Open Mode Normal Data dictionary file location ANW324SS dztest Data file location s of 10 Click Finish The database is ready to access Proceed to setting up client DSNs as explained in Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 Advanced settings procedure 11 Ifyou clicked the Use advanced settings option you see a window as shown below 2 34 12 13 Sett
361. t column scale 5 44 set column size 5 42 set column to allow or disallow nulls 5 44 specify index as modifiable 5 52 specify index sort column 5 51 specify index sort sequence 5 53 start as stand alone application 5 30 start from PCC 5 31 view table data 5 37 work with Btrieve data 5 32 work with columns 5 32 work with indexes 5 32 unlinked mode 5 5 Tables adding 3 15 See Table Designer changing See Table Designer creating 3 15 See Table Designer deleting See Table Designer Terminal Server 9 15 Terminology Btrieve usage 1 9 cell 1 6 client 1 4 column 1 5 database 1 6 database engine 1 3 engine 1 3 field 1 5 index 1 6 join 1 8 local 1 7 record 1 5 remote 1 7 requester 1 4 row 1 5 schema 1 6 table 1 6 value 1 5 Testing your system 7 1 Text Results See SQL Data Manager Timeout period for an SQL query 6 51 Trace how to run in trace mode 9 30 Tray icon with fast user switching 2 57 Troubleshooting ruling out possible causes client DSN not available 9 6 disabled client requester 9 4 network outage 9 3 no server engine DSN available 9 5 OS permissions problems 9 4 server not accepting requests 9 5 server not running not installed 9 4 wrong network protocol settings 9 6 U Unable to connect error troubleshooting 9 9 Unauthorized access to data file with owner name 9 25 Understanding databases 1 2 1 5 Uninstalling data files not affected 9 15 Unix See Linux Unlinked mode See Table Designer Un
362. t for Import Dialog Box 3 37 Import Wizard Completing the Import from File Wizard Dialog Box 3 38 Importing Data Dialog Box 2 eee 3 39 Database Properties os 5 0 doe ew ion a Ye Rw Ad os Re 3 42 Check Database Dialog Boxes se cerea CeCi ae aaO ee 3 43 Select Tables for the Referential Integrity Test Dialog Box o o 2 2 0 2 3 43 Check Database Dialog Box secsec cesas ee ee 3 44 Details of the Referential Integrity Test Dialog Box 00 3 44 Select Tables for the Referential Integrity Test Dialog Box 2 2 0 3 45 Check Database Results Dialog Box 1 2 ee ee ees 3 45 Referential Integrity Test Results Dialog Box 2 2 0 eee 3 46 ix Figures 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 Tabbed Dialogs in Table Designer 2 0 eee ee eee 5 3 Mode Indicators amp i scokswe sande pois e Ged ver tnd Gs Baye S Ba ee eres 5 5 Table Designer Main Window 2 2 ee ee ee 5 9 Columns Ta da etek een ag ance ty Magia loenae te atk BM edad tate ae oe hs 5 19 Indexes Fabre 2 4 pE ar a Seas giometh fi Ean as 5 20 StALISEICS Baine es yates sea eas ae Sob ea ah la der ge nach Le ty Sew Seed ar ay 5 22 Btrieve Tabs 23d ec kt ete Peed ORES Ee en PAE DS 5 25 Primary Areas of SQL DM Graphical User Interface 004 6 3 SQL DM Results Ta
363. t see it in your Network Neighborhood make sure that you are logged into the correct network For example if you generally use the NetWare client to access servers on your network but you are attempting to connect to a database on a Windows NT server you must make sure that you are logged into the Microsoft network not just the Novell network on your LAN Ask your network administrator for help The server user count has expired If you have been using a temporary license you will get this message for connection attempts after the license has expired Solution Run the User Count Administrator to check the status of licenses installed on the server To start the program choose Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 Other Utilities User Count Administrator In the window that appears you can see detailed status information on each license that has been applied to your server If your license has expired purchase a permanent license from your reseller or from Pervasive Software There are no available sessions on the server If you have a heavy load of users on the server or if you have configured the server with a small number of sessions you may receive this error Basic Troubleshooting 9 10 Solution Run Monitor to check the usage of sessions available on the server You must have administrative privileges on the server or membership in the Pervasive_Admin group in order to do so To start the program choose Start
364. t_Name Faculty scending Faculty Salary Faculty Esai O 4 SELECT Person ID Person First_Name Person Last_Name Faculty ID Faculty Dept_Name FROM Person Faculty WHERE Person ID Faculty ID ORDER BY Faculty Dept_Name 37 Run the query again 6 75 SQL Data Manager 6 76 You have now completed all goals for this task gt To build an UPDATE statement with Query Builder This task assumes the following You have completed the task To build a SELECT statement with Query Builder on page 6 63 That tasks contains how to information that is not covered again in this task You have reviewed these sections in this chapter SQL Data Manager Concepts on page 6 2 and SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference on page 6 16 SQL DM is running see To start SQL DM as a stand alone application on page 6 42 or To start SQL DM from PCC on page 6 43 The database DEMODATA is open see To open a database on page 6 44 Both Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid are hidden see To show or hide Query Builder Diagram on page 6 62 and To show or hide Query Builder Grid on page 6 62 No tables are open in Query Builder Diagram see To remove a table from Query Builder Diagram on page 6 87 Your goal for this task is to change the time at which Psychology 101 begins to 10 30 am and reduce its maximum class size to 175 Before
365. ta files with the same names but different extensions For example do not use a naming scheme such as INVOICE HDR and INVOICE DET for your Pervasive SQL data files stat sourceFile Oowner The stat command reports the defined characteristics of a data file and statistics about the file s contents FURT The ver command returns the version number of the MKDE loaded at the server Variables descriptionFile is the path name of a description file containing the description of 8 13 Linux Supplementary Documentation 8 14 the index you wish to use Is an ASCII text file containing information the Maintenance Utility needs to perform create and index operations Description files are made up of one or more elements where each element consists of a keyword followed by an equal sign and a value with no space separator Please refer to the Advanced Operations Guide for details of description files indexFile is the path_name of the index file in which the MKDE stores the external index keyNumber is the key number other than 0 of the index specified level is the type of access restriction for the data file The possible values for this parameter are as follows 0 Requires an owner name for any access mode no data encryption 1 Permits read access without any owner name no data encryption 2 Requires an owner name for any access mode with data encryption 3 Permits read access without an owner
366. ta first during any given work day The Workgroup engine comes with a 5 user license Additional users may be added Server Understanding the Product Family The Server engine offers a full client server architecture providing excellent performance and scalability for up to thousands of concurrent users The Server engine can be monitored and configured remotely The Server engine must be located on the same computer as the data files it is intended to access The table below compares Server and Workgroup features Table 1 1 Comparison of Server and Workgroup Features Feature Supports Btrieve ODBC OLE DB Java JDBC and ActiveX interfaces Full featured relational support online backup security referential integrity management tools Server J Workgroup v Binary compatible data files across all platforms and engine editions Easy compatible upgrading no application changes required Includes complete online documentation Can access data on a file server where no database engine is installed S O SN NON Supports remote ODBC client connections S Requires a Workgroup engine on all computers expected to access remote data N A Engine runs on Windows SI NINN NNSS N NS S Engine runs on NetWare Engine runs on Linux Multi user for small groups Scales to thousands of users Extranet license available Security S14 4 SINI NSIS
367. tabase engine may require that you start Table Designer with different menu commands The GUI executable is named tbldsgn exe Table Designer Tasks Table Designer starts by providing a dialog in which you choose a database and table to open By default the local database engine on the same computer as Table Designer is used gt To start Table Designer from PCC 1 2 3 Start PCC if it is not already running Click Start Programs gt Pervasive SQL V8 gt Control Center In the PCC data pane right click on the icon for the table you want to modify Click Tasks Edit Table Design IE Pervasive SQL Control Center Action View Tools Help e HE xs me ay Control Center Root Pervasive SQL Engines E DOcLaB2 Class Course Department a Databases ol pen DEMODATA E Tables asks g import Data Stored Procedures v Export Data Views Studer X Delete l ee Users Rename Execute SQL Query ef Configuration on roperties oes E Null Conversion Help Note When started this way Tasks Edit Table Design Table Designer opens a separate instance for each table This means that you can open multiple instances of Table Designer for the same table Changes saved in one instance are reflected in another instance only if you perform a reset For example suppose you open Table Designer twice called instance A and B for tabl
368. tate All changes that have not been saved are discarded Table Designer has three Reset commands They all perform the same function 5 37 Table Designer 5 38 gt 1 gt 1 2 gt 1 2 gt To determine the length of a record View the record length indicator field near the lower right corner of the Table Designer window The value in the field shows the record length in bytes You may also click the Statistics tab and view the value for the Record Length parameter E Pervasive Table Designer TMEIERS_NT DEMODATA Billing _ OF x Eile Edit View Tools Help MPHG Se zAR F Parameter Value Table Name Billing Table Location C PYS WSDEMODATA Billing mkd Dictionary Path C A PYSWADEMODATA File Version 8 0 Record Length 47 Page Size Number of Records Number of Indexes Number of Duplicate Ptrs Number of Unused Pages Variable Records Var Rec Blank Truncation Data Compression Key Only File Index Balancing Freespace Threshold Uses Alternate Collating Seq System Data Key Columns Indexes Statisti CLAF bytes gt UNLINKED MODE To copy data from a grid cell Click in the grid cell that contains the data you want to copy Click Edit Copy or click 83 You may also press Control c To paste data into a grid cell Click in the grid cell where you want to paste the data Click Edit Paste or click You may also press Control v Note You cannot paste
369. tement and is indicated by a yellow arrow in the left margin SELECT FROM billing SELECT FROM person Comments within Query Pane are indicated by double dashes See To type a comment into Query Pane on page 6 52 By default SQL DM starts with Query Pane shown Cursor Movement Within Query Pane You have two options when you move the cursor from statement to statement within Query Pane Move the cursor only with the mouse or keyboard arrow keys See To move the cursor within Query Pane without running any SQL statements on page 6 49 Move the cursor with the toolbar icons and run the SQL statement to which it moves See To move the cursor within Query Pane and run the SQL statement to which it moves on page 6 50 The second option is a convenience that lets you perform two actions with one mouse click This option is particularly handy if you want to step through SQL statements Query Builder Query Builder allows you to create SQL statements database queries without directly writing SQL Query Builder comprises Query Builder Diagram and Query Builder Grid You will find Query Builder most useful if you are new to writing SQL or if you want to check a syntactically correct form of a statement If you are experienced with writing SQL you will SQL Data Manager 6 10 probably prefer to type your statements directly into Query Pane Query Builder Diagram works best for creating
370. tency test Select the tables to be included in the list for the consistency test Existing tables Tables to check E Billing Class Course Department Enrolls A Faculty Person Addi Add All gt gt C HETOVE lt lt Remove All Po Next i Cancel Select the files you want to check click Next and follow the remaining prompts 3 43 Using the Pervasive Control Center Checking Referential Integrity 3 44 gt To check for orphan rows in a database or verify the consistency of a data file s referential integrity constraints Right click on the database in the PCC Namespace whose referential integrity is to be checked Select Tasks then Check Databases from the shortcut menu The following dialog box appears Figure 3 35 Check Database Dialog Box Select Referential Integrity test and click Next The Details dialog box provides options to specify what actions should be taken when inconsistencies or orphan rows are found Select any desired options and click Next Figure 3 36 Details of the Referential Integrity Test Dialog Box 5 The select table dialog box allows you to specify which tables of the database are to be checked Checking Consistency and Referential Integrity Figure 3 37 Select Tables for the Referential Integrity Test Dialog Box Existing tables Tables to check table2 Balle Add All gt gt Make your selections then c
371. th To build a DELETE the table name statement with Query table_name column_name Builder on page 6 82 Table Shows the name of the table Query Builder Grid on with which the column is associated page 6 14 To build a DELETE statement with Query Builder on page 6 82 GUI Object SQL Data Manager GUI Visual Reference Description Related Information Criteria Specifies a search condition for the associated column The default operator is equals Text literals are automatically single quoted when you move from the Criteria cell The criteria specifies the data that is used to identify the rows to delete Note that a DELETE statement removes the entire row in which the criteria is found If you want to change data and not remove it use an UPDATE statement The following operators are recognized as search criteria for a value BETWEEN expression AND expression NOT BETWEEN expression AND expression IN NOT IN IS NULL IS NOT NULL LIKE NOT LIKE equals lt less than gt greater than lt less than or equal to gt greater than or equal to lt gt not equal to Query Builder Grid on page 6 14 To build a DELETE statement with Query Builder on page 6 82 Specifies an additional search condition linked to the previous criteria by a logical OR Note The grid does not contain a column for a logical AND The ta
372. th For security the CLI does not display the license keys themselves You may obtain the license key from the installation media You can however just as with the GUI display information about the licenses applied to the computer type of license user count and so forth You may administer licenses only for the computer on which the CLI is running The CLI cannot administer remote licenses User Count License Administrator Concepts The CLI uses the same syntax on all platforms utility_name option parameters The utility name is one of the following m clilcadm exe Windows a clilcadm nlm NetWare a clilcadm Linux Table 4 1 describes the options Table 4 1 License Administrator Command Line Options and Parameters Options and Parameters Function lt interpret i gt Displays information about all of the applied licenses such as the type of license user count expiration date and so forth This option does not display the license keys themselves the string of letters and numbers lt interpret i gt license_key Displays information about a specific license such as the type of license user count expiration date and so forth lt apply a gt license_key Applies the specified license key to the computer on which the CLI utility is running lt remove r gt license_key Deletes the specified license from the computer on which the CLI utility is running lt help h gt
373. that were used by a product called Xtrieve They are in a 4 x file format Can they be used by the SQL engine or will they have to be converted They must be converted to the Pervasive SQL DDF format using the tool DDFCNV For more information about this tool see I have DDFs from Scalable SQL 3 01 Are they compatible with Pervasive SQL V8 on page 9 21 Is there a tool that replaces Xtrieve There is no direct replacement but you should consider using Crystal Reports for Btrieve as an excellent upgrade from Xtrieve for reporting on and querying Btrieve data 9 27 Basic Troubleshooting Upgrading and Migration 9 28 expect to continue using my old applications and files and phase in new applications to access the same files through the SQL engine SRDE Is this a false expectation Generally speaking no Pervasive SQL is designed to allow concurrent access between SRDE applications and Btrieve applications If you are currently using Btrieve without ODBC you may need to make some changes to the indexes on your files before you can create DDFs that provide SRDE access to the data The steps required to create DDFs for Btrieve files are explained in Advanced Operations Guide Chapter 13 How can I migrate a Btrieve database from NetWare to Windows NT 2000 or vice versa Shut down the Btrieve engine on the source computer and copy all the database files from the source computer to the target computer Install Perv
374. that you have open in Table Designer These steps apply only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application To delete a database within PCC see To remove an existing database from an engine on page 3 13 1 Click File Delete Database The Delete Database dialog appears that shows a list of databases 2 Click the database you want to delete 3 Click OK gt To open a table These steps apply only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application 5 35 Table Designer 5 36 1 Click File Open Table The Open Table dialog appears that shows a list of tables for the current database The list is empty if the current database has no tables You may click Create to create a new table 2 Click the table you want to open 3 Click OK gt To create a table These steps apply only if Table Designer is running as a stand alone application To create a table within PCC see To create a new table within a database on page 3 15 You may also create a table from the Open Table dialog See To open a table on page 5 35 1 Click File Create Table or click Create on the Open Table dialog The Create Table dialog appears 2 For New Table Name type the name you want for your table An error occurs if you specify a table name that already exists in the database 3 Click OK gt To delete a table You cannot delete the current table that you have open in Table Designer Th
375. the Text Results tab This command is enabled if a database is open and one or more SQL statements are present in Query Pane Query Pane on page 6 8 To set SQL statement separator on page 6 51 To run all SQL statements on page 6 57 Stop command or E icon Interrupts the current statement s being run The statement indicator positions to the statement in Query Pane that was being run when the interruption occurred In addition the Text Results tab lists the statement that was last run If you are running a statement for output to the Grid Results tab any results are cleared on the tab An SQL statement s must be running to enable this command To set a query time out period on page 6 51 To stop running SQL statements on page 6 57 To continue running SQL statements that were stopped on page 6 57 Continue Continues running a script that was interrupted with the Stop command or Stop icon or that stopped running because of an error To stop running SQL statements on page 6 57 To continue running SQL statements that were stopped on page 6 57 Clear command or x icon Clears all results on the Text Results tab This icon is active only if the Text Results tab contains output A database must be open to enable this command or icon To clear results from Text Results tab on page 6 61 GUI Object SQL
376. tients sav Y newpats idx The next example retrieves records from the patients btr file using key number 3 and stores them in an unformatted text file called patients sav butil save patients btr patients sav N 3 The following example loads sequential records from patients adr file into the patients btr file The owner name of the patients btr file is Sandy o butil load patientsa adr patients btr OSandy The following example adds an index to the patients btr file The name of the description file is suppidx dsc The owner name of the patients btr is Ron butil sindex patients btr suppidx dsc ORon See Also syslogd 1 API Programmer s Reference describes the Pervasive SQL API PVSW_ROOT doc readme html contains useful configuration information and release notes pvsw_RooT denotes the directory where Pervasive SQL for Linux is installed by default it is usr local psql Available Utilities clilcadm Description The clilcadm utility manages the user count licenses on your server gt 1 Note This utility can only be run by user accounts belonging to group pvsw See Getting Started with Pervasive SQL Server edition for information on Pervasive SQL Linux utilities and user accounts Synopsis clilcadm a key h i key r key Options a key Adds a specified license key h Displays help information for the clilcadm utility i key Displays information about a specific k
377. ting Up Database Access on a NetWare Server If you do not see the name of the database to which you want to connect continue with step 6 Create a New Database for the Server engine Right click on the database folder underneath the Server engine name and select New Database from the shortcut menu The Create Database Wizard appears as shown here Figure 2 17 Create an Engine DSN and Connect to a Server Database To begin with creating database you must specify a Pervasive SOL server and database interface type Server Nw X Interface Engine X User name Password The Server name should indicate the server that you are currently working with Choose Engine for the DSN type and enter your operating system User Name and Password for that server Remember that you must have administrator level rights on the server operating system to be able to complete this task Click Next to move to the next screen shown below Figure 2 18 Naming the New Database on the Server Name Jdz_test Directory _ NW32 SYS dztest E Je Use OEM ANGI Conversar I Use advanced settings In the Name field specify an Engine DSN name for the database This name will appear in the database listing in PCC after you complete this task In the Directory field specify the location of the data files 2 33 Using Pervasive SQL Note The Server engine cannot interpret mapped drive paths You must specify a full path no
378. tion of To exit SQL DM on page SQL DM Prompts you to save 6 49 the contents of Query Pane if the contents have changed Edit menu Provides the following commands Undo Control Z Cut Control X Copy Control C Paste Control V Select All Control A Find Control F Find Next F3 Replace Control H Undo Cancels typing actions Query Pane on page 6 8 Control Z performed in Query Pane May be repeatedly performed To cancel undo typing for multiple undo actions actions in Query Pane on page 6 53 To cancel an Undo action redo in Query Pane on page 6 53 Cut Removes selected text from Query Pane on page 6 8 Control X Query Pane and places it in the clipboard To cut or delete text from Query Pane on page 6 55 6 19 SQL Data Manager 6 20 GUI Object Description Related Information Copy Copies selected text from Query Pane on page 6 8 Control C Query Pane and places it in the clipboard To copy text from Query Pane on page 6 54 Paste Pastes clipboard text into Query Pane on page 6 8 Control V Query Pane at cursor position To paste within Query Pane on page 6 55 Select All Selects all of the contents of Query Pane on page 6 8 Control A Query Pane To select text in Query Pane on page 6 54 Find Finds a string in Query Pane Query Pane on page 6 8 Control
379. tistics Tab The Statistics tab shows you information about the current table You may modify the location ofa table s data file on this tab All other information on this tab is read only See Statistics Tab on page 5 21 for a description of the areas on the tab and Statistics Tasks on page 5 30 for the tasks that you perform on the tab Btrieve Tab The Btrieve tab displays data in a Btrieve file and lets you modify the data definition files The Btrieve tab appears only if Table Designer is in unlinked mode See Unlinked Mode on page 5 5 The information on the Btrieve tab directly corresponds to the information on the Columns tab This correspondence lets you see the SQL equivalents on the Columns tab Note that when Table Modes Table Designer Concepts Designer is in unlinked mode that is when the Btrieve tab is available the Columns tab is read only See Btrieve Tab on page 5 25 for a description of the areas on the tab See Btrieve Tasks on page 5 30 for the tasks that you perform on the tab Table Designer functions in one of two modes linked or unlinked The lower right corner of the main window indicates your current mode Also note that all four tabbed dialogs appear only in the unlinked mode Figure 5 2 Mode Indicator E Pervasive Table Designer DEMODATA Billing Eile Edt View Tools Help FEIRARRIPE Column name Size Position Decimal Null Case
380. tocols to Use C Use any available protocol Use only these protocols M TCPAP IM Winsock IPX SPX Mv NetBIOS After successfully connecting using any protocol PSA will send one or more stress test messages to ensure that the connectivity is sound Specify the number of stress test messages by entering the number in the appropriate field as shown in Figure 7 8 The default number is 75 and while you can specify a maximum of 2 147 483 647 messages a much smaller number of messages should be sufficient in most situations to ensure that your network communication is reliable Figure 7 8 Selecting Number of Stress Test Messages 75 test messages Click OK to save the changes Stress Test Return to Step 4 of the To test your network task on page 7 25 To understand your network test results PSA runs several network tests and displays troubleshooting suggestions when problems occur If you have a successful test the results should look like Figure 7 9 Figure 7 9 Successful Network Test Screen Successfully connected to 127 0 0 1 using TCP IP protocol Successtully transmitted 75 test messages during stress test If your test results in issues to be resolved then the PSA window should list the issues along with tips on how to resolve it Read the information contained in the window scrolling if necessary to understand what steps need to be taken The tips are also recorded in the PSA log file PSA Ta
381. tr newpats btr O OPam m The following command creates the newapp btr file by cloning the patients btr file butil clone newapp btr patients btr m The following command clears the owner name for the newpats btr The owner name for the file newpats btr is Pam o butil clrowner patients btr OPam The following command sets the owner name for the newpats btr to Ron with a restriction level of 1 butil setowner patients btr ORon 1 The following command creates an external index file called newpats idx using a data file called patients btr The patients btr file does not require an owner name The description file containing the definition for the new key is called NEWidx dsc butil index patients btr newpats idx EWidx dsc z The description file shown below defines a new key with one segment The key begins at byte 30 of the record and is 10 bytes long It enables duplicates is modifiable is a string type and uses no alternate collating sequences position 30 length 10 duplicates y modifiable y type string alternate n segment n 8 15 Linux Supplementary Documentation 8 16 The following two examples illustrate how to use the save command to retrieve records from a data file The first example uses the newpats idx external index file to retrieve records from the patients btr data file and store them in an unformatted text file called patients sav fe butil save patients btr pa
382. ts Pervasive SQL servers are also clients The client components of Pervasive SQL are installed with every Server engine or Workgroup engine So you can use your server machine to connect to other servers as a client Pervasive SQL clients can connect to remote machines where a Pervasive SQL Server engine is installed Data Source Names The client server architecture calls for the naming of each specific data set so that it can be referred to by a well known name There are generally three ways to create DSNs 1 Create an Engine DSN from the server console What to Know if You are Recreating DSNs Setting Up ODBC Database Access 2 Create an Engine DSN remotely from a client machine Note On NetWare the only way to create an Engine DSN is to create it remotely from the client 3 Create a Client DSN on each client machine While Pervasive tools can access remote databases without a client DSN present on the client machine ODBC based applications such as Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access cannot do so You must create a client DSN on each client computer that needs to access network databases from local applications Components of a Database Name There are two components of a database name Pervasive SQL uses an internal Database Name DBNAME to identify the location of the Data Dictionary Files DDFs and the data files for each database An ODBC Data Source Name DSN entry refers to one DBNAME You may set up m
383. ty feature will not work Offline files such as Windows XP Offline Documentation must be disabled Fast user switching allows only two types of users classified as administrators or limited Only administrators can turn on or turn off fast user switching Windows XP Professional allows two modes of operation local and remote desktop Remote desktop uses an XP client to access an XP machine from a remote computer In many respects the remote desktop feature is similar to terminal services under Windows NT or Windows 2000 You may also use a Pervasive SQL client on an XP machine to communicate with a Pervasive SQL Server engine across a network The client functions the same as it does on any other Windows platform supported by Pervasive SQL 2 56 Using the Fast User Switching Feature of Windows XP Fast User Switching in Local Mode with Pervasive SQL The following conditions apply when you use a Pervasive SQL client and Workgroup engine in local mode Local mode refers to a local client communicating with a local engine s Only one instance of the engine may be run at a time You cannot run separate copies of the engine within separate user sessions Ifyou attempt to start the engine that has already been started by another user the engine will not restart No error message appears and no tray icon appears Ifstarted by a user the engine runs in the session of the first user to start the engine The operating syste
384. ty on 3 22 Server DSN not found in connection string 9 2 registering in PCC 3 4 troubleshooting network protocols 9 6 Service log in authority for this account 2 13 stopping Workgroup engine when using fast user switching 2 57 Service pack identifying level 9 15 Services starting and stopping with PCC 3 28 Setting Database Security 3 22 Setting up database access Access to database setting up 2 21 database access on client 2 40 Shadowing database 9 31 Shared files troubleshooting 9 19 SmartScout replaced by Pervasive System Analyzer 7 1 Smithware 9 23 SMP see Multiple processors SQL CREATE GROUP 9 25 CREATE USER 9 25 executing statements 3 32 GRANT 9 25 SQL Data Manager 3 32 active grid 6 5 aggregate functions 6 33 AVG average aggregate function 6 33 commenting lines 6 9 Count aggregate function 6 33 criteria operators lt 6 34 lt 6 34 lt gt 6 34 6 34 gt 6 34 gt 6 34 BETWEEN 6 34 IN 6 34 IS NOT NULL 6 34 IS NULL 6 34 LIKE 6 34 NOT BETWEEN 6 34 NOTIN 6 34 NOT LIKE 6 34 getting started with 6 40 group by 6 33 joining two tables 6 13 6 87 main window GUI reference 6 16 About 6 28 Active Grid 6 26 Add Table command 6 25 Change Query Type command 6 25 Clear command 6 24 Close Database 6 18 Continue 6 24 Copy 6 20 Cut 6 19 Developer Center Web 6 27 Exit 6 19 File menu 6 17 Find 6 20 Find Next 6 20 Glossary 6 27 Grid Results tab 6 30 Group By command 6 25 How Do I 6 26
385. ubleshooting Security 9 16 Can install Pervasive SQL in a Load Balancing environment That is not supported at this time Can install Pervasive SQL on a server running Btrieve v6 x or earlier No you cannot run Pervasive SQL and Btrieve 6 x on the same computer at the same time l installed Pervasive SQL on my Netware 5 x server and it still says am running the older version What s wrong With Netware 5 x you have to shut down the server and reboot for the new version of the database engine to be loaded into memory How do I keep my Workgroup Engine from starting up automatically when I reboot You must remove it from the Startup group under Start Programs On Windows 98 the contents of this group are located at c windows start menu programs startup On Windows NT the contents of this group are located at c winnt profiles user start menu programs startup On Windows 2000 the contents of this group are located at c Documents and Settings user start menu programs startup On Windows NT 2000 user can be replaced by All Users or any user as appropriate Your security model is confusing When do login using an operating system user and password and when do I login using a database user and password This may seem confusing at first but in fact there is only one rule use a database login only after you have already successfully connected to the server and are attempting to access a datab
386. ue building your statement your manually typed WHERE clause will be removed If you wish to keep what is in Query Pane you may save the statements to an ASCII file called a query script See To save an SQL query as a script on page 6 47 and To open an SQL script on page 6 48 SQL Data Manager Concepts Query Builder Diagram Query Builder Diagram allows you to open tables and select columns to which the SQL statements apply If shown Query Builder Diagram always appears as the first pane below the main window toolbar See Figure 6 1 on page 6 3 By default when you start SQL DM only Query Pane is shown and the Grid Results tab is the active tab Query Builder Diagram represents a table as a window within the Diagram pane The title bar of the window contains the name of the table For example Figure 6 6 shows that tables Class and Faculty from the DEMODATA sample database have been added to Query Builder Diagram Figure 6 6 Query Builder Diagram with Tables Class and Faculty Elle Edit View Tools Help OSO REM A a E gt m Sa oe All columns All columns ID Cp Nane _ Dept_Name Section Designation Max_Size _ Salary Start_Date _ Building_Name Start_Time _ Room_Number Finish_Time _ Rsch_Grant_Amount Building_Name Room_Number Faculty_ID Oo O m m m m Bim Each table window shows the columns within that table For SELECT UPDATE and INSERT
387. umber 555 1212 is a value Column or Field Another element is a column or a field A column represents a characteristic with no specific value Columns generally have names that describe the given characteristic For example in the telephone book Name and Phone are columns They do not have specific values unless you look up a particular person Field is sometimes used to refer to the generic characteristic of a specific row For example someone might point to a specific box in the table above and ask What is the value of that field Row or Record Another element is called a row or a record A row is a collection of all the values for one particular instance For example one entry in 1 5 Introducing Pervasive SQL 1 6 the phone book complete with name address and phone number is one record or row Cell A cell is a column within a specific record You can think of it as the intersection of a row and a column Each cell has a specific value For example you might tell a co worker The value of the cell located at row 2 column 3 is 12345 Table A collection of rows and columns makes up a table A table is a set of data that shares exactly the same structure Tables generally have names that describe the contents of the table For example the table above is called Phone Book With Pervasive SQL each table is stored as a separate data file on the hard disk Index An index is an ordered
388. umns tab and Btrieve tab This command and icon are disabled on the Columns tab when Table Designer is in unlinked mode Modes on page 5 5 To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 To delete a column on page 5 41 Move Up command or icon Moves the selected column up Note that changing column position on the Columns tab affects the physical database This command and icon are enabled only on the Columns tab and Btrieve tab This command and icon are disabled on the Columns tab when Table Designer is in unlinked mode Modes on page 5 5 To change Table Designer mode on page 5 32 To change column order on page 5 40 Table Designer GUI Visual Reference GUI Object Description Related Information Move Down Moves the selected column Modes on page 5 5 command down Note that changing column position on the To change Table or Columns tab affects the Designer mode on page T icon physical database 5 32 This command and icon a P enabled only on the Columns TO change column order tab and Btrieve tab on page 5 40 This command and icon are disabled on the Columns tab when Table Designer is in unlinked mode Insert Index Inserts an index at the cursor To insert an index on command location page 5 48 or This command and icon appear only on the Indexes Ed icon tab Delete Index Deletes the index currently
389. umpfile Tdatalength Ekeylength H V A Oowner The roll fwd command recovers changes made to a data file between the time of the last backup and a system failure The MKDE stores the changes in a log If a system failure occurs you can restore the backup copy of your data file and then use the rol1fwd command which applies all changes stored in the log to your backup copy save sourceFile unformattedFile Y indexFile N lt keyNumber 1 gt Oowner The save command retrieves records from a Pervasive SQL formatted data file using the specified index path and places them in a sequential file that is compatible with the required format for the load command Save generates a single record in the output sequential file for each record in the input data file Upon completion save displays the total number of records saved The Maintenance Utility performs no conversion of the data in the records Therefore if you use a text editor to modify an output file containing binary data be aware that some text editors may change the binary data causing the results to be unpredictable indexFile is used if you do not want to save records by using the default of the lowest key number keyNumber is used if you do not want to save records using the default of the lowest key number 1 is the specification for saving the records in physical order using the Pervasive SQL Step operations setowner sourceFile owner level The setow
390. ust replace with appropriate values as in file name An ellipsis following information indicates you can repeat the information more than one time as in parameter The symbol means one item is defined in terms of another For example a b means the item a is defined in terms of b xvii About This Manual xviii chapter Introducing Pervasive SQL Understanding Pervasive SQL and its Capabilities This chapter provides an explanation of what Pervasive SQL is and what it can do for you This chapter is divided into the following sections Understanding Pervasive SQL on page 1 2 m Key Concepts on page 1 5 m Why Pervasive SQL on page 1 10 m Understanding the Product Family on page 1 12 m Helpful Utilities on page 1 15 m Using Pervasive SQL Documentation on page 1 17 m File System Security on page 1 20 1 1 Introducing Pervasive SQL Understanding Pervasive SQL Pervasive SQL is a comprehensive database management system built around Pervasive Software s MicroKernel Database Engine Pervasive SQL offers easy installation uncomplicated maintenance and high levels of performance and reliability This section explains the product and its components What is a Loosely defined a database is simply a collection of data Generally Database the data is structured by dividing it into sub sets of information that share the same characteristics So
391. values in the database A checked square M indicates that case insensitive values are used A shaded square indicates that case sensitivity does not apply to the data type Collate Specifies that an alternating To set a column collating collating sequence ACS is sequence on page 5 46 used for sorting Contains the path and ACS file name Default Specifies a default value for To set a column default the column The default value on page 5 47 is used if you perform an SQL INSERT for a row but do not provide a value for the column The following image shows the Indexes tab of the GUI The table below the image describes the GUI objects The menu items and icons are explained in Main Window on page 5 8 Figure 5 5 Indexes Tab Pervasive Table Designer Ele Edit View Tools Help ica een agi ae Index name Column Duplicate Modifiable Sort Table Designer GUI Visual Reference GUI Object Description Related Information Index Name Specifies the name of the To insert an index on index page 5 48 Column Specifies the column used to To specify index sort create the index for sorting column on page 5 51 Duplicate Specifies that the index can To allow duplicates in have duplicate values index on page 5 51 Modifiable Specifies that the key value To specify index as can be modified after creation modifiable on
392. vasive SQL client even if another version currently exists on your machine However you cannot restore the archive of either a Workgroup engine or client to a folder where another version currently exists You also cannot restore a Workgroup engine or client to a machine where a current Pervasive SQL Server engine exists gt To specify the location at which you wish to delete components or archives 1 Select Delete Components or Archives as shown in Figure 7 1 on page 7 12 2 Specify the location from where you want to delete Pervasive components Local Machine the machine from which you are currently running PSA Mapped drive to NetWare volume Remote NetWare server linked to a client through a mapped network drive PSA Tasks Note If this selection is disabled then your Windows machine has no mapped drives to NetWare volumes To delete Pervasive components on a remote NetWare server map a drive to the NetWare volume where Pervasive components are installed 3 Click Next to continue 4 Ifyou are deleting from a Windows machine see To specify what to delete on a Windows machine on page 7 19 If you are deleting from a NetWare machine see To specify what to delete on a NetWare machine on page 7 20 gt To specify what to delete on a Windows machine 1 Select the items you want to delete You can select to delete Pervasive SQL components and registry settings or Pervasive archives Delete Pervas
393. vides an outline of how to work with Pervasive Software and describes the Pervasive SQL database family Using Pervasive SQL Documentation Online Help Pervasive SQL comes with a full set of online documentation available in the Pervasive program group on your Start menu You can download other formats and related documentation from this address http www pervasive com support technical online_manuals asp You can also find additional information on the Web site at http www pervasive com support DataSheets asp http www pervasive com library 1 19 Introducing Pervasive SQL File System Security 1 20 The Pervasive SQL engine adheres to the file system security defined by the specific operating system OS such as Windows NT File Sharing or Novell Storage Services Only the Server engine can enforce OS level file security based on the privileges assigned to the login user name The Workgroup product does not attempt to do this In a small office where Workgroup engines are most common this can be considered a plus because they are usually short on networking experts and the fewer barriers to successful data access the better Using Pervasive SQL E chapter A Walk through of Basic User Tasks If you have not already done so install Pervasive SQL V8 by following the instructions in Getting Started with Pervasive SQL This chapter cover the basic tasks you need to know to work with Pervasive
394. view the Application Migration Guide available on the web site http www pervasive com library index asp _shownode MIG dumped Btrieve records to a file and now can t read the file What happened If you use the Btrieve Maintenance Utility to save dump the records the resulting file contains the binary image of each record Unless the record consists entirely of character data it may not be readable to the human eye The only way that Pervasive SQL can dump a record in ASCII readable format is by reading the DDFs to get a description of the total contents of the record Btrieve only has the record length the data type of indexes and length of the indexes Btrieve does not have information on how to interpret the entire contents of the record Does Pervasive SQL take advantage of multiple processors Pervasive SQL fully supports symmetric multiprocessing SMP and multiple processors because it is multi threaded and thread safe However Pervasive SQL does not take direct advantage of any call specific for SMP and is not multiprocessor aware In an SMP environment the operating system schedules available threads on the available processors including threads for Pervasive SQL Since Pervasive SQL is multi threaded and thread safe SMP can yield a performance boost for up to four CPUs No significant advantage has been shown however to bypass the operating system scheduling and use SMP specific calls to become SMP aware Thi
395. w into Query Builder Grid This task requires that Query Builder Grid be active showing 1 Right click on the row that you want to move down 2 Click Insert Row The inserted row is placed above the row that contained the cursor gt Toclear the contents of a row s on Query Builder Grid This task requires that Query Builder Grid be active showing 1 Right click on the row that you want to clear 2 Click Clear Row s The clear action removes the values from all of the grid cells for that row but leaves the empty row in the grid The SQL statement in Query Pane is rebuilt You may also select and clear multiple rows To select multiple rows press and hold down the Shift or Control key then click the indicator column for the desired rows Once the desired rows are selected right click and click Clear Row s 6 87 SQL Data Manager The indicator column is the leftmost column in the grid gt To delete a row s from Query Builder Grid This task requires that Query Builder Grid be active showing 1 Right click on the row that you want to delete 2 Click Delete Row s or press the Delete key The delete action removes the row in the grid The SQL statement in Query Pane is rebuilt You may also select and delete multiple rows To select multiple rows press and hold down the Shift or Control key then click the indicator column for the desired rows Once the desired rows are selected right click and cli
396. way for Microsoft Access to locate the data source that contains the linked table Figure 2 33 Importing External Data Using Access E Microsoft Access Eile Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Bw S o B S e8 O new CtrleN gt Open Ctrl O In the Link dialog box in the Files Of Type box select ODBC Databases The Select Data Source box lists the defined data sources for any ODBC drivers that are installed on your computer Click on the Machine Data Source tab as shown in the figure below Figure 2 34 Access Display of ODBC Source List Select Data Source File Data Source Machine Data Source Data Source Name dBASE Files User dBase Files Word User DeluxeCD User demodata System Pervasive ODBC Engine Interface Excel Files User FoxPro Files Word User MS Access Database User NewData System Pervasive ODBC Engine Interface gt Description ier imerd aba Darriinainin INDO Canina Intarfgan New A Machine Data Source is specific to this machine and cannot be shared User data sources are specific to a user on this machine System data sources can be used by all users on this machine or by a system wide service 2 49 Using Pervasive SQL 2 50 7 8 9 Select the ODBC data source that you want to link If the ODBC data source that you selected requires you to log on enter your user name and password additi
397. ween tables by clicking on a column in one table and dragging the column to a corresponding column in another table A join line then appears between the two table windows Each pair of columns connected in this manner contains its own join line so two tables may show one or more join lines Note that the SQL statement created uses a WHERE clause and not the JOIN syntax The following image shows a join line between columns ID in tables Faculty and Person 6 13 SQL Data Manager Figure 6 8 Example of Join Line Between Columns D e E Et A a eA gt wm Re ele 2 All columns a D ives First_Name Last_Name Perm_Street Perm_City Perm_State Perm_Zip Perm_Country Street City State Rsch_Grant_Anount OOUUUUUUUU Query Builder Grid Query Builder Grid lets you refine an SQL statement based on the tables and selected columns in Query Builder Diagram The Grid allows you to specify query options for the SQL statements such as which columns to include in the results how to order the results the criteria for the statement and so forth Query Builder Grid always appears as the first pane below Query Builder Diagram if shown See Figure 6 1 on page 6 3 If Query Builder Diagram is hidden Query Builder Grid appears as the first pane below the main window toolbar Each of the four types of SQL statement that you can build with Query Builder uses a Query Builder Grid specific for t
398. work user Network users have a domain name and a backslash preceding the user name such as BOSTON GILBERT Be sure that the user who is a member of the Administrators group or Pervasive_Admin group is a local user If you have checked permissions and your user login does in fact meet one of the criteria above then you should also check to make sure that you are logged into the correct network For example if you generally use the NetWare client to access servers on your network but you are attempting to create a database on a Windows NT server Error Messages from PCC you must make sure that you are logged into the Microsoft network not only the Novell network on your LAN You can verify whether you are logged into the correct network by attempting to read or write to a server that you are certain uses the target operating system Unable to connect to the specified remote server Verify that all of the communication components are loaded on the remote server and that there are available sessions and try again You may receive this error when attempting to register a new remote server in PCC There are several reasons you may receive this error 1 You mis typed the server name The database client tried to connect to a server that does not exist Solution Double check the name of the server and make sure you can see it in your Network Neighborhood spelled exactly how you entered it If you know the server exists but you can
399. xpect to continue using my old applications and files and phase in new applications to access the same files through the SQL engine SRDE Is this a false expectation page 9 28 Upgrading and Migration How can migrate a Btrieve database from NetWare to Windows NT 2000 or vice versa page 9 28 Where can find information on migration from earlier product versions to Pervasive SQL V8 Where can find migration and compatibility information page 9 29 When create a table using an existing Btrieve file the wizard displays fewer columns than there are in the Btrieve file What s wrong page 9 28 Miscellaneous dumped Btrieve records to a file and now can t read the file What happened page 9 29 Does Pervasive SQL take advantage of multiple processors page 9 29 How do run Pervasive SQL in trace mode page 9 30 Does garbage collection occur in the data files and indexes For example is space from deleted records recovered or reused page 9 30 Is database shadowing available allowing a complete up to date second copy of the database to exist on another drive or machine page 9 31 Installation Frequently Asked Questions What is the mechanism that allows the database to be backed up online What happens if the server goes down in the middle of a backup with many open transactions page 9 31 Will lose my data files if uninstall my existing version of the product
400. y Criteria ore ote Room Room x a gt SELECT Room FROM Room Building Name Number Capacity Type Billingsley Building 202 2 Office Boerner Building 100 30 Classroom Boerner Building 101 30 Classroom Boerner Building 103 30 Classroom Boerner Building 105 30 Classroom Boerner Building 200 2 Office Boerner Building 202 2 Office Boerner Building 206 2 Office Budinszky Building 102 50 Classroom Notice that room 100 is one of the rooms listed in the Boerner Building 5 Activate word wrap in Query Pane if it is not already activated 6 Set Query Builder to build a DELETE statement Query type x C Select C Update Cancel C Insert Notice in the table window that none of the columns are selectable for a DELETE statement You cannot delete individual columns so check boxes do not appear in the table window Instead of selecting columns you specify the criteria in Query Builder Grid for the rows you want to delete as explained next 6 84 SQL Data Manager Tasks 7 Inthe Query Builder Grid specify that you want to work with columns Room Building Name and Room Name Remember to press the Tab key to move from the DE Room Name cell SQL DM should show something similar to the following 1 All columns Building_Name Number Capacity Table Criteria or Ro
401. y Criteria Ha a E ID Number Person First Name Person Last name Person James Lisa SFN ORKA Person First_Name ID AS ID Number Person First_Name AS Person LastName Person Last_Name AS Last name FROM Person First_Name James OR vist_Name Lisa AND Person Last_Name gt N 14 Click Person Last_Name in the list 15 Press the Tab key 5 times to position the cursor to the Criteria column 16 In the Criteria cell type lt T and press the Tab key SQL DM should show something similar to the following Column Alias Table Result Orderby Criteria or or or Person D ID Number Person E Person FirstName First Name Person amp James Lisa Person Last_Name Last name Person Z gt N D perar Person amp lt T O SELECT Person ID AS ID Number Person First_Name AS First Name Person Last_Name AS Last name Person Last_Name FROM Person WHERE Person First_Name James OR Person First_Name Lisa AND Person Last_Name gt N AND Person Last_Name lt T Notice that the SQL statement now contains the AND clauses for last name 17 Click Tools Query Run Current SQL Statement in Grid or click m SQL Data Manager Tasks This time t
402. y the location of the data files Figure 2 11 Naming the New Database on the Server Name Jdemodata2 Directory fe pysw demodata H E Use GEMVANE Conversion I Use advanced settings 2 27 Using Pervasive SQL 2 28 10 Note If you are working with a Server engine you must specify a full path not a mapped drive that makes sense on the server The Server engine cannot interpret mapped drive paths For example if you have a mapped drive S data1 datafiles on your client referring to the folder C servers data1 datafiles on the server you must enter the server based directory C servers datal datafiles If you wish to use any advanced features such as specifying that the DDFs and data files are not located in the same directory that the DDFs and data files are located in multiple directories or modifying the default DBNAME settings you must click the Use advanced settings option Click Next If you clicked the Use advanced settings option proceed to step 11 The final wizard step verifies the successful creation of the database Click Finish The database is ready to access If you just created a Server DSN for the database engine you must proceed to setting up client DSNs on each client workstation as explained in Setting Up Client Access on page 2 40 Advanced settings procedure 11 12 If you clicked the Use advanced settings option you see a window as shown below Figure 2 12 Adv

Pervasive.SQL V8 User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents